Number system

Types of Number System

1. Hindu Number System 2. English Number System 3. Roman Number System

10,00,00,000

1,00,00,000
Ten Crores

Ten Lakhs
10,00,000

Thousand

Thousand

Hundreds
1,00,000

Tens 10

Units 1
10,000
Crores

Lakhs

1000
Ten

100
Hindu Number System

108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 1

Hundred Thousand
Millions 1,000,000
Hundred Millions

Ten Thousands
Ten Millions
100,000,000

10,000,000

Thousands

Hundreds
100,000

10,000

Units
1000

Tens
100

10
English Number System

1
Roman Numerals I V X L C D M
Roman Numbers
Hindu-Arabic Numerals 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000

 Classification of Numbers :

NANCE 1 1
 Number system
(i) Natural Numbers: (N)  Terminating Decimals :
Set of all counting numbers from p
1 to  , N 1, 2, 3, 4, ... . Rational number   for which long
q
(ii) Whole Numbers: (W) division terminates after a finite number of
Set of all natural numbers including steps are called Terminating Decimals.
zero, W  0,1, 2, 3, 4, ... . OR

(iii) Integers : When q is of the form (2m × 5n) for some

Set of all positive and negative numbers non negative integers m and n
including zero from , to  , I or Z  33
e.g., (0.75, – 0.02, etc)
{...,-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ...}. 50
Positive integers {0, 1, 2, 3, 4..........}
 Non-Terminating Repeating (Recur-
Negative integers {............–3, –2, –1}
ring) Decimals Numbers :
(iv) Rational Numbers : p
These are real numbers which can be Rational numbers   for which the long
q
expressed in the form of p/q, where p division is non terminating but repeating
and q are integers and q  0.
are called Non Terminating or Recurring
e.g., 2/3, 37/15, -17/19.
Decimals
 Rational Numbers in decimal form : OR
Every rational number when expressed If q  (2m × 5n)
in decimal form is expressible either in
17
Terminating or in e.g., (0.666, –2.333, etc)
90
Non-Terminating Repeating Decimal form.

 Classification of Decimals :
Decimals

Terminating Decimals Non-Terminating Decimals

(Rational Numbers) (Infinite Decimals)

Non-Terminating Non-Terminating-Non-Repeating
Repeating Decimals Decimals (Irrational Numbers)

Pure Recurring Decimals Mixed Recurring Decimals

NANCE 2
 Number system

 Pure Recurring Decimals : (f) Like Fractions : Fractions having the

The decimal representation in which all the same denominators are called the like
digits after the decimal point repeat is fractions.
called Pure Recurring Decimals. Ex. 1/5, 3/5, 7/5, ............. etc.
e.g., 0. 3 , 1.09 etc. (g) Unlike Fractions : Fractions having
different denominators are called unlike
 Mixed Recurring Decimals : fractions.
The decimal representation in which at Ex. 2/5, 4/3, 7/9, ............. etc.
least one digit after the decimal point does
not repeat is called Mixed Recurring (h) Mixed fraction : Fract ion which
Decimals. combines whole number and fractional
e.g., 0.27 , 0.5321 etc. part i.e., 4 3 is called Mixed fraction.
7
(i) Complex fraction : Fraction in which
(a) Common Fraction : Fraction whose both Numerator and Denominator are
denominator is not 10 is called Common 4/5
fraction i.e., is called Complex
Fraction. 6/7
fraction.
(B) Decimal Fraction : Fraction whose
denominator is 10 or any power of 10 is (j) Compound fraction : The fraction of a
called Decimal Fraction. fraction is called compound fraction i.e.,
1 1 1
(C) Proper Fraction : Fraction in which × =
3 2 6
Numerator is less than the Denominator
i.e., 2 is called Proper Fraction. (k) Continued fraction: Fraction consists of
3 the fractional denominators
(D) Improper fraction : Fraction in which
Numerat or is greater than t he 1
i.e., 1 
Denominator i.e., 7 is called Improper 1
2
fraction. 4 1
3
1
(e) Equivalent Fractions : Two or more 4
5
fractions said to be equivalent if the
multiplication or division of both the NOTE :- Improper fraction can be written in the


numerator as well as the denominator of form of mixed fraction.

first fraction by the same number gives
(v) Irrational Numbers (Non-Terminating-
another fraction.
Non-Repeating Decimals) :
Eg. 9/5 is multiplied by 3 for numerator
Numbers which can neither be expressed
as well as denominator.
as terminating decimal nor as a repeating
9 × 3 / 5 × 3 = 27 / 15 decimal is called Irrational Numbers.
Here, 9 / 5 and 27 / 15 are called
equivalent fraction. e.g., 2 , 3 4 , 2  3 , 2  3 , 4 7 3 .etc.

NANCE 3
 Number system

(vi) Imaginary Numbers : (x) Composite Numbers :

All the numbers whose square is negative All natural numbers, which are not prime
are called Imaginary Numbers. are Composite Numbers. A number
e.g., 3i, -4i, i,...; where i =  1 which is divisible by other numbers
except one and itself. If C is the set of
(vii) Complex Numbers : composite number then C = {4, 6, 8, 9,
The combined form of real and imaginary 10, 12, ....}.
numbers is called Complex Numbers. It is NOTE :- 1 is neither prime nor composite


denoted by Z = A + iB where A is real number.

part and B is imaginary part of Z and
(xii) Even Numbers :
A, B  R .
All integers which are divisible by 2 are
NOTE :- The set of complex number is the super called even numbers. Even numbers are
set of all the sets of numbers. denoted by the expression 2n, where n is
any integer, So, if E is a set of even
(viii) Real numbers : numbers, then E = {.......-6, -4, -2, 0, 2,
Rational numbers and Non rational 4, 6........}.
numbers taken together are called Real
(x) Odd Numbers :
Numbers. Thus real number is either
All integers which are not divisible by 2
rational or irrational but cannot be
are called odd numbers. Odd numbers are
simultaneously both. Numbers which can
denoted by the general expression 2n - 1
represent actual physical quantities in a
where n is any integer. If O is a set of
meaningful way. These can be represented odd numbers, then
on the number line. Number line is
O = {..., -7, -5, -3, -1, 1, 3, 5, 7........}.
geometrical straight line with arbitrarily
defined zero (origin). (x) Prime Numbers :
Numbers which are not divisible by any
(ix) Absolute value of a real number : The natural numbers except unity and itself.
absolute value or modulus of a real e.g., 2,3,5,7,11,13,17,19,23.... etc . If P
number x is denoted by |x|, is defined as is the set of prime numbers then
 x, if x  0 P = {2,3,5,7......}.
|x| = 
 –x, if x  0 Prime numbers are divided into three
types :
Ex. The absolute value of 13 × (– 4) + 9 – 14
(i) Co-prime (Relatively prime)
is -
(ii) Twin primes
(a) – 52 (B) – 57 (C) 52 (D) 57
(iii) Prime Triplet
Sol. The absolute value of 13 × (– 4) + 9 – 14
= | 13 × (– 4) + 9 – 14 | (xi) Co-prime Numbers :
= | – 52 – 5 | If the Highest Common Factor of the given
numbers (not necessarily prime) is 1 then
= | – 57 |
they are called Co-prime Numbers. e.g.,
= – (– 57) 4, 9 are co-prime as H.C.F. of
= 57 (4, 9) = 1.

NANCE 4
 Number system
NOTE :- Any two consecutive numbers will (f) Triangular Numbers- The numbers which
always be co-prime. can be represented in the form of a
triangle are called Triangular Numbers.
(xii) Twin prime Numbers : They can be represented in the form of
The difference between any two primes is n(n  1)
2 are called twin primes. , where n is a natural number
2
Ex.:- 3,5 11,13 17,19
(g) Beast Number- The number 666 is said
(xiii) Prime Triplet : to be a beast numbers having following
The set of three consecutive primes is called properties.
a prime triplet.  22 + 32 + 52 + 72 + 112 + 132 + 172
Ex. :- set {3, 5, 7} is a prime triplet
= 666
 13 + 23 + 33 + 43 + 53 + 63 + 53 + 43
(a) Perfect Numbers- A number for which + 33 + 23 + 13
the sum of all its factors is twice the = 666
number is called a Perfect Number.  1.2.3 + 4.5.6 + 7.8.9 = 666
If 2k –1 = Prime Number  (6 + 6 + 6) + (63 + 63 + 63) = 666
2k–1 (2k–1) is a perfect number
e.g., 6, 28, 496 ......... etc. (h) Pythagoren Number- A number is said
Factors of 6 are 1, 2, 3 and 6 to be Pythagoren Number if
Their sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 6  One of the legs must be multiple of 3.
= 12  One of the legs must be multiple of 4.
= 2 × 6  One of the legs must be multiple of 5.
(B) Armstrong Numbers- Number for which (i) Hardy Ramanujan Number– A number
the sum of the cubes of its digits is equal having factors such that they are in A.P.
to the original number is called an e.g., 1729 = 1 × 7 × 13 × 19.
Armstrong Number.
e.g., 13 + 53 + 33 = 153 (j) Amicable Number : Amicable number
is 2.
(C) Palindrome Numbers- If a number and
2 + 2 = 4
its reverse both are same then those are
called Palindrome Numbers. 2 × 2 = 4
e.g., 123454321 22 = 4

(D) Fibonacci Numbers- Fibonacci Numbers

are sequence of integers where each
1. Closure
number is the sum of two preceding it.
a + b or a × b = number
e.g., 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34,......
2. Commutative
(e) Powerful Numbers- Powerful Numbers a + b=b+ a , a × b= b× a
are the numbers in which base is equal to
3. Associative
power such numbers are called Powerful
Numbers. a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c,
e.g., 3435 = 33 + 44 + 33 + 55. a × (b × c) = (a × b) × c

NANCE 5
 Number system
4. Distributive law a = bq + r, where 0  r  b
a × (b + c) = (a × b) + (a × c) Here we call a as dividend, b as divisor,
5. Additive Identity q as quotient and r as remainder
a + 0 = 0 + a = a , ‘0’ is additive identity. Dividend
6. Multiplicative identity = (Divisor × Quotient) + Remainder.
a × 1 = 1 × a = a ‘1’ is multiplicative
identity.
7. Additive Inverse
a + (– a) = (– a) + a = 0
 H.C.F. (Highest Common Factor):
8. Multiplicative Inverse The greatest number which divides all the
a × 1/a = 1/a × a = 1 given numbers is called Highest Common
Factor (H.C.F.).
Properties N W Z R
e.g., 18 and 30 are the given numbers 6
Closure is the only greatest number which divides
(Addition) both 18 and 30 exactly
(Subtraction)
(Multiplication) NOTE :- The product of two numbers a and b
(Division) is equal to the product of their L.C.M.
and H.C.F.
Commutative
(Addition) a × b = H.C.F. × L.C.M.
(Subtraction) Product of ‘n’ number = (H.C.F. of each
(Multiplication) pair)n – 1 × L.C.M. of n pair
(Division)
 L.C.M. (Least Common Multiple):
Associative
(Addition) The least number which is exactly divisible
(Multiplication) by all the given numbers is Least Common
Multiple
Distributive 24 is only least common multiple of 6, 8
(Addition over
and 12
Multiplication)
e.g., L.C.M. of 6, 8 and 12 is 24
Additive Identity
Example :
Multiplicative Identity Find the least number which when divided
by 20, 25, 35 and 40 leaves remainder
Additive Inverse
14, 19, 29 and 34 respectively
Multiplicative Inverse Solution:
( 20 – 1 4) = 6 , ( 25 – 1 9) = 6 ,
 Euclid’s Division Lemma or 35 – 2 9 = 6
Euclid’s Division Algorithm :
40 – 34 = 6 = r
For any two given positive integers a and
b, there exist whole numbers q and r such Required number = L.C.M. of (20, 25,
that 35 and 40) – 6 = 1400 – 6 = 1394

NANCE 6
 Number system
2 20, 25, 35, 40 H.C.F. = 12
2 10, 25, 35, 20 Required No. = 12
2 5, 25, 35, 10
5 5 25, 35, 5
5 1 5 7 1 H.C.F. of fractions
7 1 1 7 1 H.C.F. of Numerators

1 1 1 1 L.C.M. of Denominators
 L.C.M. of fractions
Example : Find the least number which when
divided by a, b and c leaves the same L.C.M. of Numerators

remainder ‘r’ in each case H.C.F. of Denominators
Solution: Let L.C.M. of a, b and c = M Make sure the fractions are in the most
Required number = M + r reducible form.
2 4 5
Example : The traffic lights at three different Example : Find the L.C.M. of , and
3 5 7
road crossing change after every 48 sec,
72 sec and 108 sec respectively. If they Solution : L.C.M. of 2 , 4 and 5
all change simultaneously at 8 : 20 : 00 3 5 7
hours, then at what time will they again L.C.M. of 2,4 and 5 20
change simultaneously ? = = = 20
H.C.F. of 3,5 and 7 1
Solution: Interval of change = (L.C.M. of 48,
72, 108) sec = 432 sec Example : L.C.M. of two distinct natural num-
bers is 211, what is their H.C.F.?
So t he light will again change
Solution : 211 is a prime number, so there is
simultaneously
only one pair of distinct numbers possible
after every 432 seconds i.e., 7min 12 sec. whose L.C.M. is 211, i.e., 1 and 211,
Hence next simultaneous change will take H.C.F. of 1 and 211 is 1.
place at 6 : 27 : 12 hrs.
Example : Find number of prime factors in
Example : Find the greatest number that will divide 2222 × 3333 × 5555
148, 246, 623 leaving remainders 4, 6 and Solution : No. of prime factors
11 respectively = 222 + 333 + 555 = 1110
Solution: Required No. = H.C.F. of (148 – 4),
(246 – 6) and (623 – 11)
Division Algorithm : General representa-
= H.C.F. of (144, 240 and 612)
tion of result is:
2 144, 240, 612 Dividend Re mainder
 Quotient 
2 72, 120, 306 Divisor Divisor
3 36, 60, 153 Dividend
12, 20, 51 = (Divisor  Quotient) + Remainder

NANCE 7
 Number system

TEST OF DIVISIBILITY
No. Divisibility Test Examples
2 Unit digit should be 0 or even . 4096, 23548 as they end with 6 and 8
i.e., even numbers
3 The sum of digits of no. should be divisible by 3. 2143251, sum of the digits is 18 and it is
divisible by 3
4 The no formed by last 2 digits of given no. 548, here 48  4 = 12 and it is divisible by 4
should be divisible by 4.
5 Unit digit should be 0 or 5. 4095 and 235060 as they have 5, 0 at unit places.
6 No should be divisible by 2 & 3 both. 753618, sum of the digits is 30 and it is divisible
by 2 and 3.
8 The number formed by last 3 digits of given 5432, here 432 is divisible by 8
no. should be divisible by 8.
9 Sum of digits of given no, should be divisible 125847, sum of the digits is 27 and it is
by 9. divisible by 9
11 The difference between sums of the digits 9582540, here sum of odd places- sum of
at even & at odd places should be zero or even places (22 – 11 = 11) and 11 is a divisible
multiple of 11. by 11.
25 Last 2 digits of the number should be 2500, 2550 etc.
00, 25, 50 or 75.

• No perfect square number can end with

2, 3, 7 or 8
 Square : When a number is multiplied by
itself then the product is called the square • A perfect square leaves a remainder of
of that number. either 0 or 1, when it is divided by 3. i.e.,
e.g., 2 × 2 = 4 if on dividing a number by 3, we get the
remainder as 2, then the number is not a
 Prefect Square : A natural number is perfect square.
called a perfect square if it is the square e.g., When 35 is divided by 3, then
of any other natural number remainder is 2, but 35 is not a perfect
e.g., 1,4,9,.... are the squares of 1, 2, square
3,... respectively.
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of
either 0 or 1 or 4 when it is divided by 5
i.e., if on dividing a number by 5, we get
• Perfect square numbers end with either 0
a remainder of 2 or 3, then the number is
or 1 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 9.
not a perfect square.
• The number of zeroes at the end of a e.g., When 147 is divided by 5 the
perfect square ending with zeroes is always remainder is 2. So 147 is not a perfect
even. square.

NANCE 8
 Number system
• A perfect square leaves a remainder Clearly 2 has no pair. thus if we multiply
of either zero or 1 or 2 or 4 when divided it by 2 then product will be a perfect
by 7. If on dividing by 7 we get a square.
remainder as either 3 or 5 or 6 then the  Required smallest number is 2.
number is not a perfect square.
e.g., When 143625 is divided by 7, we  Square Roots : The square root of a
get 6 as the remainder, so 143625 is not number is that number which when mul-
a perfect square tiplied by itself gives the product. As we
say square of 9 is 81, then we can also
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of
say that square root of 81 is 9.
either 0 or 1 or 3 or 5 or 9 when it is
divided by 11. The symbol used to indicate the square
root of a number is “ ”
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of 0
or 1 or 3 or 4 or 9 or 10 or 12 when it i.e. 289  17, 225  15 ...etc.
is divided by 13
NOTE :- We can calculate the square root of
• If a number is even, then its square is also positive numbers only. However the square
even. root of a positive number may be a
positive or a negative number.
• If a number is odd, then its square is also
odd e.g., 49 = +7 or –7
 Since,  Properties of Square Roots :
12 = 1
• If the unit digit of a number is 2, 3, 7 or
22 = 4 = 1 + 3
8, then it does not have a square root
32 = 9 = 1 + 3 + 5 in N.
42 = 16 = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7
• If a number ends in an odd number of zeros,
 n2 can be written as the sum of first n then it does not have a square root in N.
odd natural numbers.
• If a number has square root in N, then its
Example : units digit must be 0, 1, 4, 5 or 9.
Find the smallest number by which 800 • The sum of first ‘n’ odd natural numbers
must be multiplied so that the product is is n2.
a perfect square. i.e., 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 +.........+ (2n – 1) = n2
Solution: • The square root of an even number is even
Given number is 800, first we resolve it and square root of an odd number is odd.
into prime factors. e.g., 81  9 , 16 = 4, 625  25 ...etc.
2 800 • Negative numbers have no square root in
2 400 set of real numbers.
2 200
2 100
2 50  Cube : If a number is multiplied by itself
5 25 thrice then the result is called the Cube of
5 5 that Number.
1 e.g., 27 = 3 × 3 × 3 i.e., 27 is a cube
800 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 5 × 5 of 3.

NANCE 9
 Number system

 Perfect Cube : A natural number is said Also we know that (–x)3 = –x3
to be a Perfect Cube. 3
(–x)3 = – x
If there is an integer m such that Hence 3 – x = – 3 x
n = m × m × m = m3 NOTE :-
e.g., 125 is a perfect cube as there is an  The cube of a number ending in 0, 1, 4, 5,
integer 5 such that 125 = 5 × 5 × 5 = 53 6, 9 ends in 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 respectively
Example :  If the cube of a number ending in 3 or 7
ends in 7 or 3 respectively
What is the smallest number by which
 If the cube of a number ending in 2 or 8
7744 must be multiplied so that the
ends in 8 or 2.
product is a perfect cube.
Solution :  Units digits of xn (x  N and n  N) :
Resolving 7744 into prime factor, we get Number of
Units digits of Units digits of
2 7744 possibilities
number (x) the number (xn)
2 3872 (cyclicity)
2 1936 0 0 1
2 968 1 1 1
2 484
2 2, 4, 8, 6 4
2 242
11 121 3 3, 9, 7, 1 4
11 11 4 4, 6 2
1 5 5 1
7744 = (2 × 2 × 2) (2 × 2 × 2) × 11 × 11 6 6 1
We find that 2 occurs as a prime factor of 7 7, 9, 3, 1 4
7744 thrice but 11 occurs as a prime 8 8, 4, 2, 6 4
factor only twice. Thus, if we multiply 9 9, 1 2
7744 by 11, 11 will also occur as a prime
factor thrice and the product will be
2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 11 × 11 × 11,
which is a perfect cube.
A surd is an irrational number. In general if
Hence, we must multiply 7744 by 11 so x is rational, n is positive integer and if
that the product becomes a perfect cube. n
x is irrational, then n x is called a surd
 Cube Root : If n is a perfect cube, then of nth power.
for some integer m, n = m3 . Here the Here x is called radicand, n is called
number m is called the cube root of n radical sign and the index n is called order
If m is a cube root of n we write m = 3 n of the surd. n x is read as nth root of x
e.g., 3 is a cube root of 27 we write and can be written as a1/ n .
n
3 = 3 27 x are called simple surds. If n x is a
surd of nth order then
 Cube Root of Negative Number :  When n = 2, it is called quadratic surd
If x is any positive integer then – x is a  When x = 3, it is called cubic surd
negative integer  When n = 4, it is called biquadratic surd

NANCE 10
 Number system

Example :  Trinomial Surd :

 A compound surd consist of 3 surds is
3 is a surd and 3 is irrational number
called Trinomial Surd.
  is an irrational number but it is not a surd
e.g., 7 + 5 – 3 , 3 5 – 4 2 – 2 11
 Types of Surds :
 Similar Surds :
 Pure Surd :
If two surds are different multiples of the
A surd which has unity only as rational same surd. They are called Similar Surds
factor the other factor being irrational is otherwise they are Dissimilar Surds.
called Pure Surd.
e.g., 2 2, 5 2 are Similar Surds and
3
e.g., 2, 3, 4 4 , 4 5 3 3 , 6 5 are Dissimilar Surds
 Mixed Surd :  Rationalization of Surds :
A surd consisting of the product of a The process of converting a surd to a
rational and irrational is called Mixed Surd rational number by multiplying it with a
suitable Rationalising Factor.
e.g., 5 3 , 2 3 , and if a is rational number
 Rationalizing Factor :
and not equal to zero and n
b is a surd, When the product of two surds is a rational
then a + b , a – n b are mixed surd. If
n number, t hen each surd is called
a = 0 they are called pure surd. Mixed Rationalizing Factor (R.F.)
Surd can be written as Pure Surd. e.g., ( 3  2) ( 3 – 2) = 3 – 2 = 1
which is rational
Ex. Convert 125 into mixed surd.
 R.F. of Monomial Surd :
Sol. 125
 1
1– 
 25 5 One of R.F. of a1/n is a  n

5 5 e.g., 53/5 and 52/5 are Rationalising Factor

 Compound Surd : of each other
A surd which is the sum or difference of  R.F. of Binomial Surd :
two or more surds is called Compound R.F. of (a + b ) is (a – b)
Surd.
R.F. of a– b is a b
3
e.g., 2 + 3, 1 + 2 – 3.
 R.F. of Trinomial Surd :
 Monomial Surd :
R.F. of  ( a  b ) – c)  is
A surd consisting only one surd is called
Monomial Surd.  ( a  b )  c) 
 
e.g., 3 5 , 5 7
 Conjugate Surds :
 Binomial Surd : Two conjugate surds which are differ only
A compound surd consisting of two surds in signs (+/–) between them
is called a Binomial Surd. e.g., a + b and a – b are Conjugate
e.g., 2 + 3 3 , 3 – 7 Surds.

NANCE 11
 Number system

Some times conjugate and reciprocal are m

a mn n  m
same. • n
 a
a
1
e.g., 2 – 3 is conjugate of 2 + 3 and • if an = b then a = b n  a = n
b
m
reciprocal of 2 – 3 is 2 + 3 • n
am  a n
 Comparision of Surds :
 Density Property of Rational Numbers :
If two surds are of same order then one
Between any two different rational numbers,
whose radicand is larger is the larger of the
there are infinitely many rational numbers.
two or if x > y > 0 and n > 1 is + ve
To find many rational numbers between two
integer then n x > n y given distinct rational numbers, use the
e.g., 3
19 > 3
13 , 7
18 < 7
93 . following method.
Let the given rational numbers be a and b.
 Multiplication and Division of 1 1
Then q1  (a  b) , q 2  (q1  b)
Surds : 2 2
The surds of the same order can be
1 1
multiplied or divided by using the rules q3  (q 2  b) , q 4  (q 3  b) , and so on.
n
2 2
(i) anb  n
ab
Here q1, q2, q3, q4 .......... are the rational
n
a a numbers between two distinct rational
(ii) n  n
b b numbers a and b.
If the given surds are not of same order
Ex. Find three rational numbers between
then they are converted to the lowest
common order then operation is performed. 1 1
and .
5 3
Sol. Let q1, q2, q3 be the three required rational
If a > 0, b > 0 and n is a positive rational numbers. Then
number then
1  1 1 1  35  1 8 4
•  a
n n
 n an  a
q1        
2  5 3  2  15  2 15 15
• n
a  n b  n ab
1  4 1 1  45 1 9 3
[Here order should be same] q2        
2  15 3  2  15  2 15 10
n n a
• a  b  n
b 1  3 1  1  9  10  1 19 19
q3        
• n m
a  nm
a  m n
a 2  10 3  2  30  2 30 60

• n p Hence, three rational numbers between

n
a  ap , n
a p  a p/ n
1 1 4 3 19
n p and are , , .
n p
Or, n
am  am  p = (a m ) p 5 3 15 10 60
[Important for changing order of surds] 1 4 3 19 1
or     .
• 5 15 10 60 3
m
a  n a  mn a m  n

NANCE 12
 Number system

Subjective Type Questions : Objective Type Questions :

1. Find two rational numbers between 1. The number with which multiplied by 100
the product reamins the same is -
2 1
and . 1
3 4 (A) 100 (B) 0 (C) (D) 1
100
Insert nine rational numbers between x and 2. Successor of 301, 999 is ___________ .
2.
(A) 30, 200 (B) 302, 000
5 (C) 302, 010 (D) 301, 100
|x| when x  .
9 3. The number which is neither prime nor
2 9 2 x 1 composite is -
2 2 2 (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 5
3. Find x so that         .
3 3 3
4. The LCM of two numbers is x and their
3 6 HCF is y. The product of two number is -
6 
4. Find the value of x if x 3       x y
5 5 (A) (B) (C) x  y (D) xy
y x
5. In a stack there are 5 books each of 5. The smallest number of 4-digits exactly
thickness 20 mm and 5 paper sheets each divisible by 12, 15, 20 and 35 is -
of thickness 0.016 mm. What is the total (A) 1000 (B) 1160
(C) 1260 (D) None of these
thickness of the stack ?
6. Four bells ring at intervals of 6, 7, 8 and
2 1 4 9 seconds respectively. All the bells ring
 2  2  3
         together after ________ seconds.
3  3    2 
6. Simplify :  2 3
. (A) 504 (B) 516 (C) 508 (D) 512
3 3
    7. The greatest number that will divide 137,
2 2 182 and 422 leaving a remainder of 2 in
each case is -
7. A number is multiplied by itself. The product
(A) 15 (B) 12
is 5.0625. Find the number. (C) 21 (D) None of these
8. Find the smallest number that must be 8. The smallest number which when divided
subtracted from 682 to make it a perfect by 4, 6, 10, 15 gives the same remainder
3 is -
cube.
(A) 57 (B) 123 (C) 63 (D) 39
9. Find the cube root of the following : 9. If 2805  2.55 = 1100, then
(i) 729 × 216 280.5  25.5 = ____________
(A) 1.1 (B) 1.01 (C) 0.11 (D) 11
10. I am as much older than my brother who 10. The HCF of two number is 68 and their
is 10 years as I am younger than my father LCM is 2142. If one of the numbers is
who is 70 years. How old I am ? 204, the other number is -
(A) 741 (B) 742 (C) 714 (D) 357

NANCE 13
 Number system
11. There are 264 girls and 408 boys in school. 19. By what number should we multiply 4–3 so
These children are to be divided into that the product may be equal to 64 ?
groups of equal numbers of boys and of (A) 45 (B) 212
girls. The maximum number of boys or girls (C) 26 (D) None of these
in each group will be -
(A) 11 (B) 17 (C) 24 (D) 26  1 2  1 3  6
20. The value of        2 is -
12. The last digit of the number (373)333 is -
 4   4  
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 9
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
13. Given 5  2.236 t he value of
c a b
125  605  245 correct to 3 decimal 21.  xa   xb   xc 
 b    c    a   ____________
places is - x  x  x 
(A) 20.124 (B) 11.180 (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) – 1 (D) 2
(C) 18.652 (D) 16.652
3 3
14. If x, y, z are positive real number and a, b, p 2 3
22. If      then the value of
c are rational numbers, then the value of q 3 2
1 1 1 10
b a c a
 a b c b
 p
1 x  x 1 x  x 1  x  x a c
b c    ____________
is - q
(A) – 1 (B) 1 (A) 1
(C) 0 (D) None of these (B) 0
(C) cannot be determined
2m3  32 mn  5m n3 6n 1 (D) None of these
15. The value of is
6m1  10n 3  15m
equal to - 23. 1  1  1  .......
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2m (D) None of these (A) equals 1
(B) lies between 0 and 1
7  2  13    7 2   13 (C) lies between 1 and 2
16.      .
5   11 25   5  11  25 (D) is greater than 2
This property is -
24. The square root of a perfect square
(A) closure (B) commutative
containing ‘n’ digits has ______ digits
(C) associative (D) identity
n
17. How many pieces of equal size can be cut (A) n  1 (B)
2 2
from a rope of 30 metres long, each (C) A or B (D) None of these
3
measuring 3 meters ?
4 25.  is -
(A) 8 (B) 10 (C) 6 (D) 12 (A) rational (B) irrational
(C) imaginary (D) an integer
18. 0.018 can be expressed in the rational form
as - 26. Express 0.75 as rational number
18 18 75 25
(A) (B) (A) (B)
1000 990 90 33
18 18 3
(C) (D) (C) (D) None of these
9900 999 4

NANCE 14
 Number system

5 1
27. The value of 4  is - (A) 4 (B) (C) 1 (D) 16
1 4
1
3
1 (5)0.25  (125)0.25
36. The value of is -
1 (256)0.10  (256)0.15
2
4 5
(A) 1 (B)
40 4 1 31 4
(A) (B) (C) (D) (C) 100 (D) None of these
31 9 8 40
1 1
37. If x 2 2
 1, then x 2  2 is equal to -
28. The value of 5 5 5 5....... is - x x
(A) 5 (B)  5
(A) 0
(B) 5 (C) 5 (D) 0
(C) can’t be determined n /2 2
(D) None of these 38. Find the value of
  
 n x2  is equal to -

29. The smallest number by which 2560 must (A) 0 (B) x2 (C) x (D) 1/x
be multiplied so that the product is a perfect
cube is - 39. If a1/ 2  b1/ 2  c1/ 2  0, then the value of
(A) 5 (B) 25 (C) 10 (D) 15 (a + b – c)2 is -
30. The value of 3 343  3  64 is - (A) 2ab (B) 2bc
(C) 4ab (D) 4ac
(A) 28 (B) – 28 (C) 18 (D) – 18
40. Which one of the following is not true ?
31. The value of (30  40 )  52 is -
(A) There does not exist any rational
(A) 25 (B) 0 number whose square is 4
(C) – 25 (D) None of these (B) There does not exist any rational
number whose square is 5
1
32. The solution of 33 x 5  is - (C) There does not exist any rational
9x number whose square is 2
5 7
(A) (B) 5 (C) 1 (D) (D) None of these
2 3
41. The only prime number which is even is -
33. 
The value of (2) is - 
(  2 ) ( 3 )
(A) 2 (B) 4
(A) 64 (C) 6 (D) None of these
(B) 32 42. Which of the following is not a composite
(C) cannot be determined number ?
(D) None of these (A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 8
2 2
43. Choose the rational number which does not
34. Simplify (32) 5
 (125) 3

2 1
4 25 2 5 lie between rational numbers  and  .
(A) (B) (C) (D) 5 5
25 4 5 2 1 3
(A)  (B) 
2
1
3 4 10
35. (64) 3    equal to - 3 7
 4 (C) (D) 
10 20

NANCE 15
 Number system

44. 3.25 is equal to - (A) 312 (B) 192 (C) 182 (D) 212
320 321 55. What will be the number of zeros in the
(A) (B)
99 99 square of 500
322 323 (A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) 3
(C) (D)
99 99
56. The square of which of the following would
45. The simplest rationalising factor of 4 48 is - be an even number
(A) 4
9 (B) 4 27 (A) 321 (B) 124
(C) 3
9 (D) None (C) 253 (D) 89

46. The value of | 5  6 |  | 4  3 | on 57. Which of these is not a Pythagorean triplet

simpliifcation is - (A) 7, 8, 9 (B) 6, 8, 10
(A) 13 (B) 12 (C) 11 (D) 10 (C) 5, 12, 13 (D) 12, 35, 37
47. The value of
58. The smallest 3 digit perfect square is
21/ 2  31/ 3  41/ 4 42 / 3  57 / 5  41/ 4 (A) 111 (B) 101

101/ 5  53 / 5 43 / 5  61/ 3 (C) 121 (D) 100
is equal to -
(A) 5 2 (B) 1 (C) 6 (D) 18 59. The greatest 4 digit perfect square is
(A) 9801 (B) 9999
6n3  32.6n1 (C) 1000 (D) 9763
48. The value of is equal to -
6n 2  2.6n1
(A) 36 (B) 1/6 (C) 2 (D) 1 60. The square root of 1.96 will be
(A) 0.14 (B) 1.4
49. L.C.M. of 125, 175 and 255 is -
(C) 1.2 (D) 0.12
(A) 44625 (B) 7575
(C) 7075 (D) 1235 61. Which of the following is not a cube of
negative integer
50. Which of the following number is divisible
by 11 - (A) – 1 (B) 1000
(A) 3,116,365 (B) 901,351 (C) – 8 (D) – 1728
(C) 8,790,322 (D) None of these 62. The cube root of 343 is
51. Which of the following is not a square (A) 3 (B) 7
number (C) 9 (D) 4
(A) 144 (B) 256 (C) 364 (D) 490 1
63. Cube of is -
52. The number of roots of a perfect square 2
number are 1 1
(A) (B)
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 3 (D) 4 4 8
53. Which of the following cannot be the unit’s 1
(C)  (D) – 8
digit of a square number 8
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 9 64. The cube root of 27 × 64 is
54. Which of the following will not each with 1 (A) 14 (B) 12
in the unit’s digit (C) 72 (D) 24

NANCE 16
 Number system
65. By what number should 100 be multiplied (A) 25 (B) 36 (C) 12 (D) 40
to make it a perfect cube
(A) 10 (B) 1 71. 63  175  28 is equal to
1 (A) 7 (B) 0
(C) (D) – 1
10 (C) 2 7 (D)  12 7
66. Cube root of – 0.008 is
1
(A) – 0.2 (B) – 0.02 72. If x  2 2  7 then x  
x
(C) 0.2 (D) – 0.3
(A) 7 (B) 4 2 (C) 8 (D) 2 2
67. Which of the following is not a perfect cube
(A) 8000 (B) 1080 3 2 3 2
73. If x  ,y then
(C) 1728 (D) 2744 3 2 3 2
68. By what number should 5400 be divided x2 + xy + y2 =
to make it a perfect cube (A) 97 (B) 98 (C) 99 (D) 100
(A) 50 (B) 25
(C) 10 (D) 100 1
74. If x  2  3 then the value of x 
4 x
69. Cube of is correct to two decimal places is -
7
 64  64 (A) 3.50 (B) 3.40
(A) (B) (C) 3.46 (D) 3.80
49 343
64 16
(C) (D) 75. If x  3  2 2 t hen t he value of
343 343
x1/ 2  x 1/ 2 is
70. The smallest number that must be added to
500 to make it a perfect cube is (A) 2 (B) 2 2 (C) 3 2 (D) 3

Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A ns . D B B D C A A C D C
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A ns . C C A B B C A D B C
Q. N. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A ns . B A C C B B C B B B
Q. N. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A ns . B C A B A B C B C A
Q. N. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
A ns . A C C C B C A D A B
Q. N. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
A ns . D A B C C B A D A B
Q. N. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
A ns . B B C B A A B B B C
Q. N. 71 72 73 74 75
A ns . B B C C B

NANCE 17
 Algebra

Algebra is that branch of Mathematics in which letters represent any value which we can
assign according to our requirement. These letters are generally of two types : constants and
variables (or literal numbers).

 Constant :  Unlike terms :

A number having a fixed numerical value is Terms having different literal coefficients are
called a constant. called unlike terms.
8 Ex. 5x2,–10x and 15x3 are unlike terms.
Ex. 7, , 4.7,16.5 etc  Polynomial :
3
 Variable : An algebraic expression in which the
A number which can take various numerical variables involved have only non-negative
integral powers is called a polynomial.
values is known as variable.
Let x be a variable, n be a positive integer
Ex. x, y, z, a, b, c, etc.
and a1, a 2,....., an be constants (real
 Algebraic expression : numbers). Then,
A combination of constants and variables f(x) = anxn + an – 1xn – 1 +.....+ a1x + a0
connected by +, –, × and  signs is known is called a polynomial in variable x.
as an algebraic expression. In the polynomial,
Ex. 8x + 7, 11x2 – 13x, 5x5 + 8x2y, etc. f(x) = anxn + an – 1xn – 1 +.....+ a1 x + a0 ,
 Terms : anxn, an – 1xn – 1,..., a1x and a0 are known as
the terms of the polynomial and an, an – 1,
The parts of an algebraic expression
an – 2, ...., a1 and a 0 are called their
separated by + or – signs are called the terms
coefficients.
of the expression.
Ex. In the expression 3x + 4y –7, we call 3x, Note : Note t hat the expressions like
4y and –7 as terms. 3
2x 2  3 x  5, 2x 3   4 etc. are not
 Coefficient of a term : x
Consider the term 8x2. In this case, 8 is called polynomials.
the numerical coefficient and x2 is said to be  Degree of a Polynomial :
the literal coefficient.
The exponent of the highest term in a
In case of 9xy, we have the numerical polynomial is known as its degree.
coefficient as 9 and the literal coefficient 1
as xy. f ( x )  3x  is a polynomial in the
2
 Like terms : variable x of degree 1.
Terms having the same literal coefficients are 1
p(x)  5x 3  3x 2  x  is a
called like terms. 2
Ex. 8x2y, 5x2y and –7x2y are all like terms. polynomial in the variable x of degree 3.

NANCE 18
 Algebra

 Types of polynomials with respect to  Binomial : An expression containing two

degree :. terms is called a binomial.
1. Constant Polynomial : Ex. 3x – 8y, 4xy – 5x, 9x + 5x2, etc.
A polynomial of degree zero is called a  Trinomial : An expression containing three
constant polynomial. terms is called a trinomial.
3 Ex. 5x –2y + 3z, x2 + 2xy – 5z.,
Ex. : f ( x )  7, g ( x )   etc. are constant
2  Relation between the HCF, the LCM and
polynomial. the product of polynomials :
2. Zero Polynomial : If f(x) and g(x) are two polynomials then we
The constant polynomial 0 or f(x) = 0 is have the relation,
called the zero polynomial [HCF of f(x) and g(x)] × [LCM of f(x) and
Note : The degree of the zero polynomial is not
g(x)] =  [f (x)  g(x)]
defined, because
 Zero of a Polynomial :
f(x) = 0, g(x) = 0x, h(x) = 0x2, p(x) = 0x3,
A real number  is a zero of a polynomial
q(x) = 0x12 etc. are all equal to the zero
f(x), if f() = 0.
3. Linear Polynomial :
Finding a zero of a polynomial f(x) means
A polynomial of degree 1 is called a linear solving the polynomial equation f(x) = 0.
polynomial.
Geometrical Meaning of the Zeros of a
Generally, any linear polynomial in variable polynomial :
x with real coefficients is of the form f(x) Geometrically zeros of a polynomial are
= ax + b, where a, b are real numbers and the x-coordinates of the points where its
a  0. graph crosses or touches X-axis.
Ex. 11x – 5, 10y + 7 An an nth degree polynomial can have at
4. Quadratic Polynomial : most n real zeros.
Polynomial of degree 2 is called a
 Relationship Between the Zeros
quadratic polynomial.
and Coefficient of a quadratic
Ex. 5x2 – 8x + 3 polynomial :
5. Cubic Polynomial : Let  and  be the zeros of a quadratic
A polynomial of degree 3 is called a cubic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c. By factor
polynomial. theorem (x – ) and (x – ) are the factors
Ex. 5x3– 6x2 + 7x + 8 of f(x).
6. Bi-Quadratic Polynomial :  f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ), where k is a
A fourth polynomial is called a biquadratic constant.
polynomial.  ax2 + bx + c =
Ex. 3x4 – x3 + 7x2 –2x + 1 k {x2 – (  )x + }
 ax2 + bx + c = kx2 – k ()x + k}
 Types of polynomials with respect to Comparing the coefficients of x2, x and
number of terms : constant terms on both sides, we get
 Monomial : An expression containing only a = k, b = – k (  ) and c = k
one term is called a monomial. c
b
Ex. 8x, –11x2y, –15x2y332, etc.       and  
a a

NANCE 19
 Algebra

Coefficien t of x  
 α β   (i)  2  2 (ii) 
Coefficien t of x 2  
Constant term 1 1
and αβ   3
Coefficien t of x 2 (iii) 3  3 (iv) 3
 
Hence,
 2 2
Sum of the zeros (v) 
 
b Coefficien t of x
  Sol. Since  and  are the zeros of the
a Coefficien t of x 2
Product of the zeros quadratic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c.
c Constant term b c
        and  
a Coefficien t of x 2 a a
If  and  are the zeros of a quadratic (i) We have,
polynomial f(x). Then, the polynomial f(x)  2   2  (  )2  2
is given by
22
f(x) = k {x2 – (  ) x + } 2   b  2c b  2ac
       
or f(x) = k {x2 – (Sum of the zeros) x +  a  a a
Product of the zeros} (ii) We have,
On Finding the values of expressions    2  2 (  ) 2  2
involving zeros of a quadratic polynomial :   
   
Example : b c
2

If  and  are the zeros of the quadratic    2 

a  a
polynomial f(x) = x2 – px + q, then find 
c
the values of
a
1 1 2
  b  2ac
(i) 2  2 (ii)    
    ac
Sol. Since  and  are the zeros of the
(iii) We have,
polynomial of f(x) = x2 – px + q,
p q 3  3  (  )3  3 (  )
        p and    q 3
 1  1 3 b
3 cb
     3  
(i) We have,  a  a a 
 2   2  (  )2  2  b3 3bc  b3  3 abc 3 abc  b3
 3  2  
  2   2  p 2  2q a a a3 a3
(iv) We have,
[ α  β  p and   q]
3abc  b3
(ii) We have, 1 1  3  3
   a3
1 1  p 3 3 ()3 c
3
    
   q a
Example :
If  and  are the zeros of the quadratic 1 1 3abc  b3
  
polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, then 3 3 c3
evaluate :

NANCE 20
 Algebra
(v) We have,  ax 3  bx 2  cx  d
 2 2 3  3 (  )3  3 (  )  k [ x 3  (    ) x 2  (    ) x
  
      ]
3
 b  c  b   ax3  bx2  cx  d  kx3  k (    )x 2
    3    
a  a  a 
  k (     ) x  k
c
Comparing the coefficients of x3, x2, x and
a
2 2
constant terms on both sides, we get
  3abc  b3 a = k, b = – k (    ), c = k
  
  a 2c (    ) and d = – k ()
Example : b c
If sum of the squares of zeros of the         ,      
a a
quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 – 8x + k is d
40, find the value of k. and,   
a
Sol. Let  be the zeros of the polynomial  Sum of the zeros
f(x) = x2 – 8x + k. Then, b Coefficien t of x 2
 
 8 k a Coefficien t of x 3
       8 and    k Sum of the product of the zeros taken
 1  1
c Coefficien t of x
It is given that two at a time  
a Coefficien t of x 3
Product of the zeros
 2  2  40
d Constant term
 
 (  )2  2  40 a Coefficien t of x 3
Where k is any non-zero real number.
[     8 and   k ]
If f(x) = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e is a
 82  2k  40 polynomial of degree 4 having  and
 2k  64  40  as its zeros, then
 2k  24  k  12 b Coefficien t of x 3
α β  γ  δ   
a Coefficien t of x 4
 Relationship between zeros and
α  β  γ  δ      
b
Coefficients of a Cubic polynomial : a
Let    be the zeros of a cubic Coefficien t of x 2

polynomial f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d, Coefficien t of x 4
a  0. Then, by factor theorem, x – , c
or, (α  ) (   )     
x –  and x –  are factors of f(x). Also, a
f(x), being a cubic polynomial, cannot have Coefficien t of x 2
more than three linear factors. 
Coefficien t of x 4
 f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ) (x – ) d
        –
 ax 3  bx 2  cx  d a
Coefficien t of x
 k ( x  ) ( x  ) ( x   ) 
Coefficien t of x 4

NANCE 21
 Algebra
d Now,    = 0 and
or,  (   )   (   )  
a
a=±4  b= 4
Coefficien t of x
 Hence, the zeros are 4, – 4 and 5.
Coefficien t of x 4
e Constant term Division Algorithm for Polynomials :
αβγδ  
a Coefficien t of x 4 Divident = Quotient × Divisor +Remainder
This is known as Euclid’s division lemma
Sum of the zeros
the division of polynomials also follows the
b Coefficien t of x 3
  similar rule which is known as the division
a Coefficien t of x 4
algorithm for polynomials.
Sum of the products of the zeros taken
c Coefficien t of x 2 Example :
two at a time  
a Coefficien t of x 4 Divide the polynomial
Sum of the products of the zeros taken f(x) = 6x3 + 11x2 – 39x – 65 by the
d Coefficient of x polynomial g(x) = x2 – 1 + x. Also, find
three at a time    
a Coefficient of x 4 the quotient and remainder.
Product of the zeros Sol. We have,
e Constant term
 
a Coefficien t of x 4
Example :
Find the zeros of the polynomial
f(x) = x3 – 5x2 – 16x + 80, if its two zeros
are equal in magnitude but opposite in sign.
Sol. Let    be the zeros of polynomial
f(x) such that  = 0.
Then, Clearly, quotient q(x) = 6x + 5 and
2
Coefficien t of x remainder r(x) = – 38x – 60.
Sum of the zeros  
Coefficien t of x 3 Also, 6x3 + 11x2 – 39x – 65
 5 = (x2 + x – 1) (6x + 5) + (– 38x – 60)
         
 1 i.e., f(x) = g(x) q(x) + r(x)
 5 [     0]
or, Divident = Quotient × Divisor +
Product of the zeros Remainder
Constant term
  Division Algorithm :
Coefficien t of x 3
80 If f(x) and g(x) are any two polynomial
    [   5] with g(x)  0, then we can always find
1
polynomials q(x) and r(x) such that
 5   80
f(x) = q(x) g(x) + r(x), where r(x) = 0 or
   16
degree r(x) < degree g(x).
   2  16 If r(x) = 0, then polynomial g(x) is a factor
   4 of polynomial f(x).

NANCE 22
 Algebra
Example : Therefore, LHS is also divisible by the
Obtain all the zeros of the polynomial divisor. Thus, if we subtract remainder from
f(x) = 3x4 + 6x3 – 2x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5, if the divident, then it will be exactly divisible
by the divisor.
5 5 Dividing 8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8 by
two of its zeros are and  .
3 3 4x2 + 3x – 2, we get
5 5
Sol. Since and  are two zeros of f(x).
3 3
Therefore,
 5 5   2 5 1
x   x     x    (3x 2  5)
 
3 3   3 3

Also, 3x2 – 5 is a factor of f(x).
Let us now divide f(x) by 3x2 – 5.
We have,
 Quotient = 2x 2 + 2x – 1 and
Remainder = 14x – 10
Thus, if we subtract the remainder
14x – 10 from 8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8,
it will be divisible by 4x2 + 3x – 2.
Example :If x4 + x3 + 8x2 + ax + b is exactly
divisible by x2 + 1, then find the value of
a and b.
Sol. If x4 + x3 + 8x2 + ax + b is exactly divisible
by x2 + 1, then the remainder should be
zero.
By division algorithm, we have On dividing, we get
3x4 + 6x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5 = (3x2 – 5)
(x2 + 2x + 1)
 3x4 + 6x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5 = ( 3x  5 )
( 3x  5 ) ( x  1) 2
5 5
Hence, the zeros of f(x) are  , ,
3 3
– 1 and – 1.
Example :
What must be subtracted from
8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8 so that the  Quotient = x2 + x + 7 and Remainder
resulting polynomial is exactly divisible by = x (a – 1) + (b – 7)
4x2 + 3x – 2. Now,
Sol. We know that, Remainder = 0
Divident = Quotient × Divisor + Remainder  x (a – 1) + (b – 7) = 0
 Divident – Remainder = Quotient ×
 x (a – 1) + (b – 7) = 0x + 0
Divisor
Clearly, RHS of the above result is divisible  a – 1 = 0 and b – 7 = 0
by the divisor.  a = 1 and b = 7

NANCE 23
 Algebra
 Factorisation of A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC = ay2 + bxy + ax2
A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC = ax2 + bxy + ay2
= (A + B + C) (A2 + B2 + C2 – BC – CA –AB)  f(y, x) = f(x, y)
Also,  Hence, ax2 + bxy + ay2 is symmetric.
A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC Note : An expression which is homogeneous and
1 symmetric is called a homogenous symmetric
 (A  B  C){2A2  2B2  2C2  2BC  2CA  2AB}
2 expression.
1 Ex. ax + ay, ax2 + bxy + ay2.
 (A  B  C)[(B  C) 2  (C  A) 2  (A  B) 2 ]
2
In case A + B + C = 0, we get  Cyclic Expressions :
A3 +B3 + C3 = 3ABC f(x, y, z) is an expression in variable x, y and z.
 Homogeneous expression : If f(x, y, z) = f(y, z, x) then f(x, y, z) is cyclic.
An algebraic expression in which, the degree Example :
of all the terms are equal is a homogeneous a2 (a – b) + b2 (b – c) + c2 (c – a)
expression.
Let f(a, b, c) = a2 (a – b) + b2 (b – c) + c2 (c – a)
e.g. bx + ay is a first degree homogeneous
Now, f(b, c, a) = b2 (b –c) + c2 (c–a) + a2
expression, ax2 + bxy + cy2 is a second
(a –b) = a2 (a –b) + b2 (b–c) + c2 (c–a)
degree homogeneous expression.
f(b, c, a) = f(a, b, c)
Note : The product of two homogeneous  f is cyclic.
expressions is a homogeneous expression. Cyclic expressions are lengthy to write, so
we use symbols  (read as sigma) and
 Symmetric expressions :  (pi) to abbreviate them.
f(x, y) is an expression in variables x and y. is used for sum of terms and  is used for
If f(x, y) = f(y, x), then f(x, y), is called a product of terms.
symmetric expression. Example :
i.e., If an expression remains same after x2 (y2–z2) + y2 (z2–x2) + z2 (x2 –y2) can be
interchanging the variables x and y is said to 2
represented as x (y 2  z 2 )
be a symmetric expression. x, y,z
Example : x2 (y2–z2) = x2 (y2–z2) + y2 (z2 –x2) +
Consider the expressions z2(x2–y2)
(i) ax + ay + b Example :
(ii) ax2 + bxy + ay2 (x2 +y3) (y2 + z3) (z2 + x3) can be represented
(i) Let f(x, y) = ax+ ay + b as :
f(y, x) = ay + ax + b  (x2 + y3) = (x2 + y3) (y2 +z3) (z2 + x3)
= ax + ay + b x , y,z

 f(y, x) = f(x, y)
 Remainder Theorem :
 ax + ay + b is symmetric. When a polynomial p(x) in x is divided by
(x – a), the remainder is equal to the value of
(ii) f(x, y) = ax2 + bxy + ay2
the polynomial p(x) at x = a, i.e., equal to
f(y, x) = ay2 + byx + ax2 p(a).

NANCE 24
 Algebra

 Factor Theorem : By long division method

The binomial (x–a) is a factor of a Let we added ax + b (linear polynomial)
polynomial p(x) in x if and only if the value in p(x), so that p(x) + ax + b is exactly
of the polynomial p(x) at x = a is 0, i.e., divisible by 3x2 + 7x –6
p(a) = 0. Hence, p(x) + ax + b = s(x) = 3x3 + x2
Ex. : To find is x – 2 a factor of –22x + b = 3x3 + x2 – x(22–a) + (9 + b)
p(x) = x3 – 3x2 + 4x – 4, we find the
value of p(2). 3x2 + 7x –6 3x3 + x2 – x(22 –a) + 9 + b
3 2
3x + 7x –6x
p(2) = 23 – 3(22) + 4(2) – 4 – – +
–6x2 + 6x – (22 –a)x + 9 + b
= 8 – 3(4) + 8 – 4 or
= 8 – 12 + 8 – 4 = 0 –6x22 + x – (–16 + a)x + 9 + b
–6x –14x + 12
x – 2 is a factor of x3 – 3x2 + 4x – 4. + + –
x(–2+ a) +(b–3) = 0

Ex.1 Find the remainder when f(x) = 4x3 –3x2 Hence, x (a –2) + b –3 = 0. x + 0
+ 2x – 4 is divided by x – 1.  a –2 = 0 and b – 3 = 0
Sol. When f(x) is divided by x – 1, then  a = 2 or b = 3
remainder = f(1). Hence, if in p(x) we added ax + b or
2x + 3 then it is exactly divisible by
Remainder = f(1) = 4(1 3 ) – 3(1 2) +
3x2 + 7x – 6.
2(1) – 4
= 4 – 3 + 2 – 4 = –1 Ex.4 Find the value of ‘a’ for which
Ex.2 Find the value of a if x + a is a factor of x3 – 7x + 5 is a factor of
the polynomial x3 + ax2 –2x + a + 15. x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a.
Sol. Here Sol. By synthetic division remainder obtained
on dividing
0 = p(–a) = (–a)3 + a(–a)2 –2(–a) + a + 15
x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a by
= –a3 + a3 + 3a + 15 = 3a + 15
x3 – 7x + 5 is a – 3.
 3a = –15   a = –5
If x3 – 7x + 5 is a factor of
Ex.3 What must be added to 3x3 +x2 –22x +9 x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a
so that the result is exactly divisible by  Remainder a – 3 = 0
3x2 + 7x –6.  a = 3.
Sol. Let p(x) = 3x3 + x2 –22x + 9 and
Ex.5 If ‘n’ is odd then prove that x +1 is a
q(x) = 3x2 + 7x –6
factor of xn + 1.
We know if p(x) is divided by q(x) which Sol. Let f(x) = xn + 1
is quadratic polynomial therefore if p(x) is
Remainder f(– 1) = (– 1)n + 1
not exactly divisible by q(x) then the
=–1+1=0
remainder be r(x) and degree of r(x) is
(Since ‘n’ is odd (– 1)n = – 1
less than q(x) or Divisor.
 ‘x + 1’ is a factor of f(x).

NANCE 25
 Algebra
Ex.6 When polynomial f(x) is divided by Sol. Given that
(x – 1), (x – 2) gives the remainders 5, 7 a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c4 – a4) + c4 (a2 – b2)
respectively. What is the remainder By putting b2 = c2,
when same f(x) is divided by the (x – 1) We find that the given expression vanishes,
(x – 2)? therefore (b2 – c2) is a factor of the
Sol. If f(x) is divided by (x – 1) then remainder expression.
is f(1) = 5. Similarly (c2 – a2), (a2 – b2) are also the
If f(x) is divided by (x – 2) the remainder factor of the expression.
is f(2) = 7. Now the product factors of (b2 – c2)
If f(x) is divided by (x – 1) (x – 2) then (c2 –a2) (a2 – b2) is of 6th degree and the
remainder is of first degree given expression is of 6th degree.
i.e., mx + n. So the only factor if possible may be some
f(x) = (x – 1) (x – 2) q (x) + mx + n constant factor.
f(1) = 5  m + n = 5 ...(i) Let some constant factor be k.
f(2) = 2m + n = 7 ...(ii) Putting a = 1, b = 2, c = 3, we have
Solving (i) and (ii) we get m = 2, n = 3. (4 – 9) + 16 (9 – 1 + 81) (1 – 4)
Remainder = 2x + 3 = k (4 – 9) (9 – 1) (1 – 4)
Ex.7 Find the factors of a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 – 5 + 128 – 243 = k (– 5) (8) (– 3)
+ c (a – b)3. – 120 = k . 120
Sol. To find the factors of k=–1
a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 ...(1) Required factors are – (b2 – c2), (c2 – a2),
we see that the given expression vanishes (a2 – b2)
when b = c.  a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c2 – a2) + c4 (a2 – b2).
Thus b – c is factor of the given = – (b – c) (c – a) (a – b) (b + c) (c + a)
expression (1) (a + b)
Similarly (c – a), (a – b) are the factor of Ex.9 Find the factors of a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2
the expression (1). + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc.
Since the expression is of 4th degree, the Sol. a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2 + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc
remaining factor which should be a (b2  c2 )  b (c2  a 2 )  c (a 2  b2 )  2 abc
Symmetrical in a, b and c must be of the ...(i)
form k (a + b + c).
Now the expression vanishes on putting
Thus a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 b=–c
= L (a + b + c) (a – b) (b – c) (c – a)
Therefore (b + c) is a factor is (1).
In order to find the value of ‘k’
Similarly (c + a), (a + b) are also the
Put a = 1, b = – 1, c = 2, we have factors of (1).
1 (– 3)2 – (– 1)3 + 2 (2)3 The given expression is of third degree
= k (1 – 1 + 2) (– 3) (1) and the product of the factors so far
– 27 – 1 + 16 = k (– 12) obtained is also of third degree, hence if
 k = 1 any there may be a constant factor.
Hence a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 i.e.,
= (a – b) (b – c) (c – a) (a + b + c). a (b2 – c2) + b (c2 – a2) + c (a2 – b2) +
Ex.8 Find the factor of 2abc = k (b + c) (c + a) (a + b)
a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c2 – a2) + c4 (a2 – b2). To evaluate k,

NANCE 26
 Algebra
Putting a = 1, b = 1, c = 1, we have Ex.11 Factorise : –10x2 + 31x –24
1 (2) + (2) + 2 + 2 = k (2) (2) (2) –10x2 + 31x –24
 8 = 8k  k = 1 = –[10x2 –31x + 24]
a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2 + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc
 31 24 
= (b + c) (c + a) (a + b)  10  x 2  x    =
Ex.10 Prove the identity  10 10 
2 2
a (b  c)2 b (c  a )2 c (a  b)2  2 31  31   31  24 
  10  x  2 x        
(c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a )  20  20   20  10 
= a + b + c. 2
 31  961 24 
Sol. To prove that  10  x     
a (b  c)2 b (c  a )2 c (a  b)2  20  400 10 
 
(c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a )  31 
2
1 
=a +b+c  10  x    
 20  400 
L.H.S.
2 2
a (b  c)2 b (c  a)2 c (a  b)2  31   1  
 
= (c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a)  10  x      
 20   20  
a ( b  c ) 3  b (c  a )3  c (a  b )3  31 1   31 1 
  10  x     x   
(c  a ) (b  c) (a  b) 20 20   20 20 

a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 ...(i)
 2x  3  5x  8 
We see that the given expression (i)  10   
vanishes when b = c.  2  5 
Thus b – c is factor of the given expression. = – (2x–3) (5x –8) = (3–2x) (5x –8)
Similarly (c – a), (a – b) are the factors of Ex.12 Suppose f(x) is polynomial of degree 5
the expression. and with leading coefficient 2001. Suppose
Since the expression is of 4th degree; the further that f(1) = 1, f(2) = 3, f(3) = 5,
remaining fact or which should be f(4) = 7, f(5) = 9. What is the value
symmetrical in a, b and c must be of the of f(6).
form L (a + b + c). Sol. f(x) is polynomial of degree ‘5’ with
Thus a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 leading coefficient 2001.
= L (a + b + c) (a – b) (b – c) (c – a)  f(x) = 2001 x5 + a1x4 + .........a0
In order of find the value of L Put a = 1,
or f(x) = 2001 (x –l1) (x –l2) (x – l4) (x –l5)
b = – 1, c = 2, we have
f(1) = 1, f(2) = 3, f(3) = 5, f(4) = 7,
1 (– 3)2 – (– 1)3 + 2 (2)3 = L (1 – 1 + 2)
(2) (– 3) (1) f(5) = 9
– 27 – 1 + 16 = L (– 12) Observing functional values 1, 3, 5, 7, ....9
 L = 1 we can say that they follow f(x) = 2x –1
Hence the required factors are Let h(x) = f(x) – (2x –1)
(a – b) (b – c) (a + b + c). h(1) = f(1) –1 = 1 –1 = 0
a (b  c)3  b (c  a )3  c (a  b)3 h(2) = f(2) –3 = 3 – 3 = 0

(c  a ) ( b  c ) ( a  b ) .................................
= (a + b + c). .................................

NANCE 27
 Algebra
h(5) = f(5) – 9 = 9 – 9 = 0 Subtracting (ii) from (iii) m = 211 + 5k
 (x –1), (x–2), ..... (x –5) are factor of .......(v)
h(x) From (iv) and (v) 31 + 3k = 211 + 5k
 h(x) = k(x–1) (x–2) (x–3) (x–4)  –180 = 2k
(x –5)
 k = –90
f(x) = h(x) + (2x –1)
Ex.15 a, b, c are distinct and P(x) is a
= k (x –1) (x –2) .......(x–5) + (2x–1)
polynomial in ‘x’ which leaves remainder
To get ‘f’ as polynomial of degree ‘5’
a, b, c on division by (x – a), (x – b),
with leading coefficient 2001. Consider
(x – c) respectively find the remainder
k = 2001
obtained on division of P(x) by (x – a)
f(x) = 2001 (x – 1) (x – 2) (x – 3) (x – 4)
(x – b) (x – c)
(x –5) + 2x –1
Sol. P(x) = (x – a) q1 + a = (x – b) q2 + b
Ex.13 Find the sum of the coefficients of
polynomial P(x) = (3x –2)17 (x + 1)4. = (x–c)q3 + c
Sol. P(x) = (3x–2)17 (x + 1)4 P(x) = (x –a) (x–b) (x–c)Q + lx2 +
= (a0 + a1x + .....+a17x17) (b0 + b1x + ....+ mx + n
b4x4) For some a1 and b1 Remainder is P(a) = a
= (c0 + c1x + ....+c21x21) for some ck  la2 + ma + n = a. .... (i)
Sum of the coefficients of P(x) = c0 + c1 2
P(B) = b  lb +mb + n = b .... (ii)
+ .....+ c21 which can be obtained by P(C) = c  lc2 +mc + n = c .... (iii)
Putting x = 1
l (a + b) + m = l ( a  b ) .....(iv)
 Sum of the coefficients of P(x) = P(1)
= 3((1) –2))17 (1+1)4 = 16 Similarly subtracting ‘3’ from ‘2’
Ex.14 The remainder x5 + kx2 is divided by l (b + c) + m = 1 ( b  c ) .....(v)
(x –1) (x –2) (x–3) contains no term in x2 (iv) – (v) gives l (a –c) = 0
find ‘k’ with out performing division.
 l = 0 (a  c)
Sol. x5 + kx2 = (x–1) (x –2) (x –3) Q(x) + lx2
+ mx + n. Substituting l = 0 in equation (iv) gives
Where Q(x) is quotient and lx2 + mx + n m=1
is remainder Substituting l = 0, m = 1 in la2 + ma + n
(Degree of remainder is always less than = a gives n = 0
divisor)  Remainder
Remainder does not contain x2 coefficient lx2 + mx + n = 0. x2 + 1.x + 0 = x
from hypothesis  l = 0 Ex.16 Find the remainder obtained when x1999 is
x5 + kx2 = (x–1) (x–2) (x–3) Q(x) + divisible by x2 –1.
mx + n Sol. x1999 = (x2–1)q(x) + mx + n
x = 1 1+ K = m + n .....(i)
For x = 1 m + n = 1 ........(i)
x = 2  32 + 4k = 2m + n .....(ii)
For x = –1 – m + n = –1 .....(ii)
x = 3  243 + 9k = 3m + n ......(iii)
Adding (i) and (ii) we get n = 0, m = 1
Subtracting (i) and from (ii) m = 31 + 3k
........(iv)  remainder = x

NANCE 28
 Algebra

1. If x + 1 is a factor of (A) –3 (B) –2

ax4 + bx3+ cx2 + dx + e then _________ (C) 0 (D) 3
(A) a + c + e = b + d 9. From the adjacent division
(B) a + b = c + d f (x)
(x  a) (x) which of the following
(C) a + b + c + d + e = 0 R
(D) a + c + b = d + e is true ?
2. If (x –3) is the factor of 3x3 –x2 + px + q (A) f (x)  (x  a) (x)
then ___________ (B) f (x)  (x  a). (x)  R
(A) p + q = 72 (B) 3p + q = 72 (C) f (x)  (x  a)  R
(D) f (x)  (x)  R
(C) 3p + q = –72 (D) q – 3p = 72
10. If y = f(x) = mx + c ; then f(y) in terms
3. For what values of n, (x + y) is a factor
of x is :
of (x –y)n.
(A) mx + m + c (B) m + mc + c
(A) for all values of n
(C) m x + mc + c (D) m2x + m2c
2
(B) 1
11. If 3x3 + 7x is divided by 7 + 3x, then :
(C) only for odd numbers
490 490
(D) none of these (A) (B)
9 9
4. f(x) = 3x5 + 11x4 + 90x2 – 19x + 53 470
is divided by x +5 then the remainder (C) (D) None
9
is ____ 12. The remainder when
(A) 100 (B) –100 4 3 x2 x 2
f(x) = 3x  2x    is divided
(C) –102 (D) 102 3 9 27
2
5. If (x–3), (x–3) are factors of x3 – 4x2 – by g(x) = x  is :
3x + 18 ; then the other factor is : 3
(A) –1 (B) 1
(A) x + 2 (B) x + 3
(C) 0 (D) –2
(C) x –2 (D) x + 6
13. The ramainder when 1 + x + x2 + x3 +
 3  .......+ x2006 is divided by x –1 is :
6. If f   = 0; then for f(x), which of the (A) 2005 (B) 2006
 4 
(C) 2007 (D) 2008
following is a factor ?
14. If (x –1), (x + 1) and (x –2) are factors of
(A) 3x – 4 (B) 4x + 3
x4 + (p–3)x3 – (3p–5)x2 + (2p–9) x + 6
(C) –3x + 4 (D) 4x –3 then the value of p is :
2
7. f(x) = 16x + 51x + 35 then one of the (A) 1 (B) 2
factors of f(x) is : (C) 3 (D) 4
(A) x –1 (B) x + 3 15. If the remainder when the polynomial f(x)
(C) x – 3 (D) x + 1 is divided by x –1, x + 1 are 6, 8
3 2
8. If ax + 9x + 4x –1 is divided by (x + 2), respectively then the remainder when f(x)
the remainder is –6; then value of ‘a’ is is divided by (x –1) (x + 1) is :

NANCE 29
 Algebra

(A) 7 – x (B) 7 + x 24. If the polynomial x6 + px5 + qx4 – x2 –

(C) 8 – x (D) 8 + x x – 3 is divisible by x4 –1, then the value
16. The remainder when x100 is divided by x2 of p2 + q2 is :
– 3x + 2 is : (A) 1 (B) 5
(A) (2100 –1)x + (–2100 + 2) (C) 10 (D) 13
(B) (2100 + 1)x + (–2100 –2) 25. Which of the following is a homogeneous
(C) (2100 –1)x + (–2100 –2) expression ?
(D) None (A) 4x2 – 5xy + 5x2y + 10y2
17. Find the remainder obtained when x2007 is (B) 5x + 10y + 100
divisible by x2 –1. (C) 14x3 + 15x2y + 16y2x + 24y3
(A) x2 (B) x (D) x2 + y2 + x + y + 1
(C) x + 1 (D) –x 26. The HCF of the polynomial 12a3b4c2,
18. The remainder on dividing 121n – 25n + 18a4b3c3 and 24a6b2c4 is _______ .
1900n –(–4)n by 2000 is : (A) 12a3b2c2 (B) 6a6b4c4
(A) 1 (B) 1000 (C) 6a3b2c2 (D) 48a6b4c4
(C) 100 (D) 0 27. If the expression ax3 + 2x2y – bxy2 –2y3
19. The quotient and remainder when x2002 – is symmetric, then (a,b) =
2001 is divided by x91 are respectively __ (A) (2, 2) (B) (–2, 2)
(A) x91×22, 2001 (B) x91, 2001 (C) (–2, –2) (D) (2, –2)
(C) x91×21, –2001 (D) x9, –2001 28. The LCM of x –16 and 2x2 –9x + 4 is
2

20. If a polynomial 2x3 – 9x2 + 15x + p, (A) (2x +1) (x + 4) (x –4)

when divided by (x –2), leaves –p as (B) (x2 + 16) (2x + 1)
remainder, then p is equal to : (C) 2(1–2x) (x +4) (x –4)
(A) –16 (B) –5 (D) (2x–1) (x + 4) (x – 4)
(C) 20 (D) 10 29. If g(x) = 3ax + 7a2b –13ab2 + 9by is a
21. If the polynomial x + x17 + x13 + x11 +
19
homogeneous expression in terms of a and
x7 + x5 + x3 is divided by (x2 + 1), then b, then the values of x and y respectively
the remainder is : are __________ .
(A) 1 (B) x2 + 4 (A) 2, 2 (B) 2, 1
(C) – x (D) x (C) 3, 2 (D) 3, 3
22. If (x–2) is a common factor of x3 – 4x2 + 30. What is the first degree expression to
ax + b and x3 – ax2 + bx + 8, then the be subtracted from x6 + 8x4 + 2x3 + 16x2
values of a and b are respectively : + 4x + 5 in order to make it a perfect
(A) 3 and 5 (B) 2 and –4 square ?
(C) 4 and 0 (D) 0 and 4 (A) –4x –4 (B) 4x + 4
23. If the expressions ax3 + 3x2 – 3 and (C) 4x –4 (D) –4x + 4
2x3 – 5x + a on dividing by x –4 leave the 31. Which of the following is a factor of the
same remainder, then the value of a is : polynomial f(x) = 2x3 –5x2 + x + 2 ?
(A) 1 (B) 0 (A) x + 1 (B) x + 2
(C) 2 (D) –1 (C) 2x + 1 (D) 2x –1

NANCE 30
 Algebra
32. x831 + y831 is always divisible by (C) x y z
(A) x –y (B) x2 + y2
x y z
(C) x + y (D) None of these (D)  
yz xz xy
33. If (x +1) (x + 2) (x + 3) (x + k) + 1 is
a perfect square, then the value of k is 4 1
38. Factorize the expression 9x   2.
(A) 4 (B) 5 x4
(C) 6 (D) 7  2 1  2 1 
(A)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
34. The HCF of the polynomials x4 + 6x2 +  x  x 
25, x3 – 3x2 + 7x –5 and x2 + 5 –2x is  2 1  2 1 
(B)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
(A) x2 – 2x –5 (B) x2 –2x + 5  x  x 
(C) x –1 (D) 3x + 2  2 1  2 1 
(C)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
35. The remainder when x45 is divided by x2  x  x 
–1 is -  2 1  2 1 
(A) 2x (B) –x (D)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
 x  x 
(C) 0 (D) x 39. If the each of algebraic expression
36. Find the value of lx 2 + mx + n, mx 2 + nx + l and
(a  b)2 (b  c) 2 (c  a) 2 nx2 + lx + m are perfect square, then
 
(b  c)(c  a) (a  b)(c  a) (a  b)(b  c) lm
 _______ .
(A) –1 (B) 0 n
(C) 1 (D) 2 (A) –4 (B) 6
37. Find the square root of the expression (C) –8 (D) None of these
1  1 1 1  
3
(x 2  y 2  z 2 )  2     3
xyz x y z 40. Resolve into factors :   x    x
 x,y,z  x,y,z
xyz (A) (x + y) (y + z) (z + x)
(A)
xyz (B) – (x + y) (y + z) (z + x)
yz zx xy (C) 3(x+y) (y + z) (z + x)
(B)  
x y z (D) –3(x +y) (y + z) (z +x)

Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A C D C A B D D B C
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B C C D A A B D C B
Q. N. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. C C A C C C C D D D
Q. N. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. C C A B D A D D A C

NANCE 31
 Linear Equations in two Variables

Step:5 Substitute the value of x obtained in step

A linear equation (or a first-degree 4 in the expression for y in terms of x
equation) in two variables has both its obtained in step 2 to get value of y.
variables raised to the first power only. Step:6 The values of x and y obtained in steps 4
A linear equation in two variables is of the and 5 respectively constitute the solution
form ax + by + c = 0 of the given system of two linear equations.
where at least one of a, b is different from Following solved examples will illustrate
zero. the above algorithm.
Note that 2x + 3 = 0 can be treated as Ex. Solve the following system of equation by
a linear equation in two variables since we using the method of substitution :
can rewrite it as 2x + 0y + 3 = 0. 3x – 5y = –1, x – y = –1
Solution of a linear equation in two Sol. The given system of equation is
variables is a pair of values, one for x 3x – 5y = –1 .............(i)
and the other for y which when substituted x – y = –1 .............(ii)
in the given equation, make the two sides From (ii), we get
of the equation equal.
y=x+1
 Algebraic Methods of solving linear Substituting y = x + 1 in (i), we get
equations in two variables :
3x – 5(x + 1) = –1
The most commonly used algebraic
 –2x – 5 = –1
methods of solving linear equations in two
variables are :  –2x = 4  x = –2
(i) Method of elimination by substitution. Putting x = – 2 in y = x + 1 we get
(ii) Method of elimination by equating the y = –1.
coefficients Hence, the solution of the given system of
(iii) Method of cross-multiplication equation is x = –2, y = –1.
 Method of Elimination by Substitution:  Method of Elimination by equating the
In this method, we express one of the coefficients :
variables in terms of the other variable from In this method, we eliminate one of the
either of the two equations and then this two variables to obtain an equation in one
expression is put in the other equation to variable which can easily be solved. Putting
obtain an equation in one variable as the value of this variable in any one of the
explained in the following algorithm. given equations, the value of the other
variable can be obtained.
Following algorithm explains t he
Step:1 Obtain the two equations. Let the equations procedure.
be
a1x + b1y +c1 = 0 ............ (i)
and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ...........(ii) Step:1 Obtain the two equations.
Step:2 Choose either of the two equations, say Step:2 Multiply the equations so as to make the
(i), and the other value of one variable, coefficients of the variable to be eliminated
say y, in terms of the other, i.e. x. equal.
Step:3 Substitute the value of y, obtained in step 2, in Step:3 Add or subtract the equations obtained in
the other equation i.e. (ii) to get an equation step 2 according as the terms having the
in x. same coefficients are of opposite of the
Step:4 Solve the equation obtained in step 3 to same sign.
Step:4 Solve equation in one variable in step 3.
get the value of x.

NANCE 32
 Linear Equations in two Variables

Step:5 Substitute the value found in step 4 in any 1 1 1 1

of the given equations and find the value Hence, x   and y  
u 6 v 4
of the other variable. So, the solution of the given system of
The value of the variables in step 4 and 5 1 1
constitute the solution of the given system equation is x  , y  .
6 4
of equations.  Method of Cross-Multiplication :
Ex.1 Solve the following system of linear Theorem : Let a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
equations by using the method of a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
elimination by equating the coefficients :
be a system of simultaneous linear
3x + 2y = 11, 2x + 3y = 4 equations in two variables x and y such
Sol. The given systems of equations is
a1 b1
3x + 2y = 11 ............(i) that 
a 2 b2
2x + 3y = 4 ............(ii)
i.e. a1b2 – a2b1  0. Then the system has
Let us elininate y from the given equations. a unique solution given by
The coefficients of y in the given equations
are 2 and 3 respectively. The L.C.M. of  x y 1 
   
2 and 3 is 6. So, we make the coefficients  b 2c 2  b 2c1 a1c2  c1a 2 a1b 2  b1a 2 
of y equal to 6 in the two equations. (b c  b 2 c1 ) (c a  c a )
x 1 2 and y  1 2 2 1
Multiplying (i) by 3 and (ii) by 2, we get (a1b 2  a 2 b1 ) (a1b 2  a 2 b1 )
9x + 6y = 33 ..............(iii) Ex. Solve t he following systems of
4x + 6y = 8 ..............(iv) equations by using the method of cross-
Subtracting (iv) from (iii), we get multiplication :
5x = 25  x = 5 x + y = 7, 5x + 12y = 7
Substituting x = 5 equation in (i), we get Sol. The given system of equation is
15 + 2y = 11 2y = –4  y = –2 x+y–7=0
Ex.2 Solve the following system of equations : 5x + 12y – 7 = 0
1 1 1 1 By cross-multiplication, we get
  1 ,  8,
2x y x 2y x y
 
where x  0, y  0. 1 7  12  7 1 7  5  7
1 1 1
Sol. Taking  u and  v, 
x y 1 12  5  1
the given equations become
x y 1
u   
 v  1 u  2v  2 ......(i) 7  84 7  35 12  5
2
v x y 1
and, u   8  2u  v  16 ......(ii)   
2 77 28 7
Let us eliminate u from equations (i) and
77 28
(ii). Multiplying equation (i) by 2, we get x  and y  
2u – 4v = –4 ...............(iii) 7 7
2u + v = 16 ..............(iv)  x = 11 & y = –4
Subracting (iv) from (iii), we get Hence, the solution of the given system of
–5v = –20  u = 6 equations is x = 11, y = –4.

NANCE 33
 Linear Equations in two Variables

 Conditions for Consistency : a1 b1

Clearly, 
The system of equations a 2 b2
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 .........(1) So, the given system of equations has a
unique solution.
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ........(2)
To find the solution, we use the cross-
(i) is consistent with unique solution, if
multiplication method.
a1 b1 By cross-multiplication, we have
 or a1b 2  b1a 2  0
a 2 b2 x y
i.e., lines represented by equations (1) and 
3  11  5  7 2  11  6  7
(2) are not parallel 1
(ii) is consistent with infinitely many solutions, 
25 63
a1 b1 c1 x y 1
if   i.e., lines represented by   
a 2 b2 c2 33  35 22  42 10  18
x y 1
equation (1) and (2) are coincident.   
2 20 8
a1 b1 c1 2 1 20 5
(iii) is inconsistent, if   i.e., lines x    and y  
a 2 b 2 c2 8 4 8 2
represented by equations (1) and (2) are Hence, the given system of equations has
parallel and non-coincident. 1 5
Ex. In each of the following systems of a unique solution given by x   , y  .
4 2
equations determine whether the system (ii) The given system of equations may be
has a unique solution, no solution or written as
infinitely many solutions. In case there is a –3x + 4y – 5 = 0
unique solution, find it : 9 15
x  6y   0
(i) 2x + 3y = 7, 6x + 5y = 11 2 2
15 The given system of equations is of the
(ii) 6x + 5y = 11, 9x  y  21
2 form
9 15 a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
(iii) –3x + 4y = 5, x  6y   0
2 2 a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
Sol. (i) The given system of equations may be where a1 = –3, b1 = 4, c1 = –5 and
written as 9 15
a 2  , b 2  6, c 2 
2x + 3y – 7 = 0 2 2
6x + 5y – 11 = 0 We have,
The given system of equations is of the a1 3 2 b1 4 2
  ,  
form a 2 9 / 2 3 b 2 6 3
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 c1 5 2
 
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 c 2 15 / 2 3
where, a1 = 2, b1 = 3, c1 = –7 and a1 b1 c1
a2 = 6, b2 = 5, c2 = –11 Clearly,  
a 2 b2 c2
a1 2 1 b 3 So, the given system of equations has
We have.   and 1  infinitely many solutions.
a2 6 3 b2 5

NANCE 34
 Linear Equations in two Variables
Ex. Find the value (s) of k for which the system b1 c1
of equations Clearly, 
b2 c2
kx – y = 2 So, whatever be the value of k, we cannot
6x – 2y = 3 a b c
has (i) a unique solution (ii) no solution. have 1  1  1
a 2 b2 c2
Is there a value of k for which the system
Hence, there is no value of k, for which
has infinitely many solutions ?
the given system of equations has infinitely
Sol. The given system of equation is many solutions.
kx –y – 2 = 0 Ex. For what value of k will the following
6x – 2y –3 = 0 system of linear equations has no solution?
It is of the form a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 3x + y = 1
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 (2k –1)x + (k –1)y = 2k + 1
where a1 = k, b1 = –1, c1 = –2 and Sol. We know that the system of equations
a2 = 6, b2 = –2, c2 = –3 a1x + b1y = c1
(i) The given system will have a unique a2x + b2y = c2
solution, if has no solution, if
a1 b1 k 1 a1 b1 c1
 i.e., if  i.e., k  3.  
a 2 b2 6 2 a 2 b 2 c2
So, the given of equations system will have
a unique solution, if k  3. So, the given system of equations will have
no solution, if
So, the given of equations system will have
3 1 1
a unique solution , if k  3.  
(ii) The given system will have no solution, 2k  1 k  1 2k  1
if 3 1 1 1
a1 b1 c1  and 
  2k  1 k  1 k  1 2k  1
a 2 b 2 c2
3 1
b 1 1 c 2 2 Now,   3k –3 = 2k –1
We have, 1   and 1   2k  1 k  1
b 2 2 2 c 2 3 3  k = 2
b1 c1 1 1
Clearly, b  c Clearly, for k = 2 we have 
2 2 k  1 2k  1
So, the system of equations will have no Hence, the given system of equations will
solution, if have no solution, if k = 2.
a1 b1 k 1 Ex. I am three times as old as my son. Five
   k3
a 2 b2 6 2 years later, I shall be two and a half times
Hence, the given system will have no as old as my son. How old am I and how
solution, if k = 3. old is my son ?
For the given system to have infinite Sol. Suppose my age is x years and my son’s
number of solutions, we must have age is y years. Then,
a1 b1 c1 x = 3y ............(i)
 
a 2 b2 c2 Five years later, my age will be (x + 5)
a k b 1
We have, 1  , 1  and years and my son’s age will be (y + 5)
a 2 6 b 2 2
c1 2 2 years.
  5
c 2 3 3  x  5  (y  5) (Given)
2

NANCE 35
 Linear Equations in two Variables
 2x – 5y – 15 = 0 ........ (ii) 8. In a fraction, if numerator is increased by
Putting x = 3y in equation (ii), we get 2 and denominator is increased by 3, it
6y – 5y – 15 = 0  y = 15 3
Putting y = 15 in equation (i), we get becomes and if numerator is decreased
4
x = 45 by 3 and denominator is decreased by 6,
Hence, my present age is 45 years and 4
my son’s present age is 15 years. it becomes . Find the sum of the
3
numerator and denominator.
(A) 16 (B) 18 (C) 20 (D) 14
1. How many pairs of x and y satisfy the 9. If 100 cm is divided into two parts such
equations 2x + 4y = 8 and 6x + 12 y = 24 ? that the sum of 2 times the smaller
(A) 0 (B) 1 1
(C) Infinite (D) none of these part and of the larger part, is less than
3
2. Find the value of ‘k’for which the system 100 cm, then which of the following is
of linear equations kx + 2y = 5 and 3x + correct ?
y = 1 has zero solutions. (A) Larger portion is always less than 60.
(A) k = 6 (B) k = 3 (B) Smaller portion is always less than 60
(C) k = 4 (D) none of these and more than 40.
3. The total cost of 10 erasers and 5
(C) Larger portion is always greater
sharpeners is at least Rs 65. The cost of
than 60.
each eraser cannot exceed Rs 4. Find the
minimum possible cost of each sharpener. (D) Smaller portion is always greater
(A) Rs 6 (B) Rs 5.50 than 40.
(C) Rs 5 (D) Rs 6.50 10. The fair of 3 full tickets and 2 half tickets
4. If the system of linear equations px + 3y is Rs 204 and the fair of 2 full tickets and
= 9 and 4x + py = 8 has unique solution, 2 half tickets is Rs. 186. Find the fair of
then a full ticket and a half ticket.
(A) p  2 3 (B) p  3 2 (A) Rs 94 (B) Rs 78
(C) p  2 3 (D) p  3 2 (C) Rs 86 (D) Rs 62
5. In a group of goats and hens, the total 3 x y
11. If x  2y    1 , then x –y =
number of legs is 12 more than twice the 2 4 2
total number of heads. The number of
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 0
goats is :
(A) 8 (B) 6 (C) 2 (D) 10 12. If we add 1 to the numerator and subract
1 from the denominator a fraction becomes
6. Solve the equations : 4(2x–1) + 9(3y–1) = 17
and 3(2x) – 2(3y) = 6. 1
1. It also becomes if we add 1 to the
(A) (x, y) = (2, 1) (B) (x, y) = (–2, –1) 2
denominator. Then the sum of the
(C) (x, y) = (1, 2) (D) (x,y) = (2, –1)
numerataor and denominator of the
7. If (a + b, a –b) is the solution of the
equations 3x + 2y = 20 and 4x –5y = 42, fraction is
then find the value of b. (A) 7 (B) 8 (C) 2 (D) 11
(A) 8 (B) – 2 13. If 4x – 3y = 7xy and 3x + 2y = 18xy,
(C) – 4 (D) 5 then (x, y) =

NANCE 36
 Linear Equations in two Variables

1 1 for every question left, then one person

(A)  ,  (B) (3, 4) scores 79. And if half mark is deducted
 4 3 for every wrong option and one-fourth
1 1 mark is deducted for every left question,
(C) (4, 3) (D)  , 
3 4 the person scores 76, then find the number
14. If 2 |x| – |y| = 3 and 4 |x| |+ |y| = 3, then of questions he attempted correctly.
number of possible order pairs of the form (A) 80 (B) 100
(x, y) is (C) 120 (D) 140
(A) 0 (B) 1 18. The number of ordered pairs of different
(C) 2 (D) 4 prime numbers whose sum is not exceeding
15. A father wants to divide Rs 200 into two 26 and difference between second number
parts between two sons such that by
and first number cannot be less than 10.
adding three times the smaller part to half
of the larger part, then its will always be (A) 8 (B) 9
less than Rs 200. How will he divided this (C) 10 (D) 11
amount ? 19. The number of possible pairs of succesive
(A) Smaller part is always less than 50 prime numbers such that each of them is
(B) Larger part is always greater than 160 greater than 40 and their sum is atmost
(C) Larger part is always less than 160 100 is
(D) Smaller part is always greater than 40 (A) 3 (B) 2
16. A bus conductor gets a total of 220 coins (C) 4 (D) 1
of 25 paise, 50 paise and Re. 1 daily. 20. In an election the supporters of two
One day he gots Rs 110 and next day he candidates A and B were taken to polling
gots Rs 80 in that the number of coins of
booth in two different vehicles, capable of
25 paise and 50 paise coins are
interchanged then find the total number of carrying 10 and 15 voters respectively.
50 paise coins and 25 paise coins. If atleast 90 vehicles were required to
(A) 180 (B) 190 carry a total of 1200 voters, then find the
(C) 160 (D) 200 maximum number of votes by which the
17. An examination consists of 160 questions. elections could be won by the candidates,
One mark is given for every correct option. B.
If one-fourth mark is deducted for every (A) 900 (B) 600
wrong option and half mark is deducted (C) 300 (D) 500

Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C A C C B A D A C B
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B B D A B D B D A B

NANCE 37
 Sets & Relation

4. The order of writing the elements of a set is

The set concept was recognised about 113 immaterial.
years back, but German scientist George For example {1, 2, 3}, {2, 3, 1},
Cantor (1885 - 1915) developed that, it as {3, 2, 1}, {1, 3, 2} all denote the same set.
the theory of sets. The theory of sets not 5. An element of a set is not written more than
only influenced and enriched every branch once. Thus the set {1, 1, 3, 5, 3, 6} can be
of Mathematics. written as {1, 3, 5, 6}.
(ii) Set builder form :
In this method, instead of listing all elements
Any collection of well defined objects is
of a set, we write the set by some special
called a set. “By well defined” we mean that
property or properties satisfied by all
given a set and an object, it must be possible
elements and write it as A = {x : P(x)} =
to decide whether or not the object belongs
{x / x has the property P(x)} and read it as
to the set. The objects in the set are called A is the set of all elements x such that x has
its members or elements. the property P. The symbol : or / stands for
Sets are usually denoted by capital letters ‘such that’.
A, B, C etc., and their elements by small 1. If A = {1, 2, 3, 4} then we can write
letters a, b, c, d etc. A = {x  N : x < 5}
Let A be any set of objects and let ‘a’ be 2. If B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12} we can write
a member of A, then we write a  A and B = {x N : x is a factor of 12}
read it as “a belongs to A” or “a is an element
of A”. If a is not an object of A, then we
write a  A and read as “a does not belong A set consisting of no elements is called an
to A” or “a is not an element of A”. empty set or null set (or) void set and is
e.g. Let A be the collection of vowels in English denoted by the symbol  or { }
alphabet is a set containing five elements a, e.g.1. {x : x  N, 4 < x < 5} = 
e, i, o, u. Now a  A, e  A, i  A, o  2. {x : x  R, x2 + 1 = 0} = 
A, u  A. 3. {x : x is an even prime number greater than
2} = 
There are two ways of expressing a set. Note : A set which has at least one element is called
These are a non-empty set.
(i) Roster method (or) Tabulation method (i) The set {0} is not an empty-set as it contains
(ii) Set builder form (or) Rule method the element 0 (zero).
(i) Roster method : In this method, we list all (ii) The set {} is not a null set, it is a set
members of the set separating them by containing one element .
means of commas and enclosing them in curly (iii) A set consisting of only one element is called
brackets { }. a singleton set.
e.g.1. If A is the set of vowels in English alphabet,
then A = {a, e, i, o, u} A set in which the process of counting of
2. If B is the set of prime numbers less than elements surely comes to an end is called a
15, then B = {2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13} finite set.
3. The set of even natural numbers e.g.1. Set of all persons on the earth.
E = {2, 4, 6, 8, ......}. Here the dots stand 2. Set of even natural numbers less than 99.
for “and so on”. 3. {x : x I, x is a factor of 1000}.

NANCE 38
 Sets & Relation
 Note point :
A set which is not finite is called an infinite All equal sets are equivalent but all equivalent
set. In other words, a set in which the sets are not equal.
process of counting of elements does not
come to an end is called an infinite set.
e.g.1. Set of all points in a plane. The set B is said to be subset of A if every
element of set B is also an element of set A.
2. {x  I : x > 1}
This is symbolically written as B A or
3. {x  Q : 0 < x < 1}
A B.
B A is read as B is contained in A or B
The number of distinct elements contained is a subset of B.
in a finite set A is called its cardinal number A  B is read as A contains B or A is a
to be denoted by n(A). superset of A.
e.g.1. A = {3, 5, 7, 9}  n(A) = 4 e.g. A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {1, 2, 4}, then B is
2. Set B of solutions of the equation a subset of A.
x2 – 9 = 0  n(B) = 2
A set B is said to be a proper subset of A
if every element of set B is an element of A
Two sets A and B are said to be equal if whereas every element of A is not an element
every element of A is an element of B and of B. We write it as B A and read it as
every element of B is an element of A. Thus B is a proper subset of A, if every element
if x  A x B and y B y  A of B is an element of A and there is at least
then A and B are equal. one element in A which is not in B. Observe
 A = B, if x A x B and y  B that A  A i.e., every set is a subset of
y A itself, but not a proper subset.
(or) e.g. Let A = {5, 6, 7, 8, 9}, B = {5, 6, 8, 9}
A = B if x A  x  B then B A.
e.g.1. A = {2, 3}, B = {2, 3, 3, 2, 2},
 Important : A finite set containing n elements
C = {x : x2 – 5x + 6 = 0}, then
has 2n subsets and 2n – 2 proper subsets.
A=B=C
(i) N  I, N  Q, N  R, N  C
2. A = {x : 5 x  9, x  N},
(ii) I  Q, I  R, I  C
B = {5, 6, 7, 8, 9}, then A = B
(iii) Q  R, Q  C
3. A = {x : x is letter of the word REMAST}
(iv) R  C
and B = {x : x is a letter of the word
MASTER}, then A = B.
The set formed by all the subsets of a given
Two finite sets A and B are equivalent if set A is called the power set of A. It is
n(A) = n(B). Clearly equal sets are denoted by P(A).
equivalent, but equivalent sets need not be e.g. If A = {1, 2, 3} then P(A) = {, {1}, {3}, {2}
equal. Equivalence of two sets is denoted {1, 2}, {1, 3}, {2, 3}, {1, 2, 3}}
by the symbol ‘~’. Thus if A and B are Number of proper subsets
equivalent sets, we write A ~ B which is n [P(A)] = 2m = 23 = 8
read as A is equivalent to B. [P : n(A) = m = 3]

NANCE 39
 Sets & Relation
 Important results : µ
A B
1. Every set is a subset of itself.
2. The empty set is a subset of every set.

Two sets A and B are said to be comparable

if one of them is a subset of the other i.e., In the figure the shaded part represents
either A  B or B A. A  B. It is evident that A  A  B,
e.g. The sets {1, 2, 3, 4} and {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} B A  B.
are comparable sets. e.g. 1. If A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {1, 3, 5, 7} then
A  B = {1, 2, 3, 5, 7}.
The following results exist with union.
In any discussion in set theory, there always 1. A  A  B and B  A  B
happens to be a set that contains all the sets
2. A  B  B  A (commutative law)
under consideration i.e., it is a super set of
each of the given sets. Such a set is called 3. A  A  A, A  µ  µ, A    A
universal set is not unique. Different universal 4. (A  B)  C = A  (B  C)
   

sets are used in different contexts. (Associative law)

e.g. 1. When in two dimensional Geometry we
discuss lines or triangles (or) circles then
universal set may be the plane. The intersection of two sets A and B,
2. When we discuss integers or positive denoted by A  B is the set of all the
elements common to both A and B.
integers (or) negative integers or prime
numbers, then the universal set may be Z. Thus A  B = {x : x  A and x  B}
(the set of all integers) = {x : x  A  x  B}
Clearly x  A  B  x  A and x  B
and x  A  B  x  A and x  B
We often use pictures to help in out thinking. µ
In set theory too we use pictures which are A B
closed curves like circle, rectangle etc. These
closed curves are named as Venn diagrams,
since these were developed by Venn, a
British Mathematician. He represented a
universal set by interior of a rectangle and
In the figure the shaded part is A  B.
other sets or subsets by interior of circles.
It is evident that A B A, A B B.
e.g. 1. A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {2, 4, 6} then
 Union of sets : The union of two sets A A  B = {2, 4}.
and B, denoted by A B is the set of all The following results exist with intersection.
those elements, each one of which is either 1. A  B  A and A  B  B
in A or in B or in both A and B. It is denoted
by A  B. 2. A  B  B  A (commutative law)
Thus A B = {x : x A or x B} 3. A  B AB  A
= {x : x  A v x  B} 4. A     and A  U  A
Clearly x A B x A or x B and 5. AA  A
x  A  B  x  A or x   B 6. A  ( B  C )  ( A  B)  C

NANCE 40
 Sets & Relation

7. A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C) µ
A B
(Distributive law)
8. A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
(Distributive law)

Thus A  B = (A – B)  (B – A)
Two sets A and B are said to be disjoint if  {x : x  A  B}
A B = . If A  B , then A and B
The shaded part is A  B.
are said to be intersecting or overlapping
sets. e.g. 1. If A = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9}, B = {2, 3, 5, 7, 11}
then A  B = (A – B)  (B  A)
e.g. If A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, B = {7, 8, 9, 10,
11} and C = {6, 8, 10, 12, 14}, then A and = {1, 2, 9, 11}
B are disjoint sets whereas A and C are
intersecting sets.
Let U be the universal set and let A U,
then the compliment of A, denoted by AC or
If A and B are two sets, then their difference A or U – A is defined as
A – B is the set of all the elements of A A = {x : x  U and x  A}.
which do not belong to B. Clearly x  A  x  A.

Thus A – B = {x : x  A and x  B}.

Clearly x  A – B  x  A and x  B. e.g. 1. If U = (1, 3, 5, 7) and A = {1, 3} then
In the figure, the shaded part represents A = {5, 7}.
A – B. Similarly the difference B – A is the
 Important results :
set of all those elements of B that does not
belong to A. 1. ( A)  A,   U and U  
µ 2. ( A  B)  A  B
A B
3. ( A  B)  A  B
A–B B–A 4. A  A  U and A  A  
5. A  B  A  B
6. B  A  B  A
Thus B – A = {x : x  B and x  A} A  A   and A  B  A
7.
e.g. If A = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9}, B = {2, 3, 5, 7, 11}
8. AB  BA
then A – B = {1, 9} and B – A = {2, 11}.
9. A  B  B  A
10. ( A  B)  ( A  B)  A  ( B  B)
The symmetric difference of two sets A and
 A  A
B denoted by A B is the set
(A – B)  (B – A). 11. A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)

NANCE 41
 Sets & Relation

12. A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C) 2. n ( A  B)  n ( A)  n ( B)  n ( A  B)
13. A  B  ( A  B)  B 3. n (A  B  C) = n (A) + n (B) + n (C)
14. A  B  ( A  B)  ( B  A )  n ( A  B)  n ( B  C)  n (C  A )
 ( A  B)  ( A  B)
 n ( A  B  C)
15. A  BB A
4. n ( A  B)  n ( A )  n ( A  B)
16. A  ( B  C )  ( A  B)  C
17. AB A  AB   5. n (B  A)  n ( B)  n ( A  B)
6. n (A  B)  n ( A)  n ( B)  2n ( A  B)
 Some results on cardinal numbers :
Let A, B, C are finite sets in a finite universal 7. n ( A)  n (µ)  n ( A )
set µ, then we adopt the following results.
8. n (A  B)  n (µ)  n ( A  B)
1. n ( A  B)  n ( A)  n ( B)  A, B
are disjoint sets. ( A  B  ) 9. n (A  B)  n (µ)  n ( A  B)

1. In a college of 300 students, every student 6. Out of 800 boys in a school, 224 played
reads 5 newspapers and every newspaper cricket, 240 played hockey and 336
is read by 60 students. The number of played basketball. Of the total, 64 played
newspapers is - both basketball and hockey, 80 played
(A) at least 30 (B) atmost 20 cricket and basketball and 40 played
cricket and hockey, 24 played all the three
(C) exactly 25 (D) none of these
games. The number of boys who did not
2. Which one of the following is play any game is -
(A – B)  (B – A)? (A) 128 (B) 216
(A) (A  B)  (A – B) (C) 240 (D) 160
(B) (A  B)  (A  B) 7. Let R be the relation in the set N given
(C) (A  B)  (A  B) by = {(a, b) : a = b – 2, b > 6}. Choose
(D) (A – B)  (B – A) the correct answer -
(A) (2, 4)  R
3. If A and B are two given sets, then
(B) (3, 8)  R
A (A  B)C equals - (C) (6, 8)  R
(A) A (B) B (D) (8, 7)  R
(C)  (D) none of these
8. If A, B and C are non-empty subsets, then
4. If A and B are two given sets, then (A – B)  B equals -
A  B = A  B iff (A)  (B) A
(A) A  B (B) B  A (C) B (D) none of these
(C) A = B (D) none of these 9. A set contains n elements. The power set
contains -
5. If A = {x : x is a multiple of 3} and
(A) n elements
B = {x : x is a multiple of A) - (B) 2n elements
(A) A  B (B) A  B (C) n2 elements
(C) A  B (D) A  B (D) 22n elements

NANCE 42
 Sets & Relation
10. If A, B, C be three sets such that 18. Let A = {x : x is a multiple of 3} and
A  B = A  C and A  B = A  C, B = {x : x is a multiple of 5}. Then A B
then - is given by -
(A) A = B (B) B = C (A) {3, 6, 9.......}
(C) A = C (D) A = B = C
(B) {5, 10, 15, 20......}
11. If a set A has n elements, then the total (C) {15, 30, 45.........}
number of subsets of A is - (D) none of these
(A) n (B) n2
(C) 2 n
(D) 2n 19. If aN = {ax / x N and bN cN = dN,
where b, c N are relatively prime, then -
12. Two finite sets have m and n elements. The (A) d = bc (B) c = bd
total number of subsets of the first set is 56
more than total number of subsets of the (C) b = cd (D) none
second set. The values of m and n are - 20. L et A = { (x, y) / y = ex, x R},
(A) 7, 6 (B) 6, 3 B = {(x, y) / y = e– x, x R}, then -
(C) 5, 1 (D) 8, 7 (A) A  B  
13. Which one of the following is the empty (B) A  B  
set ? (C) A  B  R 2
(A) {x/x is a real number and x2 – 1 = 0} (D) none of these
(B) {x/x is a real number and x2 + 1 = 0}
(C) {x/x is a real number and x2 – 9 = 0} 21. For any three sets A, B and C. Which one
(D) {x/x is a real number and x2 = x + 2} is not correct -
14. Given the sets A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {3, 4} (A) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
and C = {4, 5, 6} then A (B C) is - (B) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  C
(A) {3} (C) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
(B) {1, 2, 3, 4} (D) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
(C) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
22. If A and B are two sets, then
(D) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
A  (A  B) equals -
15. The number of non-empty subsets of the set (A) A (B) B
{1, 2, 3, 4} is - (C)  (D) none of these
(A) 14 (B) 15
(C) 16 (D) 17 23. In a certain town 25% families own a phone
and 15% own a car, 65% families own
16. Sets A and B have 3 and 6 elements
neither a phone a car. 2000 families own
respectively. What can be the minimum
both a car and phone. Consider the following
number of elements in A B -
statements in this regard -
(A) 3 (B) 6
(C) 9 (D) 18 (i) 10% families own both a car and a phone
(ii) 35% families own either a car or a phone
17. If A = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17},
(iii) 40,000 families live in the town
B = {1, 2, 4,....... 18} and N is the universal
Which one of the statements are correct -
set, then A  [(A B) B] is -
(A) A (B) B (A) i and ii (B) i and iii
(C) N (D) none of these (C) ii and iii (D) i, ii and iii

NANCE 43
 Sets & Relation

24. If A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {4, 5, 6} and 27. The smallest set A such that
C = {1, 2} then (A – B) × (A  C) is - A  {1, 2} = {1, 2, 3, 5, 9} is -
(A) {(1, 3), (1, 5)} (A) {2, 3, 5}
(B) {(2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3)} (B) {3, 5, 9}
(C) {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 5)} (C) {1, 2, 5, 9}
(D) none (D) none of these
28. A survey shows that 63% of Americans like
25. Which of the following is an empty set -
cheese where as 76% like apples. If x% of
(A) The set of prime numbers which are
the Americans like both cheese and apples
even
then -
(B) The solution of the equation (A) x = 39
2 ( 2 x  3) 2 (B) x = 63
  3  0, x  R
x 1 x 1 (C) 39  x  63
(D) none
(C) ( A  B)  ( B  C) where A and B are
disjoint 29. Sets A and B have 7 and 11 elements
(D) None of these respectively. The minimum and maximum
number of elements in A  B are
26. If A and B are non-empty sets and AC and respectively -
BC represent their compliments respectively, (A) 7, 11 (B) 7, 18
then - (C) 11, 18 (D) 0, 7
(A) A  B  A C  BC 30. Sets A and B have 10 and 15 elements
(B) A  A C  B  BC respectively. The minimum and maximum
number of elements in A  B =
(C) A  B  BC  A C (A) 0, 10 (B) 0, 15
(D) A  BC  A C  B (C) 10, 15 (D) 10 25

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C C D C B D D A B B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C B B B B B C C D C
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . D C C D C C B A C A

NANCE 44
 Sets & Relation

 Important points :
An ordered pair is a pair of objects whose 1. If either A or B is the null set, then we
coordinates occur in a special order. It is define A × B to be the null set. For example
written by listing the two coordinates in the if A = {a, b} and B = , then A × B = .
specified order, separating them by a comma 2. If either A or B is an infinite set and other
and enclosing the pair in pair in parenthesis. is a non-empty set, then A × B is also an
In the ordered pair (a, b), a is called the infinite set.
first coordinate and b is called the second 3. If A and B are two non-empty sets having
coordinate. n elements in common, then A × B, B × A
(i) (a, b)  (b, a) have n2 elements in common.
(ii) (a, b) = (c, d) iff a = c, b = d. 4. If A = B, then A × A is denoted by A2.
5. The cartesian product of n sets A1, A2, ...
An and is denoted by A1 × A2 × ....... An or
Let A and B be two non-empty sets. Then n
the set of all possible ordered pairs (a, b) briefly by A . i
such that the first coordinate a of the ordered il
6. For any three sets A, B, C
pair is an element of A and the second
coordinate b is an element of B, is called (i) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
the Cartesian product of sets A and B. It is (ii) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
denoted by A × B which reads “A cross B”.
(iii) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
Thus, A × B = {(a, b) / a  A and b  B}
Also, n (A × B) = n(A) . n(B), i.e., if set A (iv) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
has n elements and set B has m elements (v) A  ( B  C)  ( A  B)  ( A  C)
then the product set A × B has nm elements. 7. If A and B are any two non-empty sets,
e.g. Suppose A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {x, y}. such that A × B = B × A A = B.
Then A × B = {(1, x), (1, y), (2, x), (2, y), 8. If A B, then A × A (A × B) (B × A).
(3, x), (3, y)}
9. If A B, then (A × C) (B × C) for any
and B × A = {(x, 1), (x, 2), (x, 3), (y, 1), set C.
(y, 2), (y, 3)}
10. If A B, and C D, then A × C B × D.
Note that if A  B, then A × B  B × A. 11. For any sets A, B, C, D;
e.g. Let n(A) represent the number of elements (A × B)  (C × D) = (A  C) × (B  D).
in set A. In illustration (1), we can see that
n(A) = 3, n(B) = 2 and n(A × B) = 6.
Thus n(A × B) = n(A) × n(B) Intuitively, we can say that the word
It is clear that n(A × B) = n(B × A). Thus “relation” implies an association of two
A × B and B × A are equivalent sets. objects (people, numbers, ideas etc.)
according to some property possessed by
e.g. If there are three sets A, B, C and a  A, them.
b  B, c  C, then we form an ordered A relation is a set of ordered pairs. Any set
triplet (a, b, c). The set of all ordered triplets of ordered pairs is, therefore, a relation. The
(a, b, c) is called the Cartesian product of set of first coordinates of the ordered pairs
these sets A, B and C. is called the domain and the set of second
i.e., A × B × C = {(a, b, c) : a A, b  coordinates of the ordered pairs is called
B and c  C}. the range.

NANCE 45
 Sets & Relation

Let A and B be two non-empty sets. (iii) Identity relation : The relation IA = {(a, a)
Then a relation R from A to B is a subset of : a  A} is called the identity relation on A.
A × B. Thus, R is a relation from A to B  e.g. If A = {1, 2, 3}, then the identity relation on
R  A × B. If R is a relation from a non- A is given by IA = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)}.
empty set-A to a non empty set B and if
(a, b)  R, then we write a R b which is (iv) Inverse relation : If R is a relation on A,
read as ‘a is related to b by the relation R’. then the relation R–1 = {(b, a) : (a, b) R
If (a, b) 
 R, then we write a R b and we is called an inverse relation on A.
say that a is not related to b by the Clearly, domain (R–1) = range (R) and range
relation R. (R–1) = domain R.
e.g. Let A = {1, 2, 3} and let
R = {(1, 2), (2, 2), (3, 1), (3, 2)}.
If R is a relation from A to B, then the set Then, R being a subset of A × A, it is a
of all first coordinate of elements of R is
relation on A.
called the domain of R, while the set of all
second coordinate of elements of R is called Clearly, 1R2; 2R2; 3R1 and 3R2.
the range of R. Domain (R) = {1, 2, 3} and
 Domain (R) = {a : (a, b)  R} Range (R) = {2, 1}.
and Range (R) = {b : (a, b)  R} Also, R–1 = {(2, 1), (2, 2), (1, 3), (2, 3)}
e.g. Let A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {2, 4, 6}. Then Domain (R–1) = {2, 1} and
A × B = {(1, 2), (1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 2), Range (R–1) = {1, 2, 3}.
(2, 4), (2, 6), (3, 2), (3, 4), (3, 6)} e.g. If R is the relation “is less than” from
By definition, every subset of A × B is a A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} to B = {1, 4, 5}. Write
relation from A to B. However, we consider down the cartesian product corresponding
the relation. to R. Also find R–1.
R = {(1, 2), (1, 4), (3, 2), (3, 4)}, then Clearly, R = (a, b)  A × B; a < b}
1R2, 1R4, 3R2 and 3R4.
 R = {(1, 4), (1, 5), (2, 4), (2, 5), (3, 4),
Apart from these, no element of A is related
(3, 5),(4, 5)}
to an element of B.
So R–1 = {(4, 1), (5, 1), (4, 2), (5, 2),
i.e., 1 R 6, 2 R 2, 2 R 6 and 3 R 6 (4, 3), (5, 3), (5, 4)}
Clearly, Domain (R) = {1, 3} and
Range (R) = {2, 4}. (v) Reflexive relation :
Let R be a relation in a set A i.e., let R be
a subset of A × A. Then R is called a relfexive
Let A be a non-empty set. Then a subset of relation if (a, a)  R  a  A.
A × A is called a binary relation or simply, A relation R in a set A is not reflexive if
a relation on A. there is at least one element a  A such that
 Some particular types of relations : (a, a)  R.
(i) Void relation : Since   A × A, it follows e.g. Let A = {1, 2} be a set. Then R = {(1, 1),
that  is a relation on A, called the empty or (2, 2), (1, 2), (2, 1)} is a reflexive relation
void relation. on A. But R1 = {(1, 1), (2, 1), (1, 2)} is not
(ii) Universal relation : Since A × A A × A, reflexive relation on A, because 2 A, but
it follows that A × A is a relation on A called
the universal relation. (2, 2) 
 R1.

NANCE 46
 Sets & Relation

(vi) Symmetric relation : A relation R in a set e.g. Let A be the set of all triangles in a plane
A is said to be symmetric if aRb = bRa i.e., and let R be defined by “is congruent to”,
(a, b)  R, then (b, a)  R  a, b  A. we observe that
e.g. Let R be the relation “is perpendicular to” in (i) R is reflexive i.e., aRa, for every a  R.
the set of lines. Then R is symmetric relation Since every triangle is congruent to itself.
because if a line a is perpendicular to b, (ii) R is symmetric i.e., aRb  bRa. Since
then b is perpendicular to a. if triangle a is congruent to triangle b, then
b is congruent to a.
(vii) Anti-symmetric relation : Let R be a
relation in a set A i.e., let R be a subset of (iii) R is transitive i.e., aRb and bRc 
A × A. Then R is called anti-symmetric aRc. Since if triangle a is congruent to
relation. i.e., triangle b and triangle b is congruent to
triangle c, then a is congruent to c. Hence
If (a, b)  R and (b, a)  R  a = b i.e.,
the relation R defined above is an
aRb and bRa  a = b.
equivalence relation.
e.g. Let R be the relation in N defined by “x is
a divisor of y”. Then R is anti-symmetric (x) Congruence module : Let m be any fixed
because a divides b and b divides a implies integer. Then two integers a and b are said
a = b. to be congruence modulo m, if a – b
is divisible by m and is written as a  b
(viii) Transitive relation : A relation R in a set
(mod m).
A said to be transitive,
Ex. 16  4 (mod 2) because 16 – 4 = 12 is
if aRb and bRc  aRc.
divisible by 2.
i.e., if (a, b)  R and (b, c)  R, then
(a, c)  R  a, b, c  A. (xi) Partial order relation : A relation R is
e.g. Let A be the set of all lines in a plane and called partial order relation if R is reflexive,
R be the relation in A defined by “is parallel transitive and anti-symmetric at the same
to”. Then if a line is parallel to line b and line time.
b is parallel to c, then a is parallel to c. Here  Some results on relations :
R is transitive. 1. If B and C are two equivalence relations on
(ix) Equivalence relation : A relation R in a a set A, then B  C is also equivalence
set A is said to be an equivalence relation if relation on A.
R is relfexive, symmetric and transitive. 2. The union of two equivalence relations on a
(i) R is relfexive i.e., set is not necessarily an equivalence relation
for every a  A, (a, a)  R. on the same set.
i.e., aRa  a  R. 3. If R is an equivalence relation on a set A,
then R–1 is also an equivalence relation
(ii) R is symmetric i.e.,
on A.
(a, b)  R  (b, a)  R.
i.e, aRb = bRa  a, b  A.
(iii) R is transitive i.e., (a, b)  R and (b, c) A relation R is called ordered relation if R
R implies (a, c) R. is transitive but not an equivalence relation.
i.e., aRb and bRc aRc  a, b, c  A. Symbolically aRb, bRc  aRc  a, b, c  A.

NANCE 47
 Sets & Relation

1. A = {x, y, z}, B = {1, 2} then the no. of 8. A relation f on R is defined by f(x) = x2 + 1,

relations from A to B is - then values of f–1(17) and f–1(–3) are -
(A) 64 (B) 32 (A ) { – 3, 3} , 
(C) 8 (D) 128 (B) , {3, – 3}
(C) , {4, – 4}
2. Let L denote the set of all straight lines in
(D) {4, – 4}, 
a plane. Let a relation R defined on L by
9. Let A be set of first ten natural numbers and
xRy  x  y; x, y  L then R is -
R be a relation on A, defined by
(A) equivalence
(x, y)  R  x + 2y = 10, then domain of
(B) only reflexive
R is -
(C) only symmetric
(A) {2, 4, 6, 8}
(D) only transitive (B) {1, 2, 3, ....., 10}
3. Let A = {a, b, c, d, e} and B= {b, c, e, f}, (C) {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}
then the no. of element in (A × B) (B × A) (D) {1, 2, 3, 4}
(A) 2 (B) > 8 10. Let S be the set of integers, for a, b S,
(C) 6 (D) 8 relation R is defined by aRb iff | a – b | < 1,
4. If R is a relation on Z defined by xRy  x then R is -
divides y, then R is - (A) only transitive
(A) symmetric, transitive (B) only reflexive
(B) reflexive and symmetric (C) equivalence
(C) equivalence (D) only symmetric
(D) reflexive and transitive
11. The minimum number of elements that must
5. If R and S are two symmetric relations, then be added to the relation R = {(1, 2),
(A) RoS is symmetric if and only if (2, 3)} on the set {1, 2, 3} so that R is an
RoS = SoR equivalence relation -
(B) RoS is symmetric (A) 5 (B) 6
(C) SoR is symmetric (C) 7 (D) 8
(D) RoS–1 is symmetric
12. If A = {2, 3}, B = {6, 8}, C = {1, 2} and
6. If A is a non-empty set, then the relation D = {6, 9}, then (A × B)  (C × D) is -
 (subset) on the power set of A is - (A) {3, 6} (B) {2, 6}
(A) only symmetric (C) {6, 2} (D) {6, 3}
(B) partial ordering relation
(C) only reflexive 13. If A =  and n(B) = 4, then n(A × B) is -
(D) only equivalence (A) 0 (B) 4
(C)  (D) none
7. On set A, R is a reflexive relation and I is
identity relation, then - 14. In a set A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, the relation R is
(A) R = I (B) R  I defined as xRy  x y. Then the domain
(C) I  R (D) none of these of the inverse relation is -

NANCE 48
 Sets & Relation
(A) {1, 2, 3} (C) all points lying on the sides of the
(B) {3, 4, 5, 6} rectangle having vertices at (1, 1),
(C) {1, 2, 3, 4} (0, 1), (0, – 1) and (1, – 1)
(D) {4, 5, 6} (D) none of these
15. If a set A has n elements, then number of 20. Total number of equivalence relations
relations defined on A is - defined in the set S = {a, b, c} is -
(A) 22n (B) 2n (A) 23 (B) 3!
2 
3
(C) 2n  1 (D) 2( n )
(C) 3 (D) 5

16. A relation S from set of complex numbers 21. Let R = {(2, 3), (3, 4)} be relation defined
C to the set of real numbers R is defined by on the set of natural numbers. The minimum
xSy  | x | = y. Which one is correct? number of ordered pairs required to be
(A) iS1 added in R so that enlarged relation becomes
(B) (1 + i)S2 an equivalence relation is -
(C) 3 (– 3) (A) 7 (B) 3
(D) (2 + 3i) S13 (C) 9 (D) 5
17. The relation R is defined in the set 22. A and B are two sets having 3 and 5
A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} by elements respectively of ordered pairs
R = {(x, y) : |x2 – y2| < 16}, then - required to be added in R so that
(A) R = {(1, 1), (2, 1), (3, 1), (4, 1), enlarged relation becomes an equivalence
(2, 3)} relation is -
(B) R = {(2, 2), (3, 2), (4, 2), (2, 4)} (A) 36 (B) 15
(C) R = {(3, 3), (4, 3), (5, 4), (3, 4)}
(C) 6 (D) none
(D) none of these
23. Let R be reflexive relation on a finite set A
18. If R {(x, y) : x, y  I and x2 + y2  4} is
having n elements, and let there be m
a relation in I, the domain of R is -
ordered pairs in R, then -
(A) {0, 1, 2}
(B) {–2, –1, 0, 1, 2} (A) m  n
(C) I (B) m  n
(D) {– 2, – 1, 0} (C) m = n
(D) none of these
19. If A = {x  R : 0 < x < 1} and
B = {x  R : – 1 < x < 1}; then A × B 24. Let R be a relation on N × N defined by
contains - (a, b) R (c, d)  ad (b + c) = bc (a + d)R
(A) all points lying inside the rectangle is -
having vertices at (1, 0), (1, 1), (0, 1) (A) an identity relation
and (1, – 1) (B) a partial order relation
(B) all points lying inside the rectangle (C) an equivalence relation
having vertices at (1, 0), (1, 1), (0, 1)
(D) none
and (0, 0)

NANCE 49
 Sets & Relation

25. Let P = {(x, y) / x2 + y2 = 1; x, y  R}, 28. Let R be the relation defined on Z so that
then P is - 3
aRb   b, then 
(A) anti-symmetric a
(A) symmetric, transitive but not reflexive
(B) symmetric
(B) reflexive, symmetric but not transitive
(C) equivalence
(C) reflexive, transitive but not symmetric
(D) none
(D) equivalence relations
26. Let R be a relation defined on Z so that if
29. The number of distance relations on a set of
(x, y)  R  x + y = 6, then which of the
3 elements is -
following is true?
(A) 9
(A) reflexive
(B) 8
(B) symmetric and Anti-symmetric
(C) 512
(C) transitive
(D) 18
(D) none of these
30. Let R be the relation on the set A of all real
27. Let R be a relation defined on N such that numbers defined by aRb iff | a – b |  1.
R = {(x, y) / 2x + y = 41}, then R is - Then R is -
(A) symmetric (A) anti-symmetric
(B) transitive (B) reflexive
(C) reflexive (C) not symmetric
(D) none (D) transitive

Education is the knowledge of how to use

the whole of oneself and how to apply it to
all practical purposes.

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A C B D A B C D A B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C B A C D A D B A D
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . C B A C B B D D A B

NANCE 50
 Functions

Ex. If A = {a, b, c}
1. Let A & B are any two non empty sets, B = {c, d, e}
then a function ‘f’ from set A to set B is a A f B
rule or correspondence which associates a c
elements of set A to set B such that b d
(i) All elements of set A are associated to c e
elements in set B.
(ii) An element of set A is associated to a unique f = {(a, d), (b, c), (c, e)}
element in set B. Here d, c, e are called image of a, b, c
under ‘f’ respectively.
2. If ‘f’ is a function from set A to set B then
we write f : A  B or A  f
 B , which is
read as ‘f’ is a function from A to B or ‘f’ f : A  B is a mapping and (a, b)  f and
maps A to B. we write this assignment as f–1(b) = a. Also
f–1(b) is called pre image (or) inverse image
of b under ‘f’.
Ex. If A = {1, 2, 3} Ex. A = {1, 2, 3}
B = {4, 5, 6} B = {7, 8, 9}
A f B
1 7
2 8
3 9

 f = {(1, 4), (2, 6), (3, 5)} Here : f : A  B is a function and

f = {(1, 9), (2, 7), (3, 8)}
Ex. If A = {a, b, c} f (9) = 1, f–1(8) = 3, f–1(7) = 2.
–1

B = {4, 5, 6}  1, 3, 2 are called pre images (or) inverse

A f B images of 9, 8, 7 respectively.
a 4
b 5
c 6
Let f : A B is a function, then set ‘A’ is
called the Domain of ‘f’, and set B is called
f = {(a, 4), (a, 5), (b, 6)} the co-domain of ‘f’.
Here ‘f’ is not a function. Ex. Let A = {– 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2} and
B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
A f B
If ‘f’ is a function from A to B and an -2 0
element a  A is associated to b  B under -1 1
‘f’. i.e., f(a) = b, then ‘b’ is called the image 0 2
of ‘a’. 1 3
(or) 2 4
If f : A  B is a mapping and (a, b)  f 5
then we write this assignment as f(a) = b.
6
Also f(a) is called the image of ‘a’ under ‘f’.

NANCE 51
 Functions

Domain of ‘f’ = {– 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2} Note : If A and B are finite sets and f : A  B is

Co-domain of ‘f’ = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} a bijection, then A and B have the same
number of elements.

The set of all of images of elements of ‘A’

is known as the range of ‘f’ (or) image set A function f : A  B is said to be a many-
of A under ‘f’ and is denoted by f(A). one function if two or more elements of a
Thus f(A) = {f(x); x  A} = Range of ‘f’. set A have the same image in B.
Ex. If A = {a, b, c, d}, Ex.1 Let f : A  B represented by the following
B = {– 1,0, 1, 2, 3, 4} diagram
The function f : A  B is defined as A f B
A f B x1 y1
a -1 x2 y2
0 x3 y3
b
1 x4 y4
c x5 y5
2
d 3 Clearly x2, x4 in A have the same f image in
4 B i.e., y1 and also x1, x5 in A have the same
Range = {– 1, 2, 3, 4} f image in B i.e. y3.
Ex.2 Let A = {– 1, 1, – 2, 2} and
B = {1, 4, 9, 16}. Consider f : A  B
If set A is infinite, then ‘f’ cannot be given by f(x) = x2 then f(– 1) = 1; f(1) = 1;
described by listing the images at points in f(– 2) = 4; f(2) = 4.
its domain. In such cases functions are Clearly, 1 and – 1 have the same image.
generally described by a formula Similarly 2 and – 2 also have the same image.
Ex. (i) f : Z  Z given by f(x) = x2 + 1 So f is a many-one function.
(ii) f : R  R given by f(x) = 2x
A function f : A  B is an into function, if
1. One - One Function (Injection) : there exist an element in B having no
A function f : A  B is said to be one-one preimage in A.
function, if different elements of set A have In other words, f : A  B is an into function
different images in set B. if it is not an onto function.
(or) Ex. Let f : A  B and g : X  Y be two
f : A  B is one-one function since distinct functions represented by the following
elements in A has distinct images in set B. diagrams.
2. Onto Function (Surjection) :
A function f : A  B is said to be an onto
function, if every element of B is the
‘f’-image of some element of A.
i.e., if f(A) = B
Co-domain = Range
3. Bijection (or) (One-One onto Function) : Clearly, b1 and b5 are two elements in B
A function f : A  B is a bijection if it is which do not have their pre-image in A so,
one-one as well as onto function. f : A  B is an into function.

NANCE 52
 Functions

Under function ‘g’ every element in Y has its Note :

pre image in X, so g : X  Y is not an into 1. A constant function is a function whose
function. range is singleton set.
2. A constant function is one-one function
if its domain contain singleton element.
Let ‘A’ be a non empty set. A function
3. A constant function is an onto function
f : A  A is said to be an Identity function
if its co-domain is a singleton set.
on set A, if f associates every element of set
A to the element itself. 4. A constant function is a bijection, if both
of its domain and co-domain are
Thus f : A  A is an identity function if
singleton sets.
f(x) = x for all x A.
Equal Functions :
Ex. Let A = {a, b, c}
Two functions f and g are said to be equal
f : A  A is represented by
if and only if
(i) the domain of f= the domain of g
(ii) for each x A, f(x) = g(x). Here ‘A’ is
domain of f and g.
If two functions f and g are equal, then we
write f = g.
Thus f(x) = x   x  A
Hence f is an identity function. Ex. Let A = {1, 2}, B = {3, 6}
f : A  B given by
Note : f(x) = x2 + 2 and
1. The identify function on set A is generally g ; A  B given by g(x) = 3x.
denoted by IA. Then we observe that
2. It is true from the definition that IA is a f(1) = 3 = g(1) and f(2) = 6 = g(2)
bijection on A. Hence f and g have the same domain and
 Constant Function : co-domain.
A function f : A  B is such that every Hence, f = g.
element of A has same f image in B i.e.,
f(x) = c  x  A and ‘c’ is a fixed element f is a function from A to B, in general f–1(b),
of B. Then f is said to be a constant function. may correspond with one element, more than
Ex.1 If A = {1, 2, 4}; B = {5} one element or may not with any element.
A f B
Since it is clear from the definition.
1 Ex.1 Let the function f : A  B be defined by the
2 5 following diagram.
3 A f B
a p
Here f : A  B is a constant function. b q
Ex.2 If A = {4, 5, 6}; B = {7, 8, 9} c r
A f B
d s
4 7
5 8 Observe that f is not bijective.
6 9 f–1(q) = {a, c}, q is assigned to more than
one element in A so f–1 is not a function.
Here f : A  B is also a constant function Hence the inverse function of f does not
because f(4) = 8; f(5) = 8 and f(6) = 8. exist.

NANCE 53
 Functions

Ex.2 Let f : R  R is defined by f(x) = 6x + 5  f(–x)  f(x) and f(–x)  – f(x)

–1
find f (x). Hence f(x) is neither even nor odd.
Sol. Let f(x) = y Note :
 6x + 5 = y 1. A constant function is always an even
y 5 function
 x Ex : f(x) = 2;
6
y 5 f(x) = 7 etc.
f–1(y) = for all y R (co-domain) 2. If an integral polynomial function be
6
–1
Also observe that f is one-one and onto. even with regard to any variable, it can
only contain even powers of that
Note : variable, if odd it will contain only odd
1. –1
Domain of f = Range of f and Range powers of the variable.
of f = Domain of f–1
2. The identify function is its own inverse. Let A and B are two non empty sets. A
relation f from A to B. i.e., a subset of
A × B, is called a function.
A function f(x) is said to be an even function (i)  a A, there is a unique b  B such
if f(– x) = f(x) for all x; that (a, b)  f
A function f(x) is said to be an odd function (ii) no two ordered pairs in f have the same
f(– x) = – f(x) for all x. first element i.e., (a, b) f and (a, c) f
Ex.1 Let f(x) = 5x6 + 6x2 + 7   b = c
if (a, b) f, then ‘b’ is called the image of
Replacing ‘x’ by ‘– x’
‘a’ under f.
f(–x) = 5(–x)6 + 6(–x)2 + 7
A f B
= 5x6 + 6x2 + 7 Ex.
a b1
 f(–x) = f(x)
b b2
Hence f(x) is called an even function. b3
c
Ex.2 Let f(x) = 7x5 + 6x3 + 8x
Replacing ‘x’ by ‘–x’ we get f = {(a, b1), (b, b2), (c, b2)}
f(– x) = 7(–x)5 + 6(– x)3 + 8(–x) f is a function
= – 7x5 – 6x3 – 8x A g B
= – [7x5 + 6x3 + 8x] a x
= – f(x) b y
 f(– x) = – f(x) c z
Hence f(x) is called an odd function. g = {(a, x), (b, z)}
Ex.3 Let f(x) = x3 + x – 2 g is not a function but only relation.
Replacing ‘x’ by ‘(–x)’ we get
f(– x) = (– x3) + (–2) – 2
 Real Valued Functions :
= – x3 – x – 2 If f is a function from A into B, then
= – (x3 + x + 2) f  A × B infact f = {(a, f(a)); a  A}.

NANCE 54
 Functions

If f : A  B is said to be a real valued y

function if B  R and is said to be real
valued function of real variable if both A, B
are subsets of R.
f = {(a, f(a)); a  A} is a set of order x1 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
pairs whose co-ordinates are real numbers.
 We can plot these real numbers on a
graph.
Note : y1
A graph will represent a function, if Each of the graphs given above does not
every vertical line cuts the graph in not represent a function, as shown in each case,
more than one point. a vertical line can be drawn to meet the
y graph at two points.
3 Note :
2 1. Y-axis does not represent a function.
1
x
1
1 2 3 2. Every line parallel to Y-axis does not
Ex.1 x
-3 -2 -1 0 represent a function.
-1
3. X-axis and every line parallel to X-axis
-2
-3
represent a function.
 Composite Function :
y A B C
f g
a a a
f:A B g: B C

x1 x gof : A C
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
Let f : A  B g : B  C be two functions
then the function gof : A  C defined by
y1
gof(x) = g(f(x)) for all x  A is called the
composite function of f and g.
Each of the graphs given above represents
a function, as in each case no vertical line Note : It should be noted that ‘gof’ exists if
can be drawn to meet the graph at 2 or the range of f is equal to the domain of
more points. g, similarly fog exists if the range of g
y is equal to the domain of f.
 Composition of Three Functions :

Ex.2 x1 x
-3 -2 -1 1 2 3

y1

NANCE 55
 Functions

Let f : A B, g : B C and h : C  D Ex. ax2 + bxy + cy2

First we can form the composite function Note : ax2 + bxy is a homogeneous function
gof : A  C and then h : C D. but not complete.
Note :  Symmetric Function : A function is said to
1. ho(gof) = (hog) of be symmetric with respect to any set of
2. both have the same Domain A and co- variables, if the interchange of any pairs of
domain D the set of variables does not change the value
3.  x  A, both give the same image of the function.
h[g{f(x)}] i.e., A function f(x, y) is said to be symmetric
in two variables if f(x, y) = f(y, x).
 Homogeneous Function :
An int egral funct ion is said to be Forms of Symmetric Integral Functions :
homogeneous, if each of its terms is of the Variables Degree Symmetric Function
same degree with respect to any set of x, y 1 a (x + y) + b (x + y)
variables. x, y 2 a (x2 + y2) + 2hxy + b(x2 + y2)
x, y 3 ax3 + ay3 + bx2y + by2x
Ex : ax2 + 2hxy + by2 is a homogeneous function x, y, z 1 a (x + y + z)
of second degree where x and y are x, y, z 2 x2 + y2 + z2
variables; a, h and b are constants.
Note : The sum, difference, product or quotient
V ariable s D e g re e Homog eneous function of s tandard of two symmetric functions are again a
for m symmetric function.
x, y 1 ax + b y Suppose f(x, y, z) is an algebraic function in
2 2
x, y 2 ax + 2h xy + b y three variables x, y and z.
3 2 2 3
x, y 3 ax + b x y + cxy + d y
4 3 2 2 3 4
If f(x, y, z) = f(y, x, z), then f(x, y, z) is said
x, y 4 ax + b x y + cx y + d xy + cy to be symmetric in x and y.
x, y , z 1 ax + b y + cz
2 2 2
An algebraic function f(x, y, z) is said to be
x, y , z 2 ax + b y + cz + d xy + c y z + b zx
3 3 3 2 2 2
absolutely symmetric if the function is
ax + b y + cz + d x y + e xy + fy z + symmetric in x, y; y, z; z, x.
x, y , z 3 2 2 2
g y z + h z x + izx + jxy z
Ex. f(x, y, z) = ax2 + 2bxyz + ay2 + cz
Note : f(x, y, z) = ay2 + 2byxz + ax2 + cz
1. The product of two homogeneous = f(y, x, z)
functions of degrees ‘m’ and ‘n’ i.e., if we interchange x and y in f(x, y, z)
respectively is a homogeneous function there is no change in it.
of degree (m + n).  f(x, y, z) is symmetric in x and y
Ex. (3x + 2y) (4x + 5y) = 12x2 + 23xy + 10y2 but f(x, z, y) = ax2 + 2bxzy + az2 + cy 
Here (3x + 2y) is a homogeneous f(x, y, z) by interchanging y and z,
function of 1st degree and (4x + 5y) is f (x, y, z) is altered.
also homogeneous function of 1st  f (x, y, z) is not symmetric in y and z
degree.  f(x, y, z) is not absolutely symmetric.
Then their product 12x2 + 23xy + 10y2
Note : If f(x, y, z) = f(y, x, z); (x and y are
is homogeneous of 2nd degree in x
interchanged)
and y.
= f(x, z, y); (y and z are interchanged)
2. A homogeneous function is said to be
complete if it contains all possible terms = f(z, y, x); (x and z are interchanged)
in it. then f(x, y, z) is absolutely symmetric.

NANCE 56
 Functions

 Homogeneous Symmetric Integral Note :  is used for sum of cyclic functions

Functions : and  is used for product of cyclic
Definition : A function which is both symmetric functions.
homogeneous and symmetric, is said to be
a Homogeneous symmetric function. Ex.  a 2 b  a 2 b  b 2a
a,b

Forms of Homogeneous symmetric integral 2 2 2 2

functions :
 a b  a bb cc a
a,b,c

Variables Degree Symmetric Function a 2 b  a 2 b  b 2 c  c 2d  d 2 a

x, y 1 ax + ay

a,b,c,d
x, y 2 ax2 + bxy + ay2
x, y 3 ax3 + bx2y + bxy2 + ay3  (a 2  b2 )  (a 2  b2 ) (b2  c2 ) (c2  a 2 )
a,b,c
x, y, z 1 ax + ay + az
x, y, z 2 ax2 + ay2 + az2 + bxy + byz + bzx 
a,b,c
(x  c)  (x  a) (x  b) (x  c)

 Cyclic Symmetric : A function f(x, y, z) is

Important Points to Remember :
said to be a cyclic if f(x, y, z) = f(y, z, x).
Ex. f(x, y, z) = x3 (y – z) + y3 (z – x) + z3  If A and B are two non empty finite sets,
(x – y) then the number of functions can be defined
Then f(y, x, z) = y3 (x – z) + x3 (z – y) + from A to B is [n(B)]n(A).
z3 (y – x) f(x, y, z)  The number of one-one functions that can
 f(x, y, z) is not symmetric in x and y. be defined from the finite set A to the
Similarly we can see that f(x, y, z) is neither finite set B is n(B)Pn(A) if n(B)  n(A) and 0
symmetric in y and z nor z and x. if n(B) < n(A).
But if we replace x by y; y by z and z by  If A and B are non empty sets and
x simultaneously in f(x, y, z), the result is n(B) = 2 then the number of onto functions
f(x, y, z) = y3 (z – x) + z3 (x – y) + that can be defined from A to B is 2n(A) – 2.
x3 (y – z).  If A and B are two sets such that
Which is same as f(x, y, z) such function are n(A) = n(B), then possible number of
called cyclic symmetric functions. bijections from A to B is n(A)!

1. Set A has n elements. The number of 4. The number of bijective functions from
functions that can be defined from A into A set A to itself when A contains 106 elements
is - is -
(A) n2 (B) n! (C) nn (D) n (A) 106 (B) 1062
(C) 106! (D) 2106
2. Set A has 3 elements and set B has 4
elements. The number of injections that can 5. Let f : R  R be defined by
be defined from A into B is -  x  2 ( x  1)
(A) 144 (B) 12 (C) 24 (D) 64 
f(x) =  x 2 (1  x  1). Then the value
3. If n  2 then the number of surjections that  2  x ( x  1)
can be defined from {1, 2, 3, ...... n} onto 
{1, 2} is - of f(– 1.75) + f(0.5) + f(1.5) is -
(A) 2n (B) nP2 (A) 0 (B) 2
(C) 2n (D) 2n – 2 (C) 1 (D) – 1

NANCE 57
 Functions

6. If f : R  R is defined by f(x) = 2x + |x| 14. If f : R  R and g : R  R are defined by

then f(3x) – f(– x) – 4x = __________ f(x) = 2x + 3, g(x) = x2 + 7 then the value
(A) f(x) (B) – f(x) of x for which f[g(x)] = 25 are -
(C) f(– x) (D) 2f(x) (A) ± 1 (B) ± 2 (C) ± 3 (D) ± 4

7. If f(1) = 1, f(n + 1) = 2f(n) + 1, n  1, then 15. If f : RR and g : R R are defined
f(n) is - by f(x) = 2x + 3 and g(x) = x2 + 7, then the
(A) 2n + 1 (B) 2n values of x such that g(f(x)) = 8 are -
(C) 2n – 1 (D) 2n – 1 – 1 (A) 1, 2 (B) – 1, 2
(C) – 1, – 2 (D) 1, – 2
2a
8. If f(a) = log for 0 < a < 2, then 2x  1
2a 16. If y = f(x) = , then f(y) = _______
1  8a  x2
f   __________ (A) x (B) y
2  4  a2 
(C) 2y – 1 (D) y – 2
(A) f(a) (B) 2f(a)
x x
1 17. If f(x) = , g(x) = then
(C) f (a ) (D) – f(a) 1 x 2
1 x2
2
(fog) (x) =
9. If f(x) = cos log x then x
x
2 (A) (B)
1 2 2  x  1 x2 1 x2
f(x2) f(y2) – f ( x y )  f  2  = ______
2  y  1  x2
(C) (D) x
(A) 0 (B) – 1 1 x2
(C) – 2 (D) None
18. If f : R  R and g : R  R are defined by
10. Let f : Z  Z be defined as f(x) = x , 2 f(x) = x – [x] and g(x) = [x] for x  R,
x  Z. The function f is - where [x] is the greatest integer not
(A) a bijection (B) an injection exceeding x, then for every x  R,
(C) a surjection (D) a function f(g(x)) = _________
(A) x (B) 0
11. Let ‘f’ be an injective function with domain (C) f(x) (D) g(x)
{x, y, z} and range {1, 2, 3} such that
exactly one of the following statements is 19. If f : A  B is a bijective function then f–1
correct and the remaining are false f(x) = 1, of = __________
f(y)  1, f(z)  2. The value of f–1(1) is - (A) fof–1
(A) x (B) y (C) z (D) None (B) f
(C) f–1
12. If f : R  R is defined by f(x) = 3x – 2,
then (fof) (x) + 2 = _________ (D) IA (Identity map of the set A)
(A) f(x) (B) 2f(x) 20. f : R  R is a function defined by f(x) =
(C) 3f(x) (D) – f(x) 10x – 7. If g = f–1 then g(x) = _________
13. If f(x) = log x, g(x) = x3 then 1 1
(A) (B)
f[g(a)] + f[g(b)] = _________ 10 x  7 10 x  7
(A) f[g(a) + g(b)] (B) f[g(ab)] x7 x7
(C) g[f(ab)] (D) g[f(a) + f(b)] (C) (D)
10 10

NANCE 58
 Functions
2
x
21. If f : R+  R such that f(x) = log3 x then 27. The range of is -
1 x2
f–1(x) = _________ (A) (0, 1) (B) [0, 1)
(A) log x3 (B) 3x (C) 3–x (D) 31/x
(C) (0, ) (D) [0, )
22. If f : {1, 2, 3, .....}  {0, ± 1, ± 2, .......}
is defined by x2  x 1
n/2 if n is even 28. The range of 2 is -
 x  x 1
f(n) =   n  1 
  2  if n is odd 1  1 
 (A)  , 3 (B)  , 1
then f–1(100) is - 3  3 
(A) 100 (B) 199 (C) 201 (D) 200 (C) [1, 3]
23. If f : R  R and g : R  R are defined by  1
f(x) = 3x – 4 and g(x) = 2 + 3x then (D)   ,   [3,  )
 3
(g–1of–1) (5) = __________
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/5
29. If a2 + b2 + c2 = 1, then the range of
3 ab + bc + ca is -
24. The domain of f(x) = 2
 log10 ( x 3  x )
4 x (A) [–1/2, 1] (B) [–1/2, )
is -
(C) [1, ) (D) None
(A) (1, 2)
(B) [–1, 1)  (1, 2) x x
(C) (1, 2)  (2, ) 30. If f(x)  2  2 , then
(D) (–1, 0)  (1, 2)  (2, ) 2

2 x f(x + y)  f(x – y) = ________

25. The range of the function f(x) = ,
2 x 1
x  2 is - (A) [f ( 2 x )  f ( 2 y)]
(A) R (B) R – {–1} 4
1
(C) R – {1} (D) R – {2} (B) [f ( 2 x )  f ( 2 y)]
2
26. The range of the function f(x) = 7–xPx–3 is - 1
(A) {1, 2, 3} (C) [f ( 2x )  f ( 2 y)]
2
(B) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(C) {1, 2, 3, 4} 1
(D) [f ( x )  f ( 2 y)]
(D) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} 4

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C C D C C D C A A D
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B C B B C A D B D C
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . B D C D B A B A A B

NANCE 59
 Quadratic Equations

 If a < 0, then maximum value of

ax2 + bx + c = 0 is (4ac – b2) / 4a.
An equation of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0
b
where a, b, c  Complex number and a  0  If c = 0  one root is zero other is –
a
is called a quadratic equation. The numbers  If b = c = 0 both roots are zero.
a, b, c are called the coefficients of this Note : The possible values of x which satisfy the
equation and x is real variable, here a is quadratic equation are called the roots of the
coefficient of x2, b is coefficient of x & c is quadratic equation.
constant term.  Roots of a Quadratic Equation : Let
 Real Quadratic Equation : An Equation p(x) = 0 be a quadratic equation, then the
ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0 & a, b, c  R is zeros of the polynomial p(x) are called the
called “Real Quadratic Equation.” roots of the equation p(x) = 0.
Thus  is a root of p(x) = 0, if p() = 0
 Monic Quadratic Equation : If the co- Also, x =  is called a solution of the given
efficient of x2 be unity, then the quadratic equation.
equation is called “Monic Quadratic  Solving of a Quadratic Equation by
Equation”. Fractorization Method :
Let ax2 + bx + c = 0 be a quadratic equation
and let the quadratic polynomial ax2 + bx+ c
be expressible as a product of two linear
 A quadratic equation has two and only two
factors, say (dx + e) and (fx + g) where d, e,
roots.
f, g are real numbers such that d  0 and
 A quadratic equation cannot have more than f  0.
two different roots. Then,
 If  is a root of the quadratic equation ax2 + ax2 + bx + c = 0
bx + c = 0, then (x–) is a factor of  (dx + e) (fx + g) = 0
ax2 + bx + c = 0.  dx + e = 0 or fx + g = 0
e g
 If the roots  &  be reciprocals to each other,  x = or x 
d f
then a = c. e g
 x and x  are t he
 If the two roots  &  be equal in magnitude d f
and opposite in sign, then b = 0 possible roots of the quadratic equation ax2
+ bx + c = 0.
1 1 b
  
  c  Solving of a Quadratic Equation by
Quadratic Formula :
b 2  4ac Consider the general quadratic equation
  
a ax2 + bx + c = 0
 If a > 0, then minimum value of ax2 + bx + c where a  0, a, b, c  R :
= 0 is (4ac – b2) / 4a. ax2 + bx = – c

NANCE 60
 Quadratic Equations

b c
or x2  x = 
a a Consider two quadratic equations
[Dividing both sides by a] a1x2 + b1x + c1 = 0 ...(i) a1  0
2
2 2 and a2x + b2x + c2 = 0 ...(ii) a2  0
2b  b  c  b 
or x  x   =    (A) If one root is common then,
a  2a  a  2a  (a1b2 – a2b1) (b1c2 – b2c1) = (c1a2 – c2a1)2
2
 b  (B) If two roots are common then,
[Adding   to both sides]
 2a  a1 b1 c1
 
2 a 2 b2 c 2
 b  b2 c
or  x   =   Sum of the roots of a quadratic
 2a  4a 2 a
2
equation :
 b  b 2  4ac If ,  are the roots of the general form of a
 x   =
 2a  4a 2 quadratic equation is ax2 + bx + c = 0, where
2 a  0.
 b 
2  b 2  4ac 
 x  
 =    b  D  b D
or   
 2a   4a 2  2a 2a
b D b D
b b2  4ac 
or x =  2a
2a 2a  2a

b b 2  4ac 2a
 x= 
2a 2a b

a
 b  b 2  4ac
i.e, x=  (Coefficien t of x )
2a 
Coeficient of x 2
Thus, the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 has two
roots  and , given by.  Product of the roots of a quadratic
equation :
 Discriminant : b2 – 4ac determines the
 b  b 2  4ac  b  b 2  4ac
nature of the roots of the quadratic equation,   
2a 2a
it is called the ‘DISCRIMINANT’ of the 2 2 2
(b)  ( b  4ac )
quadratic equation. 
4a 2
 Nature of the roots : b 2  b 2  4ac

Condition Nature of roots 4a 2
when b2 – 4ac < 0 the roots are complex 4ac
conjugates.  2
2 4a
when b – 4ac = 0 the roots are rational and c
equal. 
2 a
when b – 4ac > 0 the roots are rational and
constant term
and a perfect unequal. 
square Coefficien t of x 2
when b2 – 4ac > 0 the roots are irrational  Formation of a quadratic equation :
and not a perfect and unequal. If the general form of a quadratic equation is
square ax2 + bx + c, where a  0 and , and  are
the roots of the equation then,

NANCE 61
 Quadratic Equations

b c = [(    )3-3  (    )]
 =   
a a × [(    )2-2  ] - [  2  2(    )]
ax2 + bx + c = 0
(vi)  2  2  (  ) (  ) 2  4
 b c
a x 2  x    0 b b2  4ac  D
 a a  
a2 a
b c
x2   x   0 (vii)  3  3  (  )3  3(  )
 a  a
x 2     x    0 
 (  )2  4 (  2   
x2 – x (sum of the roots) + (product of the
roots) = 0 (b 2  ac) b 2  4ac

 Relation Between Roots and Coefficient: a3
If roots of quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c =
(viii)  4  4  ( 2  2 )( 2  2 )
0 (a  0) are  and  then:
 b(b 2  2ac) b 2  4ac
(i) (  )  (  ) 2  4 
a4
b 2  4ac  D
  (ix)  2    2  (  )2  
a a
b 2  2ac    2  2 (  ) 2  2
 2  2  (  )2  2  (x)   
(ii)    
a2
(iii)  3 +  3 = (    )3-3  (    ) (xi)  2  2  (  )
b(b 2  3ac) 2 2
       4  4 ( 2  2 )2  2 22
 (xii)       2 2 
a3      2 2
(iv)  4+  4=[(    )2-2  ]2-2  2  2
3. Relationship between discriminant &
2
 b 2  2ac  c2 nature of the roots :
  2

  2 If ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0 is a quadratic
 a  a2
equation, then the expression, b2 – 4ac is
(v) 5 +  5 = (  3+  3)(  2+  2)-  2  2(    ) known as its discriminant and denoted by D.

Discriminant

If “D <0,
 then
the equation have real roots the equation has no real root.

If D > 0, then the equation has If D = 0, then the equation has

two real and distinct roots two real and equal roots
b
i.e.  = – =
2a

If D is a perfect square, then the equation If D is not a perfect square, then the equation
has two real, distinct and rational roots. has two real, distinct and irrational roots.

NANCE 62
 Quadratic Equations

 If a, b, c  R and p + iq is one root of (iv) k, k ; ax 2  kbx  k 2 c  0

quadratic equation (where q  0), then the
(¼ Replace x by x/k)
other root must be conjugate p – iq and
vice–versa. (p, q,  R and i =  1 ) (v) k  , k    a(x  k) 2  b(x  k)  c  0
 If a, b, c  Q and p + q is one root of the (¼ Replace x by x – k)
quadratic equation, then the other root must  
(vi) ,  k 2 ax 2  kbx  c  0
be the conjugate p – q and vice–versa k k
(where p is a rational and q is a surd). (¼ Replace x by kx)
 If a = 1 and b, c  I and the roots of quadratic (vii) 1/ n , 1/ n ; n  N  a(x n ) 2  b(x n )  c  0
equation are rational numbers, then these
roots must be integers. (¼ Replace x by x n )
 If the quadratic equation has more than 2
roots (complex numbers), then the equation Let ,  be the two roots, then we can form
becomes an identity i.e., a = b = c = 0. a quadratic equation as follows :
 The condition that a quadratic function x2 – (Sum of roots)x + (Product of roots) = 0
f (x, y) = ax2 + 2 hxy + by2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c i.e., x2 – (+)x + () = 0
may be resolved into two linear factors is that; or (x – (x –) = 0
abc + 2 fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0

a h g 1. The roots  are both negative, if 

h b f and  are both positive
or = 0.
g f c b c
(i.e., if and are both positive.)
a a
When D  0, then the equation ax2 + bx + 2. The roots  are both positive, if  is
c = 0 is factorizable into two linear factors. negative and  is positive
i.e., ax2 + bx + c = 0  (x – )(x –) = 0, b c
i.e. a (x – )(x –) where and  are the (i.e., if is negative and is positive.)
a a
roots of quadratic equation. 3. The roots  are of opposite signs,  is
 Equation in terms of the roots of another c
negative (i.e., is negative)
equation : a
If ,  are roots of the equation Sign of ( Sign of(  Sign of the  
ax2 + bx + c = 0 then equation whose roots + ve + ve andare positive
are - ve + ve andare negative
+ ve - ve is positiveis
(i) ,   ax 2  bx  c  0
negative if  > 
(¼ Replace x by – x) (numerically)
(ii) 1/ ,1/   cx 2  bx  a  0 - ve - ve is negativeis
positive if  > 
(¼ Replace x by 1/x) (numerically)
n n 1/ n 2 1/ n
(iii)  ,  ; n  N  a(x )  b(x )  c  0 4. If sign of a = sign of b  sign of c  Greater
(¼ Replace x by x1/n ) root in magnitude is negative.

NANCE 63
 Quadratic Equations

 Maximum or minimum value of a  The graph of a quadratic function (expression)

quadratic expression : is called a parabola. The point at which its
The quadratic expression ax2 + bx + c takes direction changes is called its turning point,
different values as x takes different values. commonly called the vertex of the parabola.
For all the values of x, as x varies from – 
to + . (i.e., when x is real), the quadratic  The graph of the function is concave
expression ax2 + bx + c. upwards when a > 0 and concave
(i) has a minimum value if a > 0. (i.e., a is downwards when a < 0.
positive). The minimum value of the quadratic  If the graph has no points in common with the
(4ac  b 2 ) x-axis, the roots of the equation are imaginary
expression is and it occurs at
4a and cannot be determined from the graph.
b
x .  If the graph is tangent to the x-axis, the roots
2a
(ii) has a maximum value if a < 0. (i.e., a is are real and equal.
negative). The maximum value of the quadratic
 If the graph cuts the x-axis, the roots of the
(4ac  b 2 )
expression is and it occurs at equation will be real and unequal. Their values
4a
b will be given by the abscissa of the points of
x . intersection of the graph and the x-axis.
2a
 Graph of a Quadratic Function ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0

Characteristics of
the Function
When 'a' is positive Y Y Y

X X X
O (minima) O O
(minima)
i.e., a > 0 (minima)

When 'a' is negative

O O O
X X X

(Maxima)
(Maxima)
(Maxima)
i.e., a < 0 Y' Y' Y'

5. Solution of ax2 + bx + c = 0 by various expressible as the product of two linear factors

methods : namely (lx + m) and (px + q) where l, m, p, q
 Factorization are real number such that l  0, p  0. Then
Let ax2 + bx + c = 0 by the given quadratic ax2 + bx + c = 0  (lx + m) (px + q) = 0
equation. Assume that (ax2 + bx + c) be  Either lx + m = 0 or px + q = 0

NANCE 64
 Quadratic Equations

 lx = – m or px = –q Solutions of Equations Reducible to

Quadratic Form
m q
 x=– or x=– Equation which at the outset are not
l p quadratic equations but can be reduced to
 Completing the square quadratic equations by using suitable
Step 1. Consider the standard quadratic equation : algebraic transformations. Such equations
are called equations reducible to quadratic
ax2 + bx + c = 0, (a  0)
equations. Some of the common types are :
Step 2. Transpose the constant term (C) to the other
side (RHS).  ax4 + bx2 + c = 0
Step 3. Make the coefficient of x2 as unity. Divide This can be reduced to a quadratic equation
2
both sides by coefficient of x i, e., by a by substituting x2 = y. i.e., ay2 + by + c = 0.
Step 4. Make the L.H.S. as perfect square or Type 1 : Equations of the form ax4 + bx2 + c = 0.
completing the square of L.H.S. by adding Algorithm to solve equation of the form
both sides ax4 + bx2 + c = 0.
2 2
1   b  Step 1 : Obtain the given equation.
 (coefficien t of x )    Step 2 : Replace x2 by y and x4 by y2 in the given
2   2a 
Step 5. Taking square-root of both sides. Take both equation to obtain a quadratic equation in y.
the signs. Step 3 : Solve the quadratic equation in y by any
Step 6. Obtain two values of the variable (x). one of the methods of solving a quadratic
equation.
 Quadratic Formula
Step 4 : Obtain the positive values of y. Let the values
The standard quadratic equation ax2 + bx +
of y be  and .
c = 0, a  0 has two roots namely  and  . Step 5 : Solve the equations x2 =  and x2 = .
The value b2 – 4ac is called the discriminant Step 6 : The values of x obtained in step VI constitute
of the quadratic equation and is generally the solution set of the given equation.
denoted by D. Example : Solve 2x4 – 5x2 + 3 = 0.
Thus quadratic formula can also be written Solution : Putting x2 = y, the given equation
as : reduces to
2y2 – 5y + 3 = 0  2y2 – 2y – 3y + 3 = 0
2
 b  b  4ac  2y (y – 1) – 3 (y – 1) = 0
x
2a  (2y – 3) (y – 1) = 0
 2y – 3 = 0 or y – 1 = 0
 b  b 2  4ac  y = 3/2 or y = 1
 and
2a Now, y = 3/2  x2 = 3/2
 x   3/ 2
 b  b 2  4ac
 And, y = 1  x2 = 1
2a
 x = ± 1.
b  D Hence, the roots of the given equation are 1,
x where D  b2  4ac
2a 3 3
– 1, ,
This is also called Sridharacharya formula. 2 2

NANCE 65
 Quadratic Equations

Type 2 : Equations of the Form Hence, the roots of the given equation are
a {p(x)}2 + b. p(x) + c = 0,  3  21  3  21
Where p(x) is an expression in x and a, b, – 2, – 1, and
2 2
c are real numbers.
Algorithm to solve equations of the form Type 3 : Equations of the form
a {p(x)}2 + b {p(x) + c = 0, where p(x) is b
an expression in x and a, b, c  R. a p(x )   c, where p(x) is an
P (x)
expression in x and a, b, c are real
Step 1 : Obtain the equation. Let the equation be a
numbers.
{p(x)}2 + b {p(x)} + c = 0, where a, b, c  R.
Step 2 : Put p(x) = y, {p(x)}2 = y in the equation Algorithm to solve equations of the form
obtained in step 1 to get the quadratic b
2
a p(x )   c, where p(x) is an x and
ay + by + c = 0. P (x)
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic in y obtained in step 2 a, b, c are real numbers.
by any one of the methods of solving quadratic Step 1 : Obtain the given equation. Let the equation
equations. Let the values by y =  and y = .
b
Step 4 : Solve the equations p(x) =  and p(x) =  be a p(x )  c.
p (x)
for x. Step 2 : Put p (x) = y in the equation in step 1 to
Step 5 : The values of x obtained in step IV constitute obtain the quadratic a y2 – cy + b = 0.
the solution set of the given equation. Step 3 : Solve the quadratic in step 2 by any one of
the methods discussed in previous sections.
Example :Solve : ( x 2  3x )2  ( x 2  3x )  6  0,
Let the values of y be  and .
x  R. Step 4 : Solve the equation p(x) =  and p(x) = 
Solution : Putting x2 + 3x = y, the given equation for x.
reduces to y2 – y – 6 = 0 Step 5 : The values of x obtained in step 4 constitute
Now, the solution set of the given eqaution.
2 2
y – y – 6 = 0  y – 3y + 2y – 6 = 0 Following examples will illustrate the above
 y (y – 3) + 2 (y – 3) = 0 algorithm.
 (y – 3) (y + 2) = 0 x x  1 34
 y – 3 = 0 or y + 2 = 0 Example : Solve :  
x 1 x 15
 y = 3 or y = – 2
x x 1 1
 x2 + 3x = 3  x2 + 3x – 3 = 0 Solution : Putting  y and  . The
x 1 x y
 3  9  12  3  21
 x  given equation reduces to
2 2
And, y = – 2 x2 + 3x = – 2 1 34 y 2  1 34
y    
 x2 + 3x + 2 = 0 y 15 y 15
2
x + 2x + x + 2 = 0
 x (x + 2) + 1 (x + 2) = 0  15 y2 – 34y + 15 = 0.
(x + 2) (x + 1) = 0 Now, 15 y2 – 34y + 15 = 0
 x + 2 = 0 or x + 1 = 0  15 y2 – 25y – 9y + 15 = 0
x = – 2 or x = – 1  5y (3y – 5) – 3 (3y – 5) = 0

NANCE 66
 Quadratic Equations

 (3y – 5) (5y – 3) = 0 Step 4 : Equate the values of y obtained in step 3 to

 3y – 5 = 0 or 5y – 3 = 0 1 1
 y = 5/3 or y = 3/5 x  or x  as the case may be and
x x
5 x 5 obtain a quadratic equation in x.
Now, y =    3x  5x  5 Step 5 : Solve the quadratic equations obtained in
3 x 1 3
 2x = – 5  x = – 5/2 step 4. The values of x so obtained consititute
the solution set of the given equation.
3 x 3 Following examples illustrate the above
And, y     5x  3x  3
5 x 1 5 alogrithm.
3 Example : Solve :
 2x = 3  x 
2
Hence, the roots of the given equation are  1   1
9  x 2  2   9  x    52  0
3 5  x   x
and
2 2 1
Solution : Let x   y. Then
Type 4 : Equations of the form x
2
 1   1  1 2 2 1 2
(i) a  x 2  2   b  x    c  0 x   y  x  2 2  y
 x   x  x  x
 1   1 1
(ii) a  x 2  2   b  x    c  0  x 2  2  y2  2
 x   x x
 Algorithm to solve equations of the form Substitution
1 1
 1   1 x  y and x 2  2  y 2  2 in t he
(i) a  x 2  2   b  x    c  0 and x x
 x   x given equation, it becomes.
 1   1 9 (y2 – 2) – 9y – 52 = 0
a  x2  2   b x    c  0
 x   x 9y2 – 9y – 70 = 0
9y2 – 30 y + 21y – 70 = 0
Step 1 : Obtain the equation.
3y (3y – 10) + 7 (3y – 10) = 0
Step 2 : If the coefficient of b in the given equation
(3y – 10) (3y + 7) = 0
1 1
contains x  , then replace x 2  2 by 3y – 10 = 0 and 3y + 7 = 0
x x 10 7
2
 y  and y 
 1 1 3 3
 x    2 and put x  x  y. In case the Now,
 x
1 10 1 10 x 2  1 10
coefficient of b is x  , then replace y  x   
x 3 x 3 x 3
2  3x2 + 3 = 10 x  3x2 – 10x + 3 = 0
2 1  1
x  2 by  x    2 and put  3x2 – 9x – x + 3 = 0
x  x
1  3x (x – 3) – 1 (x – 3) = 0
x   y.
x  (3x – 1) (x – 3) = 0
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic equation in y obtained in  3x – 1 or x – 3 = 0
step 2. x = 1/3 or x = 3.

NANCE 67
 Quadratic Equations

And, Following examples illustrate the above

2
7 1 7 x 1  7 algorithm.
y  x   
3 x 3 x 3 Example : (x + 1) (x + 2) (x + 3) (x + 4) = 120.
3x2 + 3 = – 7x
3x2 + 7x + 3 = 0 Solution : Since 1 + 4 = 2 + 3. So, we write the
given equation in the following form :
 7  49  36  7  13
 x   {(x + 1) (x + 4)} {(x + 2) (x + 3)} = 120
6 6
Hence, the roots of the given equation are  (x2 + 5x + 4) (x2 + 5x + 6) = 120
1  7  13 Putting x2 + 5x = y. The above equation
3, , . becomes
3 6
(y + 4) (y + 6) = 120  y2 + 10y + 24
Type 5 : Equations of the form
= 120
(x + a) (x + b) (x + c) (x + d) + k = 0, where
 y2 + 16y – 96 = 0
a, b, c, d k  R such that a + b = c + d.
 y2 + 16y – 6y – 96 = 0
Algorithm to solve equations of the form  y (y + 16) – 6 (y + 16) = 0
(x + a) (x + b) (x + c) (x + d) + k = 0, where
 y + 16 = 0 or y – 6 = 0
a, b, c, d, k  R such that a + b = c + d.
 y = – 16 or y = 6
Step 1 : Obtain the equation (x + a) (x + b) (x + c) Now, y = – 16  x2 + 5x = – 16
(x + d) + k = 0.  x2 + 5x + 16 = 0
Step 2 : Re-write the given equation in the form
Clearly, discriminant of this equation is
{(x + a) (x + b) } { (x + c) (x + d) } + k = 0.
negative. So, it has no real solution.
Step 3 : Put x2 + x (a + b) = x2 + x (c + d) = y and
obtain a quadratic in y i.e. (y + ab) (y + cd) + And, y = 6
k = 0.  x2 + 5x = 6  x2 + 5x – 6 = 0
Step 4 : Solve the quadratic obtained in step 3. Let  x2 + 6x – x – 6 = 0
the value of y be y1 and y2.  x (x + 6) (x – 1) = 0
Step 5 : Equate x2 + x (a + b) to y1 and y2 to obtain  x + 6 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
two quadratic equation in x. The values of x  x = – 6 or x = 1
so obtained form the solution set of the given Hence, the roots of the given equation are
equation. – 6 and 1.

1. The equation whose roots are 3  2 2 and 3. One root of px2 + qx + r = 0 is r; then the
second root is :
3  2 2 is :
(A) p (B) q
(A) x2 – 6x + 1 = 0 (B) x2 + 6x + 1 = 0
1 1
(C) x2 – 6x –1 = 0 (D) None (C) (D)
q p
2. If 5 is a root of x2 – (p–1)x + 10 = 0; then
the value of ‘p’ is : 4. If the roots of a quadratic equation are
(A) 4 (B) 6 p q
,  , then the equation is :
(C) 8 (D) –8 q p

NANCE 68
 Quadratic Equations

(A) qx2 – (q2 + p2)x – pq = 0 12. If  are the roots of ax2 + bx + c = 0
(B) pqx2 – (p2 – q2)x – pq = 0 then      
(C) qx2 – (p2 + 1)x + q = 0 ac  bc bc  ac
(D) px2 – (p2 – q2)x – pq = 0 (A) 2 (B)
a a2
ac  bc bc  ac
5. Form a quadratic equations, whose roots (C) 2 (D)
b b2
are 2 + 2 and 2 – 2 .
(A) x – 4x + 2 = 0 (B) x2 – 2x + 2 = 0 13.
2 If  are the roots of x2 + x + 1 = 0 then
(C) x2 + 2x – 4 = 0 (D) x2 – 2x + 4 = 0  
  
 
6. If  are the roots of the equations ax2 +
(A) –1 (B) 1
bx + c = 0, find the value of  
(C) 2 (D) None
b 2  4ac 4ac  b 2
A (B) 14. If  are the roots of ax2 – 2bx + c = 0
4a 2a
2
b  2ac 2
b  4ac then       
(C) (D)
a2 a2 c 2 ( 2b  c) bc 2
(A) (B) 3
7. If one root of x2 –5x + k = 0 is 2, then find a3 a
the value of k and the other root. c3 c 2 (b  2c)
(C) 3 (D)
(A) k = 6 other root is 3 a a3
(B) k = 6 other root is – 3
15. If  ,  are real and  2,-  2 are the roots
(C) k = 3 other root is 6
(D) k = – 6 other root is – 3 of a2x2 + x + 1–a2 = 0 (a > 1) then
 2 = _______
8. If a, b are the two roots of a quadratic
equation such that a + b = 24 and (A) a2 (B) 1
a – b = 8, then the quadratic equation having (C) 1 – a2 (D) 1 + a2
a and b as its roots is :
(A) x2 +2x + 8 = 0 16. If  ,  are the roots of x2 – 2x + 4 = 0
(B) x2 –4x + 8 = 0 then  5 +  5 = _______
(C) x2 –24x + 128 = 0 (A) 8 (B) 16 (C) 32 (D) 64
(D) 2x2 +8x + 9 = 0
17. If the roots of the quadratic equation
9. If a and b are the roots of the equation
x2 + px + q = 0 are tan 30o and tan 15o,
x2 – 6x + 6 = 0, then the value of a2 + b2
is - respectively then the value of 2 + q – p
(A) 36 (B) 24 (C) 12 (D) 6 is :
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3
10. If a, b are the roots of x2 + x + 1 = 0 then
a2 + b2 = _____ 18. If one of the roots of
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) – 1 (D) 4 x2 + (1 + k) x + 2k = 0 is twice the other,
11. If  are the roots of x2 – x + 2 = 0 then k2 1
then = ________.
     k
(A) 5 (B) 3 (C) – 2 (D) 2 (A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) 7

NANCE 69
 Quadratic Equations

19. If 8 and 2 are the roots of x2 + ax +  = 0 20. If k > 0 and the product of the roots of the
and 3, 3 are the roots of x2 + x + b = 0 equation x2 – 3kx + 2e2log k – 1= 0 is 7
t hen t he root s of the equation
then the sum of the roots is :
x2 + ax + b = 0 are :
(A) 1, –1 (B) –9, 2 (A) 2 (B) 4
(C) –8, –2 (D) 9, 1 (C) 6 (D) 8

1. If the equation ax2 + 2x + a = 0 has two 6. If the equation x2 - bx + 1 = 0 does not

distinct roots, if possess real roots, then
(A) a =  1 (B) a = 0 (A) – 3 < b < 3
(C) a = 0, 1 (D) a = – 1, 0 (B) –2 < b < 2
(C) b > 2
2. The positive value of k for which the equation
(D) b < – 2
x2 + kx +64 = 0 and x2 - 8x + k = 0 will
both have real roots, is 7. If a and b can take values 1, 2, 3, 4. Then
(A) 4 (B) 8 the number of the equations of the form
(C) 12 (D) 16 ax2 + bx +1 = 0 having real roots is
(A) 10 (B) 7
3. The discriminant of ax2-2 2 x  c  0 with (C) 6 (D) 12
a, c and real constants is zero. The roots 8. The number of quadratic equation having
must be real roots and which do not change by
(A) equal and integral squaring their roots is
(B) rational and equal (A) 4 (B) 3
(C) real and equal (C) 2 (D) 1
(D) imaginary 9. If a, b, c are real, then the roots of the
4. 2 2 2
If the equation (a + b ) x - 2(ac + bd) x equation (a –x)(b –x) = c2 are definitely.
+ c2 + d2 = 0 are equal, then (A) Equal
(A) ab = cd (B) ad = bc (B) Imaginary
(C) Real
(C) ad = bc (D) ab = cd
(D) Irrational
5. If the roots of the equation 10. A quadratic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c
2 2 2 2 2
(a + b ) x – 2b(a + c) x + (b + c ) = 0 for all x  R can be factorised into rational
are equal, then factors over R if and only if
(A) 2b = a + c (A) b2 – 4ac > 0
(B) b2 = ac (B) b2 – 4ac = 0
2ac (C) b2 – 4ac < 0
(C) b =
a c (D) b2 – 4ac > 0 and is a perfect square,
(D) b = ac or b2 – 4ac = 0

NANCE 70
 Quadratic Equations

11. If the roots of x2 + mx + n = 0 are 16. If one root of the equation

distinct and real, then the roots 1
2x2 – 22 (1 + n) x + (m2 + 2n2 + 2) = 0, ak2 + 34x + 5x2 = 0 is then the other
5
are - root (x2) is
(A) Equal (B) Imaginary (A) Not possible to find it
(C) Real and distinct (D) Irrational (B) –7
1  34 1 
12. If be a root of the equation (C)    
  a 5
4x2 – 2x – 1 = 0, then 3
(D) 6
(A)    = 0 5
(B)    – 1= 0 17. The roots of the equation
(C)    – 1= 0 (x–a)(x–b)+(x–b)(x–c)+(x–c)(x–a) = 0
(D)  –  – 4= 0 are real and EQUAL only if
13. If a, b and c are positive, then both the (A) a  b  c (B) a > b > c
(C) a = b = c (D) a < b < c
roots of the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, are
(A) Real and positive 18. The equation x + x  2 = 4 has
(B) Real and negative (A) two real roots
(C) With negative real parts (B) one real and one imaginary root
(D) Equal (C) two imaginary roots
14. If a, b, c  R, a  0, and the quadratic (D) one real root
equation, ax2 + bx + c = 0 has no real roots, x(x  1)  (m  1) x
then (a+b+c) is 19. In the equation  the
(x  1)(m  1) m
(A) Positive (B) Negative roots are equal when
(C) Imaginary (D) Zero 1 1
(A) m = (B) m = –
2 2
15. If the roots of the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 (C) m = 0 (D) m = 1
are real and distinct then one of the roots
exceeds - 20. The values of ‘k’ for which the equation
b b 2x2-kx+x+8 = 0 will have real and equal
(A) (B) 
a 2a roots are
b 2  4ac (A) 9 and – 7 (B) only 9
(C) b  4ac
2 (D) (C) only – 7 (D) – 9 and 7
2a

Direction (Q.1-6) : (A) a < 0 (B) b > 0

Comment upon the values of a, b, c, D for (C) D > 0 (D) a > 0
standard Q.E. as y = ax2 + bx + c and find
2. Figure
the correct statement
1. Figure

(A) a < 0 (B) D > 0

(C) b > 0 (D) c > 0

NANCE 71
 Quadratic Equations

3. Figure Direction (Q.7-9) :

Find the inter-relationship in variables for the
standard Q.E as y = ax 2 + bx + x

(A) a < 0 (B) b < 0 7. Figure

(C) c < 0 (D) D < 0
4. Figure (0, 0)

(A) a = 0 (B) b = 0
(C) c = 0 (D) D > 0
(A) a < 0 (B) D < 0 8. Figure
(C) b > 0 (D) c < 0
5. Figure
(–1, 0) (2, 0)
(A) a + b + c = 0 (B) a – b + c = 0
(A) a > 0 (B) b > 0 (C) 2a + b + c = 0 (D) 4a – 2b + c = 0
(C) c > 0 (D) D < 0
9. Figure
6. Figure
(–3, 0)
(–1,0)
(A) a > 0 (B) D < 0 (A) 9a – 3b + c = 0 (B) 9a + 3b + c = 0
(C) b > 0 (D) c < 0 (C) a + b + c = 0 (D) None

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A C D B A C A C B C
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . D A A A B C D D D C

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A D C D B B A C C D
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B D C A B B C D B A

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ans . D B C C D C C B A

NANCE 72
 Binomial Theorem

21. If the coefficient of 2nd, 3rd, 4th terms of 26. The numerically greatest term in the
(1 + x)n are in A.P. then n = _______. expansion of (3 + 2x)49 when x = 1/5 is -
(A) 2 (B) 5 (A) 4th term
(C) 7 (D) 9 (B) 5th term
22. If the coefficient of 5th, 6th, 7th terms of (C) 6th term
(1 + x)n are in A.P. then n = _______. (D) 7th term
(A) 10 (B) 12
27. The integral part of ( 2  1) 6 is -
(C) 14 (D) 15
(A) 197 (B) 196
23. Larger of 9950 + 10050 and 10150 -
(C) 175 (D) 176
(A) 9950 + 10050
(B) 10150 28. The number of non-zero terms in the
(C) cannot be determined expansion of (1  3 2 x ) 9  (1  3 2 x ) 9 is -
(D) None
(A) 9 (B) 0
24. For natural number m, n if (1 – y)m (1 + y)n (C) 5 (D) 10
= 1 + a1y + a2y2 + ........ and a1 = a2 = 10,
29. The sum of the coefficients of (5x – 4y)n
then (m, n) is -
where n is a positive integer, is -
(A) (45, 35) (B) (35, 45)
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) (20, 45) (D) (35, 20)
(C) – 1 (D) none
25. The coefficient of the middle term in the
binomial expansion in powers of x of 30. The coefficient of x4 in the expansion of
(1 + x)4 and of (1 + x)6 is the same if (1  3x )2
is -
 = _________. (1  2x )
(A) –5/3 (B) 3/5 (A) 1 (B) 2
(C) –3/10 (D) 10/3 (C) 3 (D) 4

Practice Problem

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A C C D C B D D B B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B D A C A D D B B C
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. C C B B C C A C B D

ANCE 81
 Binomial Theorem
n
1 14. If Tr denotes the rth term in the expansion
6. The coefficient of x–n in (1 + x)n 1   is - 23
 x  1
of  x   then -
(A) 0 (B) 1  y
n
(C) 2 (D) 2nCn
(A) T12 = T13 (B) x2T13 = T12
n
7. The coefficient of x in expansion of (1 + x) (C) T12 = xy T13 (D) T12 + T13 = 25
(1 – x)n is -
(A) (n – 1) 15. The number of integral terms in the expansion
(B) (–1)n – 1 n of ( 3  8 5 ) 256 is -
(C) (–1)n – 1 (n – 1)2 (A) 33 (B) 34
(D) (–1)n (1 – n) (C) 35 (D) 32
6
 1 In the binomial expansion of (a – b)n, n  5,
8. The term independent of x in  x   is - 16.
 x the sum of 5th and 6th terms is zero,
(A) 1 (B) 10 then a/b equals -
(C) 15 (D) 20 5 6
(A) (B)
 x
10 n4 n 5
3 
9. The term independent of x in   2  n 5 n4
 3 2x  (C) (D)
6 5
is - 11
 1 
(A) 2 (B) 3 17. If the coefficient of x in ax 2    
7

  bx  
(C) 4 (D) 7
equals the coefficient of x –7 in
10. The term independent of x in the expansion 11
6  2  1 
 2 1
of  x   is - ax   bx  .
x   

(A) a – b = 1 (B) a + b = 1
(A) – 12 (B) 15
(C) a/b = 1 (D) ab = 1
(C) 24 (D) –15
14 18. If the coefficient of rth term and (r + 1)th
 b term in the expansion of (1 + x)20 are in
11. The term independent of x in  ax   is -
 x the ratio 1 : 2, then r =
14! 7 7 (A) 6 (B) 7
(A) 14! a 7 b 7 (B) a b (C) 8 (D) 9
(7!)2
14! 7 7 14! 7 7 x
n
(C) a b (D) a b 7  8
(7!)3 19. If the coefficient of x and x in  2  
7!  3
10
 x 2  are equal then n = _________.
12. The term independent of x in   2  is (A) 45 (B) 55
 2 x 
(C) 35 (D) 27
(A) 9/64 (B) 8/45
(C) 64/45 (D) 45/64 20. If the coefficient of (2r + 4)th term is
9
equal to the coefficient of (r – 2)th term
 1  in the expansion of (1 + x) 18 then
13. The term independent of x in  x 2   is -
 3x  r = ___________.
(A) 28/243 (B) 27/245 (A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 28/240 (D) 25/271 (C) 6 (D) 8

ANCE 80
 Binomial Theorem

1. Find the 5th term from the end in the 7. If the coefficient of (2r + 1)th term and
10
 1  (r + 2)th terms in the expansion of (1 + x)
expansion of  3x  2  .
 x  are equal. Find r.
2. Find the 8th term in the expansion of 6
 2x 3 
( x 3 / 2 y1/ 2  x1/ 2 y3 / 2 )10 . 8. Expand   .
 3 2x 
3. Find the 4th term from the beginning and
4th term from the end in the expansion of 9. Find the value of ( 2  x ) 4  ( 2  x ) 4 .
9
 2 9
x   . th  4x 5 
 x 10. Find the 7 term of   .
 5 2x 
4. Find the coefficient of :
20 12
1
(i)
 1
x in the expansion of  2 x 2   .
10 11. Find the 10th term of  2 x 2   .
 x  x
40
7  1  9
(ii) x in the expansion of  x  2  .  x2 
 x  12. Find the two middle terms of  2 x   .
10  4 
a
(iii) x–15 in the expansion of  3x 2  2  .
 3x  13. Show that the middle term in the expansion
12 1.3.5 .......( 2n  1) n n
 1 of (1 + x)2n is = 2 x .
5. Show that the expansion of  x 2   does n!
 x
not contain any term involving x–1. 14. The third, fourth and fifth terms in the
6. Find the term independent of x in the expansion of (x + a)n in descending powers
expansion of the following expressions : of x are 84, 280 and 560 respectively, find
25 x, a and n.
 2 3
(i)  2x  3 
 x  15. In the expansion of (1 + x)20, the coefficient
9
3 3 2 1  of the rth term to that of the (r + 1)th term
(ii) (1  x  2x )  x   .
2 3x  is in the ratio 1 : 2. Find the value of r.

1. The coefficient of the 8th term in the 45 243 405 810

(A) (B) (C) (D)
expansion of (1 + x)10 is - 64 128 256 512
(A) 120 (B) 7 (C) 10C8 (D) 210 6
3
 3 
5 4. The coefficient of x in  x   is -
 c  x3 
2. The coefficient of x in  x 2   is -
 x (A) 0 (B) 120 (C) 420 (D) 1
(A) 20 c (B) 10 c (C) 10 c3 (D) 20 c3
10 5. The coefficient of x5 in (1 + x2)5 (1 + x)4
x 3
3. The coefficient of x4 in   2  is - is -
2 x  (A) 120 (B) 30 (C) 60 (D) 45

ANCE 79
 Binomial Theorem

n
Cr n  r 1  
since  a2 n
Cr  nC 
n r
C r 1 r 2  2  2   
 n  1  n C 
n 1
a 2  a3 C r 1
r
 n – 8r + 1 = 0 ...(i)  r 1 
n
Cr 7  r 1 
and n
  2  ...(ii)
Cr 1 42  n 1
r 1 1 From (i) and (ii), we get
 
nr 6 a1 a3 a2
n   2
Cr 1 n  r a1  a 2 a 3  a 4 a 2  a3
since n 
Cr r 1
 n – 7r – 6 = 0 ...(ii) Ex.16 IF a and b are distinct integers, prove that
Solving (i) and (ii), we get an – bn is divisible by (a – b), whenever n
r = 7 and n = 55.  N.
Sol.16 We have, an = {(a – b) + b}n
Ex.15 If a1, a2, a3, a4 be the coefficients of
= nC0 (a – b)n + nC1 (a – b)n – 1 b1 +
four consecutive terms in the expansion of
n
(1 + x) n, then prove that C2 (a – b)n – 2 b2 + ..... + nCn – 1 (a – b) bn – 1
a1 a3 2a 2 + nCn bn
  .
a1  a 2 a 3  a 4 a 2  a 3  an – bn = (a – b)n + nC1 (a – b)n – 1 b1
Sol.15 Let a1, a2, a3, a4 be the coefficients of + nC2 (a – b)n – 2 b2 + ..... +
n
4 consecutive term viz., the rth, the (r + 1)th, Cn – 1 (a – b) bn – 1
the (r + 2)th and the (r + 3)th terms,  an – bn = (a – b) [(a – b)n – 1 +
Then, a1 = nCr – 1, a2 = nCr, a3 = nCr + 1 and n
C1 (a – b)n – 2 b + nC2 (a – b)n – 3 b2 + .....
a4 = nCr + 2 + nCn – 1 bn – 1]
Now, a1 + a2 = nCr – 1 + nCr = n + 1Cr , Clearly, RHS is divisible by (a – b).
a2 + a3 = nCr + nCr + 1 = n + 1Cr + 1
Hence, an – bn is divisible by (a – b).
and a3 + a4 = nCr + 1 + nCr + 2 = n + 1Cr + 2
a1 a3
n
C n
C r 1 Ex.17 Find the coefficient of x6 in (1 + x + x2)– 3.
   n 1 r 1  n 1 Sol.17 We have,
a1  a 2 a 3  a 4 Cr Cr  2
3
n
C r 1 n
Cr  1 2 3 (1  x ) (1  x  x 2 ) 
(1  x  x )   
=  (1  x )
 n 1 n  n 1  n  
  C r 1   C r 1 3 3
 r  r2 1  x3   1 x 
     3 
n n 1  1 x  1 x 
since n C r   C r 1
r
= (1 – x)3 (1 – x3)– 3
r r 1
  = (1 – 3x + 3x2 – x3) (1 + 3x3 + 6x6 + .....)
n 1 n 1
 Coefficient of x6 = 1 × 6 – 1 × 3
 r 1 
 2  ...(i) and =6–3=3
 n 1

ANCE 78
 Binomial Theorem
5
Ex.12 The 3rd, 4th and 5th terms in the expansion a 
n
 21  (a 2 )  84
of (x + a) are respectively 84, 280 and 2
560, find the values of x, a and n. since x = a/2
Sol.12 It is given that T3 = 84, T4 = 280 and  a 7  27  a  2
T5 = 560.
 x=1
Now, T3 = 84
since x = a/2
 T3 = nC2xn – 2a2 = 84 ...(i) Hence, x = 1, a = 2 and n = 7.
T4 = 280
 T4 = nC3xn – 3a3 = 280 ...(ii) Ex.13 Find the term independent of x in the
10
and T5 = 560  1
expansion of  2 x   .
 T5 = nC4xn – 4a4 = 560 ...(iii)  x
th
In order to eliminate x and a, we multiply (i) Sol.13 Let (r + 1) term be independent of x in the
and (iii) and then divide the product by the given expression.
square of (ii) 1
r
10 10 – r 
T3  T5 84  560 3
Now, Tr + 1 = Cr (2x)  
    x
2 2
(T4 ) ( 280) 5
T3 T5 3 = (–1)r 10Cr 210 – r x10 – 2r ...(i)
   For this term to be independent of x, we
T4 T4 5
must have
3 x n 3 a 3
     10 – 2r = 0  r = 5
n2 a 4 x 5
So, (5 + 1)th i.e., 6th term is independent of
Tr 1 n  r  1 a
[since   ] x. Putting r = 5 in (i), we get
Tr r x
Tr = (– 1)5 10C5  210 – 5 = – 10C5 × 25
 5n – 15 = 4n – 8
 n=7 10  9  8  7  6
=  32   8064
5  4  3  2 1
Tr 1 n  r  1 a
Now,   Hence, required term = – 8064.
Tr r x
T4 n  2 a Ex.14 The coefficients of three consecutive terms
  
T3 3 x in the expansion of (1 + x)n are in the ratio
1 : 7 : 42. Find n.
280  7  2  a
    Sol.14 Let the three consecutive terms be rth,
84  3  x
(r + 1) th and (r + 2) th terms. Their
since n = 7 coefficients in the expansion of (1 + x)n are
n
10 5  a  Cr – 1, nCr and nCr + 1 respectively. It is given
   
3 3 x  that,
a n
Cr 1 : n Cr : n Cr 1 = 1 : 7 : 42.
 x
2
n
 T3 = 84 C r1 1
n n–2 2
Now, n

 C2x a = 84 Cr 7
7 5 2
 C2x a = 84 r 1
 
since n = 7 n  r 1 7

ANCE 77
 Binomial Theorem
7 r
 x3   1 
Sol.8 The given expression   3x   . Here Now, Tr + 1 = Cr (x ) 15 4 15 – r
 3 
 6  x 
n = 7, which is an odd number. = (–1)r 15Cr x60 – 7r ...(i)
32
th For this term to contain x , we must have
 7 1   7 1 
So,   and   1 i.e., 4th and 60 – 7r = 32  r = 4.
 2   2 
5th terms are two middle terms. So, (4 + 1)th i.e., 5th term contains x32.
Now, T 4 = T 3 + 1 = 7 C 3 (3x) 7 – 3 Putting r = 4 in (i), we get
3 3 T5 = (–1)4 15C4 x(60 – 28) = 15C4 x32.
  x3  3 7
3
4x 
   (1) C3 (3x )    Coefficient x32 = 15C4 = 1365
 6   6 Suppose (s + 1)th term in the binomial
9
x 105x13 15
  35  81 x 4    1
216 8 expansion of  x 4  3  contains x– 17.
and T 5 = T 4 + 1 = 7 C 4 (3x) 7 – 4  x 
4 4
Now,
 x3   x3  2
    7 C4 (3x ) 3    15 4 15  s  1
 6  6  Ts 1  Cs (x )  3 
 x 
x12 35x15
 35  27 x 3  
1296 48  (1)2 15
Cs x 60  7 s ...(ii)
Hence, the middle terms are
If this term contains x–17, we must have
3 15
105x 35x 60 – 7s = – 17  s = 11
 and
8 48 So, (11 + 1)th i.e., 12th term contains x–17.
Ex.9 Find the middle terms in the expansion of Putting s = 11 in (ii), we get
20
2 2 3  T12 = (–1)11 15C11 x–17 = – 15C11 x–17
 x   .
3 2x  = – 15C4 x–17 [since nCr = nCn– r]
Sol.9 Hence n = 20, which is an even number.  Coefficient of x–17 = – 15C4 = – 1365.

 20  Ex.11 Find the coefficient of x5 in the expansion of

So,   1 th term i.e., 11 1th term in the
 2  the product (1 + 2x)6 (1 – x)7.
middle term. Sol.11 We have,
Hence, the middle term (1 + 2x)6 (1 – x)7 = [1 + 6C1 (2x) + 6C2
20 10 10 (2x)2 + 6C3 (2x)3 + 6C4 (2x)4 + 6C5 (2x)5 +
20  2 3  3 
 T11  T10 1  C10  x    6
C6 (2x)6 ] × [1 – 7C1x + 7C2x2 – 7C3x3 +
3   2x  7
20 10
C4x4 – 7C5x5 + ....]
= C10x .
= (1 + 12x + 60x2 +160x3 + 240x4 + 192x5
32 –17
Ex.10 Find the coefficients of x and x in the + .....) × (1 – 7x + 21x2 – 35x3 + 25x4 –
15 21 x5 + .....)
 4 1 
expansion of  x  3  .  Coefficient of x5 in the product
 x 
= 1 × (– 21) + 12 × 35 + 60 × (–35) +
Sol.10 Suppose (r + 1)th term involves x32 in the 160 × 21 + 240 × 7 + 192 × 1
15
 1  = – 21 + 420 – 2100 + 3360 – 1680 +
expansion of  x 4  3  .
 x  192 = 171

ANCE 76
 Binomial Theorem

= 1 – 4x + 4x2 + 6x2 – 12x3 + 6x4 + 12x4  4OE = (x + a)2n – (x – a)2n

– 12x5 + 4x6 + x4 – 4x5 + 6x6 – 4x7 + x8 (iii) Squaring (i) and (ii) and then adding, we
= 1 – 4x + 10x2 – 16x3 + 19x4 – 16x5 + get
10x6 – 4x7 + x8 (x + a)2n + (x – a)2n = (O + E)2 + (O + E)2
Ex.4 Using binomial theorem, expand {(x + y)5 + = 2(O2 + E2).
(x – y)5} and hence find the value of Ex.6 Find the 9th term in the expansion of
( 2  1)5  ( 2  1) 5 .   x 3a 12 
  2 .
Sol.1 We have, (x + y) 5 + (x – y) 5 = a x 
 
2 [ 5 C 0 x 5  5 C 2 x 3 y 2  5 C 4 x1 y 4 ] Sol.6 We know that the (r + 1)th term in the
expansion of (x + a)n is given by
= 2 ( x 5  10x 3 y 2  5xy 4 )
Tr + 1 = nCr xn – r ar
Putting x  2 and y  1, we get 12
 x 3a 
5
( 2  1)  ( 2  1) 5 In the expansion of   2  , we get
a x 
 2[( 2 )5  10 ( 2 )3 (1) 2  5 2 (1) 4 ] T9 = T8 + 1
 2[ 4 2  20 2  5 2 ] 12 x
12  8 8 4
  3a  12  x    3a 
8

= C8    2   C8    2 
 58 2 a  x  a  x 
Ex.5 If O be the sum of odd terms and E that of a4
even terms in the expansion of (x + a)n,  12C 4  38  (12 C 4 x 12a 4 ) 38
x12
prove that
(i) O 2  E 2  (x 2  a 2 )n ; Ex.7 Find the 11th term from the end in the
25
(ii) 4OE  (x  a ) 2n  ( x  a )2 n  1 
expansion of  2 x  2  .
(iii) 2 (O 2  E 2 )  ( x  a )2 n  ( x  a ) 2n  x 
Sol.5 We have Sol.7 Clearly, the given expansion contains 26
terms.
(x + a)n = nC0xna0 + nC1xn – 1a1 + nC2xn – 2a2
+ nCn – 1xan – 1 + nCnan So, 11th term from the end = (26 – 11 +
(x + a)n = (nC0xna0 + nC2xn – 2a2 + ....) + 1)th term from beginning i.e., 16th term from
(nC1xn – 1a1 + nC3xn – 3a3 + ......) the beginning.
 (x + a)n = O + E ...(i)  Required term = T16 = T15 + 1 = 25C15
and (x – a) = C0 x – C1 x a + nC2 xn
n n n n n–1 1
 1 
15
25 – 15
–2 2
a – nC3 xn – 3 a3 + ....... + (2x)  2 
n  x 
Cn – 1x(–1)n – 1 an – 1 + nCn (–1)n an
 (x – a)n = (nC0 xn + nC2 xn – 2 a2 + .....) 25 (1)15
10 10
 C15  2  x
– (nC1 xn – 1 a1 + nC3 xn – 3 a3 + ....) x 30
 (x – a)n = O – E ...(ii)
210
(i) Multiplying (i) and (ii), we get   25C15 
x 20
(x + a)n (x – a)n = (O + E) (O – E)
 (x2 – a2)n – O2 – E2 Ex.8 Find the middle terms in the expansion of
2 2
(ii) We have, 4OE = (O + E) – (O – E) 7
 4OE = {(x + a)n}2 – {(x – a)n}2  x3 
 3x   .
[Using (i) and (ii)]  6

ANCE 75
 Binomial Theorem

(iii) (1  x ) 2  1  2x  3x 2  4 x 3  ....... Ex.1 Find the number of terms in the expansion

of the following :
(iv) (1  x ) 2  1  2x  3x 2  4 x 3  .......
(i) (1  5 2 x )9  (1  5 2 x ) 9
(v) (1  x ) 3  1  3x  6x 2  10 x 3  .......
(ii) ( 2x  3y  4z ) n
3 2 3
(vi) (1  x )  1  3x  6x  10 x  ....... Sol.1 (i) If n is odd, then the expansion of (x + a)n
 n 1
+ (x – a)n contains   terms. So, the
n  2 
 b 
(i) Co-efficient of x in  ax p  q  is given
s
expansion of (1  5 2 x ) 9  (1  5 2 x ) 9 has
 x 
by Tr + 1.  9 1
   5 terms.
np  s  2 
where r  . (ii) We have, (2x + 3y – 4z)n
pq
n
= {2x + (3y – 4z)}n
 b  = nC0 (2x)n (3y – 4z)0 + nC1 (2x)n – 1
(ii) The term independent of x in  ax p  q 
 x  (3y – 4z)1 + nC2 (2x)n – 2 (3y – 4z)2 + .... +
n
np Cn – 1 (2x)1 (3y – 4z)n – 1 + nCn (3y – 4z)n
is given by Tr + 1 where r  .
pq Clearly, the first term in the above expansion
gives one term, second term gives two terms,
(iii) If the coefficient of rth, (r + 1)th, (r + 2)th
third term gives three terms and so on.
terms of (1 + x)n are in A.P. then
So, Total number of terms
n2 – (4r + 1)n + 4r2 = 2.
= 1 + 2 + 3 + ....... + n + (n + 1)
(iv) If (a  b ) n  I  F, where I, n are positive
( n  1) ( n  2)
integers, 0 < F < 1, a2 – b = 1, then  .
2
(a) I is an odd positive integer
Ex.2 Expand (2x – 3y)4 by binomial theorem.
(b) (I + F) (I – F) = 1
Sol.2 Using binomial theorem, we have
(v) Sum of the co-efficient of
(2x – 3y)4 = [2x + (– 3y)]4
n
(a1x1  a 2 x 2  ........  a m .x m ) is = 4C0 (2x)4 (–3y)0 + 4C1 (2x)3 (–3y) +
4
(a1  a 2  ......  a m ) n . C2 (2x)2 (–3y)2 + 4C3 (2x)1 (–3y)3 +
4
(vi) If f(x) = (a0 + a1.x + a2.x2 + ....... + am.xm)n C4 (–3y)4
then = 16x4 + 4(8x3) (–3y) + 6 (4x2) (9y2) +
(a) sum of the co-efficients = f(1) 4 (2x) (– 27y3) + 81y4
(b) sum of the co-efficients of even powers of = 16x4 – 96x3y + 216x2y2 – 216xy3 –
216xy3 + 81y4
f (1)  f ( 1)
x is Ex.3 By using binomial theorem, expand (1 – x +
2
(c) sum of the co-efficients of odd powers of x x2)4.
f (1)  f ( 1) Sol.3 Let y = – x + x2. Then,
is (1 – x + x2)4 = (1 + y)4
2
(vii) If | x | < 1 and n is a positive integer, then = 4C0 + 4C1y + 4C2y2 + 4C3y3 + 4C4y4 = 1
(a) (1  x) – n  1 + 4y + 6y2 + 4y3 + y4
= 1 + 4 (– x + x2) + 6 (– x + x2)2 +
1  n C1  x  ( n 1)C2  x 2  ( n 2)C3  x 3  ...... 4 (– x + x2)3 + (– x + x2)4
–n
(b) (1  x)  = 1 – 4x (1– x) + 6x2 (1 – x)2 – 4x3 (1– x)3 +
1  n C1  x  ( n 1)C 2  x 2  ( n 2 )C3  x 3  ...... x4 (1 – x3) + x4 (1 – 4x + 6x2 – 4x3 + x4)

ANCE 74
 Binomial Theorem

(n  1) | x |
(ii) If  p  F, where p is a positive
An expression consisting of two terms is | x | 1
called a binomial expression. integer and 0 < F < 1 then (p + 1)th term
Ex : 3x + y, (x + y)4, ...... etc. is the numerically greatest term in the
expansion of (1 + x)n.
 Binomial Theorem for Positive Integral
Index : Note : In the expansion of (1 + x)n, the numerically
If n is a positive integer, then greatest coefficient is n C n , when n is even
n n n n n–1 n
(x + a) = C0 × x + C1 × x × a + C2 2
n–2 2 n n–r
×x × a + ... + Cr × x × ar + ...+ and n C n 1 or n C n 1 , when n is odd.
n
Cn × an 2 2

Note :
(i) The expansion of (x + a)n contains (n + 1) (i) C0  C1  C 2  .......... .  C n  2n
terms.
(ii) In the expansion of (x + a)n, sum of (ii) C0  C 2  C 4  .......... .  C1  C3  C5 
the powers of x and a in each term is equal ........  2 n 1
to n. (iii) a  C 0  (a  d )  C1  (a  2d)  C 2  ...... 
(iii) In the expansion of (x + a)n, the (r + 1)th
term is called general term and it is given as ( a  nd)  Cn  ( 2a  nd )  2n 1
Tr 1  n Cr  x n  r  a r (iv) a  C 20  (a  d)  C12  (a  2d )  C 22  ...... 
(iv) In the expansion of (x + a)n, the integers
1
n
C 0 , n C1 , n C 2 ,......... ..., n C n are called the (a  nd )  C 2n  (2a  nd )  2n C n
2
binomial co-efficients.
(v) a  C0  (a  d)  C1  (a  2d)  C 2  ......  0
n n!
Cr  C1 C C
r !  (n  r )! (vi) C0   x  2  x 2  3  x 3  ...... 
n n 2 3 4
(v) If Cp  Cq then either p = q or p + q = n.
Cn (1  x )n 1  1
 xn 
n 1 (n  1)  x
Rule to find the middle terms in (x + a)n. (vii) C0  Cr  C1  Cr 1  C2  Cr  2  ....... Cn  r  Cn
(i) If n is even, there is one middle term given  2n Cn  r
by Tn .
1
2

(ii) If n is odd, there are two middle terms given If n is a rational number and | x | < 1 then
by Tn  1 and Tn  3 . n ( n  1) 2
2 2
(1 + x)n = 1 + nx + x 
2!
n ( n  1) ( n  2) 3
x  ..........
3!
(n  1) | x |
(i) If  p, a positive integer then pth  Some Useful Expansions :
| x | 1
and (p + 1)th terms are the numerically (i) (1  x ) 1  1  x  x 2  x 3  ..........
greatest terms in the expansion of (1 + x)n. (ii) (1  x ) 1  1  x  x 2  x 3  .......

ANCE 73
 Mensuration

In a right angled triangle

The area of any figure is the amount of (Hypotenuse)2 = sum of squares of sides
surface enclosed within its bounding lines. i.e. h2 = a2 + b2
Area is always expressed in square units.
Units of Measuring Area : 1
Area (A) = (product of the sides
100 sq millimetres = 1 sq. centimetre 2
containing the right angle)
100 sq. centimetres = 1 sq. decimetre
100 sq. decimetres = 1sq. metre
100 sq. metres = 1 sq. decametre or arc h
a
10000 sq. metres = 1 hectare
1000000 sq.m metres = 100 hectares 90º
= 1 sq. kilometre Base
1
i.e. A= ab
The perimeter of a geometrical figure is 2
the total length of the sides enclosing the
figure.
A triangle whose all the sides are equal is
called equilateral triangle
A triangle is a close figure bounded by Area (A) of an equilateral triangle
3 sides
Area of a Triangle (A)
1 1 a a
(a) A= (base × height) = ah
2 2
(B) A = s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  c) a/2 a/2
a
1
where s = (a + b + c) or semi- 3 3 2
2 = (side)2 = a
perimeter of the triangle 4 4
Perimeter (P) of an equilateral triangle
A
= 3 × (side) = 3a
Altitude (h) of an equilateral triangle
c h b 3 3
= × (side) = a
2 2
In a equilateral triangle
B a Base C
A = B = C = 60º
This formula is known as Heron’s Formula Area (A) of an equilateral triangle
Perimeter (P) = a + b + c = 2s (altitude) 2 h2
= =
3 3
A triangle having one of its angles is 90°
is called right angled triangle and sides
opposite to the right angle is called the A triangle whose two sides are equal is
hypotenuse. called Isosceles triangle

ANCE 82
 Mensuration

Area (A) of an isosceles triangle Example - 2

b Find the area of triangle whose base is
= 4a 2  b 2 4.6m and height is 67 cm.
4
Solution :
1
a a Area of triangle = (base × height)
2
1
= (4.6 × 100 × 67)
b 2
Perimeter (P) of an isosceles triangle = 15410 sq cm.
= (2a + b) Example - 3
Height (h) of an isosceles triangle Length of the side of an equilateral triangle
1 4
= 4a 2  b 2 is cm. Find its height.
2 3
Solution :
An Isosceles Right angled triangle has two Height of the equilateral triangle
sides equal with equal sides making 90° 3
to each other. = × (side)
2
Hypotenuse (h) = 2 a 3 4
= × = 2 cm.
1 2 2 3
Area (A) = a Example - 4
2
If the base of an isosceles triangle is 10
Perimeter (P) = 2a  2a cm and the length of equal sides is 13
= 2a ( 2  1) cm, find its area.
= h ( 2  1) Solution :
If the perimeter of an isosceles triangle is Area of the isosceles triangle
P and the base is b, then the length of the b
= 2 2
(P  b) 4 4a – b
equal sides is . if the perimeter of
2 10
an isosceles triangle is P and the length of = 4 (13) 2 – (10) 2
4
equal sides is a, then base is (P – 2a)
10 10
Example - 1 = 676 – 100 = ×24
4 4
What is area of triangle having sides 3m,
= 60 sq cm.
4m and 5m?
Solution :
Let a = 3m, b = 4m, c = 5m A polygon is a plane figure which is
abc 345 enclosed and bounded by line segments.
Then, s = = = 6 m
2 2
 Area = s(s – a ) (s – b) (s – c)
If all the sides of the polygon are equal it
= 6(6 – 3) (6 – 4) (6 – 5) is called regular polygon.
= 6  3  2 1 = 36 All the interior angles of a regular polygon
= 6 sq m are equal.

ANCE 83
 Mensuration
For a regular polygon : (a) circumference or perimeter of circle
Sum of exterior angles = 2
Sum of interior angles = (n – 2) 180°
r
n ( n  3) O
No. of diagonals in a polygon =
2
Perimeter (P) = n × a,
where n = number of sides = 2  r =  d,
and, a = length of each side where r is radius and d is diameter of
n2 circle.
Each interior angle = 180°
n (B) Area of circle
360 =  r2, r is radius
Each exterior angle =
n
1 1 d 2
= , d is diameter
Area = × P× r = × n × a × r,, 4
2 2
where r is radius of the circle drawn c2
= , c is circumference
inside the polygon touching its sides 4
1
= × circumference × radius
2
Area
(C) Radius of circle =

Perimeter or circumfere nce
=
2
2 (D) Ratio of the areas of the two circles is :
1 2 a
= × n × a × R   Area of circle circumscri bing the square 2
2 2 = =
Area of circle inscribed in the square 1
where R is radius of the circle drawn
outside the polygon touching its sides.
na 2 
= cot  
4 n R
Area of a regular hexagon
3 3
= (side)2
2
Area of a regular octagon (e) Ratio of the area of the two squares is
= 2( 2  1) (side)2 Area of square circumscri bing the circle 2
= =
Area of square inscribed in the circle 1

A circle is the path travelled by a point

which moves in such a way that its 2a
distance from a fixed point remains
constant. The fixed point is called centre
and fixed distance is called radius.

ANCE 84
 Mensuration

Example - 6
A Sector is a figure enclosed by 2 radii Find the area of sector of a circle whose
radius is 14 cm and the angle at the
and arc lying between them.
centre is 60°.
For sector AOB,
Solution :
2  r (radius)2 
Arc AB = Area of sector =
360 360
where r = radius and AOB =  22  14  14  60
=
7  360
O 22  2  14
=
 6
 A B 2
= 102 sq cm
C 3
Area of sector ACBO
1
= × (arc AB) × radius A quadrilateral whose vertices lie on the
2
circumference of the circle is called Cyclic
 (radius)2  Quadrilateral.
=
360 For a cyclic quadrilateral.
Area = s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  c) (s  d) ,
A segment of a circle is a figure enclosed where
by a chord and an arc which it cuts off.
Area of segment ACB D c C
= area of sector ACBO – area of OAB
and d b
area of segment ADB
A a B
= area of circle – area of segment ACB
D a bcd
s =
2
O  A + B + C + D = 2 
 A + C = B + D = 
A B
C
Example - 5
A closed figure bounded by four sides is
Find the length of a rope by which a called Quadrilateral.
buffalo must be tethered in order that she It has four angles and some of these
may be able to graze an area of 9856 sq angles is 360°.
m. Area (A) of a quadrilateral
Solution : 1
The required length of rope = × one diagonal × (sum of
2
Area 9856  7 perpendiculars to it from opposite
= r = = vertices)
 22
1
= 3136 = 56 m. = d (p1 + p2)
2

ANCE 85
 Mensuration

Note: If the lengths of four sides and one of

its diagonals are known, then
Rectangle is a quadrilateral with opposite
A = Area of ADC + Area of ABC
sides equal and all the four angles equal
D C to 90°. The diagonals of a rectangle bisect
p1 each other and are equal.
p2
 Area (A) of rectangle = length ×breadth
A B = l × b
OR
D C
A quadrilateral in which opposite sides are d
equal and parallel is called parallelogram.
Area (A) of a parallelogram A B
D C
Area of rectangle = (  d   )
2 2

height (h) If one side (l) and diagonal (D) are given
OR
A Base (b) B
 p2 d 2 
= base × altitude corresponding to Area of rectangle =  8  2  ,
 
the base
If perimeter (P) and diagonal (D) are
= b × h given.
Area (A) of a parallelogram  Perimeter (P) of rectangle
= 2 s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  d ) = 2(length + breadth)
= 2 (l + b)
where a and b are adjacent sides, d is the
OR
length of the diagonal connecting the ends
Perimeter of rectangle
abd
of the two sides and s = = 2 (  d   ) ,
2 2
2
b If one side (l) and diagonal (D) are given
 Diagonal of a rectangle
a
d = (length ) 2  ( breadth ) 2
= 2  b 2
In a parallelogram, the sum of the squares
 If area (A) and perimeter (P) of a
of the diagonals = 2 (the sum of the
rectangle are given, then length of the
squares of the two adjacent sides), rectangle
i.e.  P2
 P 
d12  d 22 = 2(a 2 + b2) =  16  A 
 4 
Perimeter (P) of a parallelogram
and, breadth of the rectangle
= 2 (a + b),
P 2 
where a and b are adjacent sides of the   P A
= 4 16 
parallelogram.  

ANCE 86
 Mensuration
 Square
 2  d1  2 
A square is a quadrilateral with all sides since d = 4a    
2
2
equal and all the four angles equal to 90°.   2  
The diagonals of a square are equal and 2 2
bisect each other at 90°.  Perimeter   d1 
= d1×     ,
(A) Area (A) of a square  4  2
a
D C  Perimeter  2  d1 2 
since d = 4 
2    
2
 4   2  
a d a (B) Perimeter (P) of a rhombus
= 4a i.e. 4 × side = 2 d12  d 22 ,
A a B
where d1 and d2 are two diagonals
2 2
= a i.e. (side) 1
d2 (diagonal )2 (C) Side (a) of a rhombus = d12  d 22
= , i.e. 2
2 2
2
P (perimeter ) 2
= , i.e. A trapezium is a quadrilateral whose any
16 16 two opposite sides are parallel. Distance
(B) Perimeter (P) of a square
between parallel sides of a trapezium is
= 4a, i.e. 4 × side
its height.
= 16  area = 2 2 d ,
(A) Area (A) of a trapezium
i.e. 2 2 × diagonal 1
(C) Length (D) of the diagonal of a square = × (sum of parallel sides) ×
2
= 2 a , i.e. 2  side perpendicular distance between the parallel
P sides
= 2  area = 2 2 , 1
Perimeter i.e., × (a + b) × h
2
i.e.
2 2 ab
= s(s  ) (s  c) (s  d )

a
A rhombus is a quadrilateral whose all
sides are equal. The diagonals of a h
rhombus bisect each other at 90°.
(A) Area (A) of a rhombus b
= a × h, i.e. base × height where, l = b – a If b > a
= a – b if a > b
1 1
= d1 × d2, i.e. × product of its diagonals cd
2 2 and, s =
2
2
2 d  (B) Height (h) of the trapezium
= d1 × a  1 
2 2
a = s(s  ) (s  c) (s  d )
d2 
a h d1 a  2A
=  
a a b

ANCE 87
 Mensuration

Quadrilateral Meet Bisect Equal to Bisect

at right each other each other angle
angles at vertex
Square    
Rectangle ×   ×
Parallelogram ×  × ×
Rhombus   × 
Trapezium × × may or ×
may not be

(B) A rectangular garden l m long and b m

If the length and breadth of a room l and broad is surrounded by a path w m wide
b, respectively, and a carpet of width w constructed inside it along its boundary.
is used to cover the floor, then the The area of the path is given by
required length of the carpet = 2w (l + b – 2w) sq. m.
lb II
=
w w
 Number of square Tiles required for
Flooring III IV b

If the length and breadth of a room and

d and b respectively, then the least
I
number of square tiles required to cover l
the floor (C) A rectangular park is l m long and b m
b
= H.C.F. (, b) broad. Two paths w m wide each are
perpendicular to each other inside the
Also, the size of the largest tile so that the park. The area of the pat hs
tiles exactly fit = w (l + b – w) sq. m
= H.C.F. (l, b) Also, area of the park minus the paths
 Path around a Rectangular Space = (l – w) (b – w) sq m.
(A) A rectangular garden l m long and b m
II
broad is surrounded by a path w m wide. I
the area of the path is given by w b
= 2 w (l + b + 2w) sq. m

II w

Notes :
b 1. Clearly, from the figure, the area of the
paths does not change on shifting their
III IV
locations as long as they are perpendicular
to each other.
l 2. For a square park, take l = b in all the
I
results derived above.

ANCE 88
 Mensuration

 Square room surrounded by a Verandah  The area of the largest circle that can be
(a) A square room of side a is surrounded by a2
inscribed in a square of side a is .
a verandah of width w on the outside of 4
the square room. If the area of the  Area of a square inscribed in a circle of
verandah is A, then the asrea of the room radius r is 2r2 and the side of the square
is given by : is 2 r .
2
 A  4w 2   The area of largest triangle inscribed in a
  semi-circle of radius r is r2.
 4w 
 The number of revolutions made by a
circular wheel of radius r in travelling
distance d is given by
w  d 
=  2 r 
a  

a+2w
(B) A square room of side a is surrounded by
a verandah of width w on its inside. If the
area of the verandah is A, then the area
of the room is given by If l, b and h denote the length, breadth
2 and height of the cuboid and d denotes
 A  4w 2  the body diagonal (AF or BE or DG
 
 4w  or CH), then

h
b
w l
(i) Volume = l × b × h
(a+2w)
= A1  A 2  A 3 ,
Where, A 1 = area of base or top
 (a) A circular ground of radius r has A2 = area of one side face, and
a pathway of width w around it A3 = area of other side face
on its outside. The area of circular (ii) Total Surface Area = 2 (lb + bh + lh)
pathway is given by : = (l + b + h)2–d2
= w (2r + w) (iii) Diagonal of cuboid= l 2  b2  h2
(B) a circular ground of radius r has Note :
a pathway of width w around it
(i) For painting the surface area of a box or
on its inside. The area of the
to know how much tin sheet is required
circular pathway is given by
for making a box, we use formula (ii).
=  w (2r – w)
(ii) To find how much a box contains or how
 If the area of a square is a sq cm, then much space a box shall occupy, we use
the area of the circle formed by the same formula (i) to find the length of the longest
 4a  pole to be placed of in a room, we use
perimeter is   sq. cm.
  formula (iii)

ANCE 89
 Mensuration
(iii) The rise or fall of liquid level in a Example - 8
container The diagonal of a cube is 8 3 cm. Find
Total volume of objects submerged or taken out its total surface area and volume.
=
Cross-sectional area of container Solution :
We have,
Example - 7
Diagonal of cube = 3 (edge)
The area of side of a box is 120 sq cm.
Diagonal of cube
The area of the other side of the box is  Edge of cube =
27 sq. cm. If the area of the upper 3
8 3
surface of the box is 60 sq cm, then find = = 8 cm.
the volume of the box. 3
Total suface area = 6(edge)2 = 6(8)2
Solution :
= 384 sq cm.
Volume of the box =
Volume of cube = (edge)3 = (8)3 = 512 cm3.
area of base  area of one face  area of the other face
= 60  120  72
If r is the radius of
= 518400 = 720 cm3 base and h is the height
of the cylinder, then
If a be the edge of a cube, then (i) Volume of cylinder
= Area of the base × height
=  r2 × h =  r2 h cubic units
a
a (ii) Area of the curved surface
a = Circumference of the base × height
(i) volume of the cube = (edge)3 = a3 = 2  r × h = 2  rh sq units
(ii) Total surface area of the cube (iii) Area of the total surface
= 6 (edge)2 = 6a2 = Area of the curved surface +
(iii) Diagonal of the cube = 3 a (edge) = 3a Area of the two circular ends
(iv) Volume of the cube = 2  rh + 2  r2
3 3 = 2  r (h + r) sq units
 diagonal   d 
=   =   (iv) For two cylinders
 3   3
3 When radii are equal
 Surface area   Ratio of volumes = Ratio of heights
=  

 6   Ratio of volumes = Ratio of curved
(v) Total surface area of the cube surface areas
= 2(diagonal)2 = 2d2  Radii of curved surface areas = Ratio of
(vi) For two cubes heights
 Ratio of volumes = (ratio of sides)3 When heights are equal
 Ratio of surface areas = (ratio of sides)2  Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of radii)2
 (Ratio of surface areas)3 = (ratio of  Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of curved
volumes)2 surface areas)2

ANCE 90
 Mensuration

 Ratio of curved surface areas = Ratio of Solution :

radii Circumference of the paper = Breadth of
When volumes are equal the paper
 Ratio of radii  2r = 10
= Inverse ratio of heights 10 10  113 113
 r= = = cm.
 Ratio of curved surface areas 2 2  355 71
= Inverse ratio of radii As the length of the paper becomes the
 Ratio of curved surface areas height of the cylinder.
= Ratio of heights  Volume of the cylinder
When curved surface areas are equal = r 
2

 Ratio of radii = Inverse ratio of heights 355 113 113

= × × × 71 = 565 cm3
 Ratio of volumes = Inverse ratio of heights 113 71 71
 Ratio of volume = Ratio of radii Example - 10
 For a cylinder The radii of two right circular cylinders are
 Ratio of radii = (Ratio of curved surfaces) in the rato of 3 : 4 and their curved
× (Inverse ratio heights) surface areas are in the ratio of 5 : 6.
 Ratio of heights = (Ratio of curved Find the ratio of their heights.
surfaces) × (Inverse ratio of radii) Solution :
 Ratio of curved surfaces = (Ratio of Ratio of heights = (ratio of curved surface
radii) × (Ratio of heights) areas) (inverse ratio of radii)
(vi) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of radii 1 1
of two right circular cylinders are given, = (5 : 6)  : 
3 4
then Ratio of curved surface areas = (ratio = (5 : 6) (4 : 3) = 10 : 9
of radii) (ratio of heights)
(vii) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of
curved surface areas of two right circular
If r = radius of base,
cylinders are given, then
Ratio of radii = (ratio of curves surface h= height l
h
areas) (Inverse ratio of heights) l = slant height
(viii) If the ratio of radii and the ratio of curved = h 2  r 2 , then r
surface areas of two right circular cylinders
are given, then 1
(i) Volume of cone = × area of the base
Ratio of heights = (ratio of curved surface 3
areas) (Inverse ratio of radii) 1
× height = ×  r2 h cubic units
3
Example - 9 (ii) Area of curved surface =  r l
A rectangular piece of paper is 71 cm
=  r h 2  r 2 sq. units
long and 10 cm wide. A cylinder is
formed by rolling the paper along its (iii) Total surface area of cone
breadth. Find the volume of the cylinder. = Area of the base + area of the
 355  curved surface
 Take 113  =  r2 +  r l =  r (r + l) sq units
 

ANCE 91
 Mensuration

(iv) For two cones : Solution

 When volumes are equal Ratio of radii Ratio of heights
= Inverse ratio of heights = (inverse ratio of diameters)2 ×
(ratio of volumes)
 When radii are equal Ratio of volumes
2
= Ratio of heights 1 1
 When heights are equal Ratio of volumes =  :  (1 : 4)
 4 5
= (ratio of radii)2
= (5 : 4)2 (1 : 4)
 When curved surface areas are equal
Ratio of radii = Inverse ratio of slant 25 1
= × = 25 : 64.
heights. 16 4
(v) If the ratio of volumes and the ratio of
heights of two right circular cones (or
If R = Radius of the base of frustum
cylinders) are given, then = Ratio of radii
r = radius of the top of the frustum
= (ratio of volumes) (inverse ratio of heights)
h = height of the frustum
= (3 : 2) (8 : 3) = 4 : 1 = 2 : 1 l = slant height of the frustum,
(vi) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of
diameters (or radii) of two right circular l
cones (or cylinders) are given, then h

Ratio of volumes r
= (ratio of radii)2 × (ratio of heights)
(vii) If the ratio of radii (or diameter) and the
R
ratio of volumes of two right circular cones
are given, then then
Ratio of heights = (inverse ratio of radii)2 (a) Slant height = h 2  ( R  r ) 2 units
(ratio of volumes) (B) Area of the curved surface
Example - 11 =  (R + r) l sq. units
Two right circular cones of equal curved
(C) Total surface area of the frustum
surface areas have their slant heights in the
=  [(R2 + r2) + l (R + r)] sq units
ratio of 3 : 5. Find the ratio of their radii.
(D) Volume of the frustum
Solution :
h
Ratio of radii = inverse of slant heights = (R2 + r2 + Rr) cu. units
1 1 3
= : =5 : 3
3 5 Example - 13
Example - 12 A reservoir is in the shape of a frustum of a
The volumes of two cones are in the ratio right circular cone. It is 8m across at the
of 1 : 4 and their diameters are in the top and 4m across the bottom. It is 6m
ratio of 4 : 5. Find the ratio of their deep. Find the area of its curved surface,
heights. total surface area and also its volume.

ANCE 92
 Mensuration

Solution : (iv) Area of curved surface

Here, R = 4, r = 2 and h = 6 = 2  r2sq. units of hemisphere
 Slant height () (v) Total surface area of hemisphere
= 3  r2 sq. units
= h 2  (R – r) 2
(vi) For two spheres
= (6) 2  (4 – 2) 2 (a) (Ratio of radii)2 = Ratio of surface areas
= 40 . (B) (Ratio of radii)3 = Ratio of volumes
(C) (Ratio of surface areas)3 = (Ratio of
 Area of the curved surface
volumes)2
=  (R + r) 
Example - 14
22
= (4 + 2) 40 Diameter of a sphere is 28 cm. Find its
7 surface area and volume.
= 18.8 × 6.3 Solution :
= 118.4 m 28
Radius of the sphere (r) = = 14 cm
Total surface area 2
=  [(R2 + r2) +  (R + r)] 22
Surface area = 4r2 = 4 × × 14 × 14
22 7
= [(42 + 22 ) + 40 (4 + 2)] = 2464 sq cm.
7
22 4
= (20 + 6 40 Volume of sphere = r3
7 3
= 181.6 sq m) 4 22
= × × 14 × 14 × 14
Volume of the frustum 3 7
h = 11498.6 cm3.
= (R2 + r2 + Rr)
3
Example - 15
22 6
= × (42 + 22 + 4 × 2 ) The radii of two spheres are in the ratio
7 3
of 2 : 45. Find the ratio of their volumes.
44
= (20 + 4 + 8) = 176 m3. Solution :
7
Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of radii)3
= (2 : 5)3 = 8 : 125.
If r = radius of the sphere, then In a prism with a base of n sides,
4 3 Number of vertices = 2n
(i) Volume of sphere =  r sq. units and Number of faces = n + 2.
3
(ii) Surface area = 4  r2 sq. units Volume of the prism
(iii) Volume of hemisphere = area of base × height
2 2 Lateral surface area
=  r cubic units
3 = perimeter of base × height
Total surface area
= 2 × Base area + Lateral
P
Surface area.

ANCE 93
 Mensuration

1. Let ABCDEF be a regular hexagon. What 7. The dimensions of an open box are
is the ratio of the area of the triangle ACE 52 cm × 40 cm × 29 cm. Its thickness is
to that of the hexagon ABCDEF ? 2 cm. If 1 cm3 of metal used in the box
1 1 weighs 0.5 g, then the weight of the
(A) (B)
3 2 box is :
2 5 (A) 6832 gm (B) 7576 gm
(C) (D) (C) 7.76 gm (D) 8.56 gm
3 6
2. A cylinder 6 cm in diameter is partially 8. The opposite pairs of sides of a square
filled with water. A sphere 3 cm in diameter are increased by 40% and 30%
is gently dropped into the cylinder. To what respectively. The area of the resulting
further height will the water in the cylinder rectangle exceeds the area of the square
rise ? by :
(A) 6 cm (B) 2 cm (A) 42% (B) 62%
(C) 1/2 cm (D) None of these (C) 82% (D) 72%

3. The sides of a triangle are in the ratio of 9. The length of a rope by which cow must
be tethered in order that it may be able to
1 1 1 graze an area of 9856 square metre is :
: : . If the perimeter is 52 cm, then
2 3 4 (A) 56 m (B) 64 m
the length of the smallest side is : (C) 88 m (D) 168 m
(A) 9 cm (B) 10 cm
(C) 11 cm (D) 12 cm 10. A horse is placed for grazing inside a
rectangular field of 70 m by 52 m an is
4. The ratio of the length and breadth of a tethered to one corner by a rope 21 m
rectangle is 4 : 3. The area of the rectangle long. On how much area can it graze ?
is 192 cm2 the perimeter of the rectangle (A) 386.5 m2 (B)325.5 m2
will be
(C) 346.5 m2 (D) 246.5 m2
(A) 56 cm (B) 28 cm
(C) 46 cm (D) 36 cm 11. How many squares are there in a 5 inch
by 5 inch square grid, if the grid is made
5. A pond 100 m in diameter is surrounded up of one inch by one inch squares ?
by a circular grass walk 2m wide. How
(A) 50 (B) 150
many square meters of grass is there on
(C) 55 (D) 25
the walk ?
(A) 98  (B) 100  12. If the radius of a circle is increased by
(C) 204  (D) 202  100%, then the area of the circle increases
by :
6. The length of a rectangle is increased by
60%. By what percent would the width (A) 100% (B) 200%
be decreased so as to maintain the same (C) 300% (D) 400%
area ? 13. If the perimeter of an isosceles right
1
(A) 37 % (B) 60% triangle is (6  3 2 ) , then the area of
2
the triangle is :
(C) 75% (D) 120%

ANCE 94
 Mensuration

(A) 4.5 m2 (B) 5.4 m2 (A) 44 m (B) 14 m (C) 22 m (D) 7 m

(C) 9 m2 (D) 81 m2 21. The number of rectangles that you can find
14. A triangle and a parallelogram are on a chessboard is :
constructed on the same base such that (A) 1764 (B) 1600 (C) 1825 (D) 1296
their areas are equal. If the altitude of the 22. In the figure, ABCD is a square with
parallelogram is 100 m, then the altitude side 10. BFD is an arc of a circle with
of the triangle is : centre C. BGD is an arc of a-circle with
(A) 100 m (B) 200 m centre A. What is the area of the shaded
(C) 100 2 m (D) 10 2 m region ?
A 10 B
15. A rhombus OABC is drawn inside a circle
whose centre is at O in such a way that
the vertices A, B and C of the rhombus
are on the circle. If the area of the rhombus 10
is 32 3 m2, then the radius of the circle
is :
(A) 64 m (B) 8 m (C) 32 m (D) 46 m
D C
16. Four equal circles are inscribed about (A) 100 – 50  (B) 100 – 257 
the four corners of a square so that each (C) 50  – 100 (D) 25  – 100
touches two of the others. If each side
of the square is 14 cm, then the area 23. Let A be the area of a square inscribed in
enclosed between the circumferences of a circle of radius ‘r’ and let B be the area
the circles is : of a hexagon inscribed in the same circle.
Then B/A equals :
(A) 24 cm2 (B) 42 cm2
(C) 154 cm 2
(D) 196 cm2 3 3
(A) 2 3 (B)
17. The diagonal of the floor of a rectangular 4
closet is 5 metres. The shorter side of the 2 3
(C) (D) None of these
closet is 3 metres. What is the area of the 4
floor of closet in square metres ? 24. A steel wire is bent in the form of a square
(A) 15 (B) 12.5 (C) 12 (D) 10 of area 121 cm2. If the same wire is bent
in the form of a circle, then the area of the
3x circle is :
18. The length of each side of a square is
+1.
4 (A) 131 cm2 (B) 136 cm2
What is the perimeter of the square ? (C) 154 cm2 (D) None of these
(A) x + 1 (B) 3x + 1
9 2 3 25. The dimensions of a rectangular box in
(C) 3x + 4 (D) x  x 1 the ratio 1 : 2 : 4 and the difference
16 2 between the costs of covering it with the
19. The area of a square increases by .......... cloth and sheet at the rate of Rs. 20 and
if its side increases by 30% Rs. 20.5 per square metre respectively is
(A) 71% (B) 60% (C) 69% (D) 30% Rs. 126. Find the dimensions of the box :
(A) 3m, 6m, 12m
20. A track is in the form of a ring whose
(B) 6m, 12m, 24m
inner circumference is 352 m and the outer
circumference is 396 m. The width of the (C) 1m, 2m, 4m
track is : (D) None of these

ANCE 95
 Mensuration
26. The number of revolutions made by a wheel (A) 32 cm (B) 70 cm
of diameter 56 m in covering a distance of (C) 55 cm (D) 17 cm
 22  29. The cross-section of a canal is in the form
1.1 km is  use   
 7  of a trapezium. If the canal top is 10 m
(A) 31.25 (B) 56.25 wide and the bottom is 6 m wide, and the
(C) 6.25 (D) 62.5 area of cross-section is 72 m2, then the
depth of the canal is :
27. Semi-circular lawns are attached to the
edges of a rectangular field measuring (A) 10 m (B) 7 m
42 m × 35 m. The area of the total (C) 6 m (D) 9 m
field is : 30. Two isosceles triangles have equal vertical
(A) 3818.5 m2 (B) 8318 m2 angles and their areas in the ratio of
2
(C) 5813 m (D) 1358 m2 9 : 16. The ratio of their corresponding
28. A wire is in the form of a circle of radius 35 heights is :
cm. If it is bent into the shape of a rhombus, (A) 3 : 4 (B) 4 : 3
what is the side of the rhombus ? (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 2

1. A rect angular piece of cardboard 5. Three cubes of metal, of edges 6 cm, 8

18 cm × 24 cm is made into an open box cm and 10 cm are melted to form a new
by cutting a square of 5 cm side from cube. The diagonal of this new cube is :
each corner and building up the side. Find (A) 8 cm (B) 12 cm
the volume of the box in cubic centimetre. (C) 20.8 cm (D) 21.8 cm
(A) 560 (B) 432
(C) 216 (D) None of these 6. The slant height of a right circular cone is
10 m and its height is 8 m. Its curved
2. A milkman has 3 jars containing 57 litres, surface area will be :
129 litres and 177 litres of pure milk
(A) 175.5 m2 (B) 185.5 m2
respectively. A measuring can, after a
(C) 188.5 m2 (D) 198.5 m2
different number of exact measurements
of milk in each jar, leaves the same amount 7. The number of bricks, each measuring
of milk unmeasured in each jar. What is 25 cm × 12.5 cm × 7.5 cm required to
the volume of the largest such can ? construct a wall 6 m long, 5 m high and
(A) 12 litres (B) 16 litres 0.5 m thick, while the mortar occupies 5%
(C) 24 litres (D) None of these of the volume of the wall, is:
3. Two cubes have their volumes in the ratio (A) 6080 (B) 5740
1 : 27. Find the ratio of their surface areas. (C) 3040 (D) 8120
(A) 1 : 27 (B) 1 : 3 8. The height of a cone is 30 cm. A small
(C) 1 : 9 (D) 9 : 1 cone is cut off at the top by a plane parallel
4. The sum of the length, breadth and depth to the base. If its volume is 1/27th of the
of a cuboid is 19 cm and its diagonal is given cone, then the height of the smaller
5 5 , its surface area is : cone is :
(A) 361 cm2 (B) 125 cm2 (A) 13.5cm (B) 11 cm
(C) 236 cm 2
(D) None of these (C) 10 cm (D) 12 cm

ANCE 96
 Mensuration

9. Total surface area of a cube whose side is (A) 1 : 2 (B) 6 : 

0.5 cm is : (C) 6 :  (D) 3 : 1
1 1
(A) cm2 (B) cm2 16. If a solid sphere of radius 10 centimetre
8 4 is moulded into 8 spherical solid balls of
3 3 equal radius, then the surface area of each
(C) cm2 (D) cm2
4 2 ball is :
10. The volume of a cylindrical tank is 12320 (A) 60  cm2 (B) 50  cm2
lit = 1000 m3. Its radius and height are in (C) 75  cm2 (D) 100  cm2
the ratio of 7 : 10 respectively. What is
17. A right circular cone of height h is cut by
the height of the tank ?
a plane parallel to the base at a distance
(A) 1.4 metres (B) 2.8 metres h
(C) 2 metres (D) None of these form the base, then the volumes of the
3
resulting cone and the frustum are in the
11. A hemispherical bowl is made of steel
ratio :
0.5 cm thick. The inside radius of the bowl
(A) 1 : 3 (B) 8 : 19
is 4 cm. The volume of the steel used in
(C) 1 : 4 (D) 1 : 7
making the bowl is :
(A) 55.83 cm3 (B) 56.83 cm3 18. A wooden box (open at the top) of
(C) 57.83 cm3 (D) 58.83 cm3 thickness 0.5 cm, length 21 cm, width
11 cm and height 6 cm is painted on the
12. The length of a room is twice its breadth. inside. The expenses of painting are
The four walls have a total area of 120 Rs. 70. What is the rate of painting per
square metre. If the length of the room is square centimetre ?
4 metres, then what will be the area of the (A) Rs. 0.7 (B) Rs. 0.5
floor ? (C) Rs. 0.1 (D) Rs. 0.2
(A) 100 m2 (B) 80 m2
19. Find the number of coins, 1.5 cm in
(C) 70 m2 (D) 50 m2
diameter and 0.2 cm thick, to be melted
13. Three cubes with sides in the ratio to form a right circular cylinder of height
3 : 4 : 5 are melted to form a single cube 10 cm and diameter 4.5 cm.
whose diagonal is 12 3 cm. The sides of (A) 430 (B) 440 (C) 450 (D) 460
the cubes are : 20. The length of an edge of a hollow cube
(A) 6 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm open at one face is 3 m. What is the
(B) 3 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm length of the largest pole that it can
(C) 9 cm, 12 cm, 15 cm accommodate ?
(D) None of these (A) 3 m (B) 3 3 m
14. What is the capacity of a bucket which 3
is 45 cm high if its radii at the ends are (C) 3 m (D) m
3
28 cm and 7 cm ?
21. How many metres of cloth 5 m wide will
(A) 49280 cm3 (B) 49820 cm3
be required to make a conical tent, the
(C) 48280 cm3 (D) 45622.5 cm3
radius of whose base is 7 m and whose
15. A sphere and a cube have the same surface height is 24 m2. (Take = 22/7)
area. The ratio of the volume of the sphere (A) 108 m (B) 110 m
to that of the cube is : (C) 112 m (D) 115 m

ANCE 97
 Mensuration

22. A cylindrical tub of radius 12 cm contains (A) 8 cm (B) 10 cm

water to a depth of 20 cm. A spherical (C) 9 cm (D) 6 cm
iron ball is dropped into the tub and thus 27. A swimming pool 9 m wide and 12 m
the level of water is raised by 6.75 cm. long is 1 m deep on the shallow side and
What is the radius of the ball ? 4 m deep on the deeper side. Its volume
(A) 6 cm (B) 9 cm is :
(C) 8 cm (D) None of these (A) 408 m3 (B) 360 m3
23. The perimeter of one face of a cube is 20 (C) 270 m3 (D) 208 m3
cm. Its volume must be : 28. A toy is in the form of a cone mounted on
(A) 8000 cm3 (B) 1000 cm3 a hemisphere of radius 3.5 cm. The total
3
(C) 125 cm (D) 400 cm3 height of the toy is 15.5 cm. Find the total
24. A circular well is dug to a depth of 14  22 
metres with a diameter of 2 metres. What surface area  Use   
 7 
is the volume of the earth dug out ? (A) 137.5 cm 2
(B) 214.5 cm2
 22  (C) 154 cm 2
(D) 291.5 cm2
 Use   
 7  29. The volume of a cube is numerically equal
(A) 32 cubic metres (B) 36 cubic metres to the sum of its edges. What is its total
(C) 40 cubic metres (D) 44 cubic metres surface area in square units ?
25. The surface area of a cube is 150 square (A) 66 (B) 183
centimetre. What is the length of its (C) 36 (D) 72
diagonal in centimetres ?
30. How many bricks are required to build a
5 3
(A) 5 (B) (C) 5 3 (D) 5 2 wall of 15 metre length, 12 metre height
2 and 20 centimetre thickness, if the brick is
26. Three cubes of a metal are of edges 3 cm, 36 centimetre long, 25 centimetre wide and
4 cm and 5 cm. These are melted together 10 centimetre thick ?
and from the melted material another cube (A) 2000 (B) 4000
is formed. The edge of this cube is : (C) 12000 (D) None of these

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . B C D C C A A C A C
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . D C A A B C C C C D
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . A C B C A C A C D A

Q .N o. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A C C C C C A C D D
Q .N o. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . D D A D B B B C C C
Q .N o. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . B B C D C B C D D B

ANCE 98
 Progression

Series
A systematic arrangement of number The sum of the terms of a sequence is called
according to a given rule is called a the series of the corresponding sequence.
sequence. Example-2
The number in a sequence are called its 1 + 2 + 3 + ............ + n is a finite series
terms. We refer the first term of a sequence of first n natural numbers.
as T1, second term as T2 and so on.The nth The sum of first n terms of series is denoted
term of a sequence is denoted by Tn, which by Sn.
may also be referred to as the general term Here, Sn = T1 + T2 + ........ + Tn
of the sequences. Here, S1 = T1
(a) Finite Sequence : S2 = T 1 + T 2
A sequence which consists of a finite number S3 = T 1 + T 2 + T 3
of terms is called a finite sequence. .............................
Eg. 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23 is the finite .............................
sequences of 8 terms. Sn = T1 + T2 + T3 + .......+ Tn
(b) Infinite Sequence : We have,
A sequence which consists of an infinite S2 – S1 = T 2
number of terms is called an infinite sequence. S3 – S2 = T 3
Eg. : 3, 10, 17, 24, 31 ......... is an infinite Similarly,
sequences. Sn – Sn–1 = Tn
Example-3
Note : If a sequence is given, then we can find its In the series, Tn = 2n + 5, find S4
nth term and if the nth term of a sequence
Solution :
is given we can find the terms of the
Tn = 2n + 5
sequence.
T1 = 2(1) + 5 = 7
Example-1 T2 = 2(2) + 5 = 9
Find the first four terms of the sequences T3 = 2(3) + 5 = 11
whose nth terms are given as follows : T4 = 2(4) + 5 = 13
(i) Tn = 3n + 1 S4 = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4 = 7 + 9 + 11 + 13
substituting n = 1 = 40
T1 = 3(1) + 1 = 4 Sequences of number which follow specific
Similarly, T2 = 3(2) + 1 = 7 patterns are called progression. Depending
T3 = 3(3) + 1 = 10 on the pattern, the progressions are classified
as follows :
T4 = 3(4) + 1 = 13
(i) Arithmetic Progression
(ii) Tn = 2n2 – 3
(ii) Geometic Progression
substituting n = 1
(iii) Harmonic Progression
T1 = 2(1)2 – 3 = –1
Similarly, T2 = 2(2)2 – 3 = 5 Arithmetic Progression (A.P.)
2
T3 = 2(3) – 3 = 15 A sequence whose terms increase or
T4 = 2(4)2 –3 = 29 decrease by a fixed number is called an
 The first four terms of the sequence are arithmetic progression. The fixed number is
–1, 5, 15, 29 called the common difference of the A.P.

ANCE 99
 Progression

This fixed number is the difference of two (b) The sum of the first “n” terms of an
successive terms. It is called the common A.P.
difference usually denoted by “d”. The n
Sn = [2a + (n – 1)d] or
standard A.P. is defined as a, a + d, a + 2d 2
.......... a + (n – 1) d........... n
Sn = (a + )
Eg. (i) 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 ........... 2
(ii) 5, 3, 1, –1, –3, –5, –7 ...........  = a + (n –1) d
(i) Here 2nd term – 1st term a  first term
= 3rd term – 2nd term = 4th term – 3rd d  common difference
term = ......... – 2   last term
Here 1, 3, 5, 7 ........ are in A.P. whose first Sn  sum of the first “n” terms
term is 1 and common difference is 2.
n
(ii) The series 5, 3, 1, –1, –3, –5, –7 ........... NOTE 1 : In the formula Sn  [ 2a  ( n  1) d],
is in A.P. whose first term is 5 and common 2
difference is –2. there are four quantities viz. Sn, s, n and d.
If any three of these are known, the fourth
 Algorithm to determine whether a can be determined. Sometimes two of these
sequence is an A.P. or not when its nth quantities are given, in such cases remaining
term is two qauntities are provided by some other
Step 1 : Obtain an relation.
Step 2 : Replace n by n + 1 in an to get an + 1. NOTE 2 : If the sum Sn of n terms of a sequence
Step 3 : Calculate an + 1 – an. is given, then nth term an of the sequence
Step 4 : If an + 1 – an is independent of n, the given can be determined by the following formula.
sequence is an A.P. Otherwise it is not an
(c) Properties of A.P.
A.P.
(i) If a fixed term is added or subtracted from
(a) General term of an A.P. each term of an A.P., then the resulting
tn = a + (n – 1) d series is also an A.P.
th
tn  n term (ii) If each term of an A.P. is multiplied or
a  first term divided by a fixed term, then the resulting
d  common difference = tn – tn–1 series is also an A.P.
If n = 1 (iii) If the terms of an A.P. are choosen at regular
t1, the first term is a = a + (1 – 1) intervals then they form an A.P.
Selection of terms in an A.P. (iv) A sequence is in A.P. if tn = An + B, where
Sometimes we require certain number of A, B are constant then d = A
terms in A.P. The following ways of selecting (v) A sequence is in A.P. if Sn = An2 + Bn,
terms are generally very convenient. where A, B are constant then d = 2A
Number of Terms Common (vi) Three number a, b, c are in A.P. iff
terms difference 2b = a + c.
3 a – d, a, a + d d (vii) In a finite A.P. the sum of the terms
4 a – 3d, a – d, a + d, 2d equidistant from the beginning and end is
a + 3d always same and is equal to the sum of first
5 a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d, d and last term i.e., ak + an – (k – 1) = a1 + an
a + 2d for all k = 1, 2, 3, ......... n – 1.
6 a – 5d, a – 3d, a – d, d (viii) If an, an + 1 and an + 2 are three consecutive
a + d, a + 3d, a + 5 terms of an A.P., then 2an + 1 = an + an + 2.

ANCE 100
 Progression

Example-4 Now let us write the 25th term by substituting

Find the nth term and 19th term of the a = 3, d = 2 and
sequence 5, 2, –1, –4, .......... n = 25 in tn = a + (n – 1)d
Solution :  t25 = 3 + (25 – 1)2 = 51
Clearly, the given sequence is an A.P. with  t25 of the A.P. is 51.
a = 5 and d = –3
Example-6
 tn = a + (n – 1) d = 5 + (n – 1) (–3)
= – 3n + 8. Find the value of ‘k’ if 2k + 7, 6k – 2,
For the 19th term, putting n = 19, we get t19 8k – 4 are in A.P. Also find the sequence.
= –3.19 + 8 = –49. Solution :
Example-5 Given that 2k + 7, 6k – 2 and 8k – 4 are
The 8th term of an A.P. is 17, and 19th term in A.P. the difference between successive
is 39. Find the A.P. and the 25th term ? terms in an A.P. is same.
Solution :  t2 – t1 = t3 – t2
Given t8 = 17 and t19 = 39  [6k – 2] – [2k + 7] = [8k – 4] –
We known tn = a + (n – 1)d [6k – 2]
 t8 = a + (8 – 1) d = a + 7d = 17  4k – 9 = 2k – 2  2k = 7
.............(1)
 t19 = a + (19 – 1) d = a + 18d = 39 7
 k=
.............(2) 2
Equations (1) and (2) are two equations in Substituting the value of ‘k’ in 2k + 7,
terms of the unknown variables ‘a’ and ‘d’. 6k – 2, 8k – 4 we get,
Solving of (1) and (2) gives the values of ‘a’
and ‘d’. 7 7 7
2× + 7, 6 × – 2, 8 × – 4 i.e.,
The first step in solving of the equation is 2 2 2
eliminating one of the unknowns. 14, 19, 24
This can be done by subtracting equation  The sequence is 14, 19, 24 ...........
(1) from (2) where the variables ‘a’ is
Example-7
eliminated as follows :
(2) – (1) = (a + 18d) – (a + 7d) Find the sum of the series
= 39 – 17 .5 + .51 + .52 + .......... to 100 terms
 11d = 22 .............(3) Solution :
From equation (3). It is an equation is single The given series is an A.P. with first term, a
variable ‘d’ and can be found out very easily. = .5 and common difference, d = .51 – .5
 11d = 22 = .01.
 d=2  Sum of 100 terms
We can find the value of ‘a’ by substituting
100
the value of ‘d’ in equation (1). = [2 × .5 + (100 –1) × 0.1]
 a + 7d = 17 2
 a + 7 × 2 = 17 = 50 (1 + 99 × .01) = 50 (1 + .99)
 a=3 = 50 × 1.99 = 99.5
 The first term of the A.P., a = 3 and Example-8
common difference d = 2 Find the sum of 20 terms of an A.P., whose
The A.P. is 3, 5, 7 .................. first terms is 3 and the last term is 57.

ANCE 101
 Progression

Solution :  n-Arithmetic Mean : The number A1, A2

We have, a = 3,  = 57, n = 20 ...........n are said to be n arithmetic means
between two given numbers a and b
n 20 provided
 Sn = (a + ),  S20 = (3 +
2 2 a, A1, A2, ........An , b are in A.P.
57) = 600 For example, since 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 are in
Hence, the sum of the 20 terms is 600. A.P., therefore 4, 6, 8, 10 are the four
Example-9 arithmetic between 2 and 12.
Find the (i) first term and common (d) Properties of Arithmetic Mean :
difference (ii) general term (iii) sum to ‘n’ (i) Arithmetic mean of two numbers “a” and
terms and hence sum to 10 terms of the ab
“b” is
A.P., x – 2b, x + 2b, x + 6b .................. 2
Solution : (ii) If there are “n” A.M.’s between “a” and “b”
Given the A.P., ba
then d =
x – 2b, x + 2b, x + 6b........ n 1
(iii) Arithmetic Mean of a1 ................... an is
(i) The first term = t1 = a = x – 2b
a1  a 2  a 3 .......a n
Common difference = d
n
= t2 – t1 = x + 2b – (x – 2b) = 4b (iv) The sum of n Arithmetic Means between a
(ii) The general term of the A.P. n
tn = a + (n – 1) d and b is Sn = (a + b )
2
Substituting ‘a’ and ‘d’ in tn Example-10
 tn = [x – 2b] + [n – 1] 4b If A is the A.M. between a and b, find
= x – 6b + 4nb A  2a A  2b
+
(iii) Sum to ‘n’ terms of an A.P. = Sn Ab Aa
Solution :
n ab
= [2a + (n –1)d] We know that A =
2 2
Substituting a and d in Sn A  2a A  2b
Therefore +
n Ab Aa
 Sn = [2 (x – 2b) + (n – 1) 4b] ab ab
2  2a  2b
= n [x – 2b + (n – 1) 2b] = 2 + 2
ab ab
= n [x + 2nb – 4b] ............(1) b a
Substituting n = 10 in (1) we get 2 2
a  b  4a a  b  4b
S10 = 10x + 160b = +
a  b  2b a  b  2a
5a  b 5b  a
ARITHMETIC MEAN (A.M.) = +
a b ba
 Single Arithmetic Mean : A number of 5a  b 5b  a
‘A’ is said to be the single A.M. between = 
ab ab
two given numbers a and b provided a, A, 5a  b  5b  a
b are in A.P. =
ab
For example, since 2, 4, 6 are in A.P., 4( a  b )
therefore, 4 is the single A.M. between 2 =
ab
and 6. = 4 as desired

ANCE 102
 Progression

Example-11  Tricks for Problem Solving :

If the A.M. of the roots of a quadratic • A sequence t1, t2, t3, t4, ........... will be in
8 A.P. if t2 – t1 = t3 – t2 = t4 – t3 = .............
equation is and A.M. of their reciprocals
5 i.e. tn – tn–1 = constant for n > 2.
8 • Three numbers a, b, c are in A.P. if and only
is , then the equation is given by :
7 if b – a = c – b, i.e., if and only a + c = 2b
Solution : • When Sum of A.P. is known then any three
Say  are the roots of the equation numbers in an A.P. can be taken as a – d,
1 1 a, a + d. Any four numbers in an A.P. can

  8   8 be taken as a – 3d, a – d, a + d and a +
= and 
2 5 2 7 3d, Five numbers in an A.P. can be taken as
a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d and a + 2d.
16
+= .........(1) and Similarly, six numbers is an A.P. can be taken
5 as a – 5d, a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d,
7 a + 5d.
 = ..........(2)
5 • If an A.P. has n terms, then the nth term is
 Required equation is given by called the last term of A.P. and it is denoted
5x2 – 16x + 7 = 0 by . Therefore,  = a + (n – 1)d.
Example-12 • If a is the first term and d the common
Between the numbers 1 and 31, m means difference of an A.P. having m terms, then
are inserted so that the ratio of 7th mean nth term from the end is (m – n + 1)th term
and the (m–1)th mean is 5 : 9, then the value from the beginning.
of m is :  nth term from the end = a + (m – n)d
Solution : • If common difference d, number of terms n
Let x1, x2, x3........xm are m means and the last term l, are given then
1, x1, x2, ..........xm, 31  A.P. n
Sn = [2 – (n – 1) d]
tm+2 = 31 = 1 + (m + 1)d 2
• tn = Sn – Sn–1
30
d= ..........(1)  Important Formulae :
m 1
(i) Sum of the first “n” natural numbers
7 th mean
Now n (n  1)
(m – 1) th mean = 1 + 2 + 3 + ......... + n =  n 
2
ts 1  7d 5 (ii) Sum of the squares of the “n” natural
= = =
tm 1  ( m  1)d 9 numbers
= 12 + 22 + 32 + .............. + n2
4
 d = ...........(2) n (n  1) (2n  1)
5m  68 =  n2 
6
30 4 (iii) Sum of the cubes of the “n” natural numbers
By (1) and (2) =
m 1 5m  68 = 13 + 23 + 33 + ............ + n3
150m – 2040 = 4m + 4 3 n 2 (n  1) 2
146m = 2044 = n  = [ n]2
4
2044 (iv)  2n = 2 + 4 + 6 + .......... + 2n = n(n + 1)
m= (v) n3 = (n)2 , If n n3 = (n2)2 then n = 1
146
m = 14 (vi) n – 1) = 1 + 3 + 5 .......... (2n – 1) = n2

ANCE 103
 Progression

1. The second term of an A.P. is a2, its 8. If the 10th term of an A.P. is 52 and 17th
common difference is ‘d’ then the sum of term is 20 more than the 13th term then:
its first ‘n’ terms is (A) a = 5, d = 7 (B) a = 4, d = 8
n (C) a = 3 , d = 9 (D) a = 7, d = 5
(A) [2a 2  (n  1)d]
2 9. The 5th term of an A.P. is 26 and the 10th
n term is 51 respectively, then its 15th
(B) (2a1 + (n – 1)d]
2 term is:
n (A) 72 (B) 76 (C) 78 (D) 75
(C) [2a 2  (n  3)d]
2 10. If the mth term of an A.P. is n and nth
n
(D) [a 2  (n  1)d] term is m then its rth term will be:
2 (A) m – n + r (B) n – m + r
2. In a certain arithmetical sequence, if the (C) m + n + r (D) m + n – r
24th term is twice the 10th term, then 72nd
62 61
term is twice the 11. Which term of the A.P. 21, , , .....
(A) 30th term (B) 40th term 3 3
is the first negative term?
(C) 34th term (D) 38th term
(A) 64 (B) 63 (C) 62 (D) 65
th th
3. If 29 term of an A.P. is twice the 19
12. For what value of k, the kth terms of the
term of that A.P., then the value of 9th term
following two A.P.’s are equal (i) 1,7, 13,
is
1 19...... (ii) 64, 63, 62, .........?
(A) 2 × 19th term (B) × 19th term (A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 15 (D) 20
2
1 13. What is the eight term of the sequence
(C) zero (D) th
19 term 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, .....?
(A) 8 (B) 64 (C) 128 (D) 200
4. How many terms are there in the A.P.
whose first and fifth terms are –14 and 14. If the nth term of an A.P. is 4n + 1, then
2 respectively and the sum of the terms the common difference is :
is 40. (A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 6
(A) 2 × common difference
(B) 10 15. Determine the 2nd term of an A.P. whose
6th term is 12 and 8th term is 22.
(C) 8
(D) 14 (A) – 8 (B) –10 (C) – 6 (D) –12

5. If the last term of an A.P. : 3 , 8, 13, ........ 16. a4 2

For the A.P. a1, a2, a3 ...... if  ,
is 78 then the number of terms in A.P. are: a7 3
a6
(A) 16 (B) 18 (C) 14 (D) 21 find
a8
6. The 15th term of the A.P. 7, 17, 27, ...... 3 4 2 4
is - (A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 5 5
(A) 135 (B) 140 (C) 147 (D) 145
17. If m times the mth term of an A.P. is equal
7. The 10th term from the end of the A.P. to n times its nth term; then the (m + n)th
4, 9, 14, .......... 254 is - term of the A.P. is
(A) 219 (B) 291 (C) 229 (D) 209 (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3

ANCE 104
 Progression

18. The first and the last term of an A.P. are 25. If the mth term of an AP is ‘n’ and nth term
4 and 146 and the sum of the A.P. is 7575. is ‘m’, then its (m + n)th term is
Find the number of terms of the A.P. and (A) mn (B) m + n
the common difference. (C) m – n (D) 0
(A) 101, 1.5 (B) 101, 2.5
(C) 101, 4.5 (D) 101, 3.5 26. The first four terms of an arithmetic
sequence are a, x, b, 2x. The ratio of a to
19. If first three terms in an AP are x-1, x+1,
2x+3, then the value of x is: b is
(A) – 2 (B) 0 (C) 2 (D) 4 1 1
(A) (B)
4 3
20. The 10th term of an AP is 20 and the 19th 1
term is 101. Then the third term is (C) (D) none
2
(A) – 43 (B) – 61 (C) 62 (D) 1
21. If 7 times the 7th term of AP is equal to 11 27. 8th term of the series 2 2 , 2 , 0,...
times the 11th term, then 18th term in that will be:
AP is
(A) – 5 2 (B) 5 2
(A) 143
(B) 0 (C) 10 2 (D) – 10 2
(C) 1
28. 30th term of the AP : 10, 7, 4, .... is:
(D) cannot be determined
(A) 97 (B) 77
22. For what value of ‘x’ are the terms 2x, (C) – 77 (D) – 87
x + 10 and 3x + 2 in AP?
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 1 1
29. 11th term of the AP : –3, – , 2, ......, is
2
23. Which term of the AP, 24, 21, 18, 15..... (A) 28 (B) 22
is the first negative term?
(C) – 38 (D) – 48½
(A) 8 (B) 10 (C) 12 (D) 6
th th th
24. If the p , q and r terms of an AP are P, 30. There are 60 terms in an A.P. of which the
Q, R respectively, then first term is 8 and the last term is 185. The
P(q–r) + Q(r–p) + R(p–q) = ____ 31st term is
(A) 0 (B) 1 (A) 56 (B) 94
(C) pqr (D) p + qr (C) 85 (D) 98

a 1 2 (A) 0 (B) 1
1. If a, b, c are in A.P. then , ,
bc c b 1 1 1
are in (C)  (D)
(A) A.P. (B) G.P. (C) H.P. (D) None m n mn

2. Let Tr be the rth term of an A.P. for r = 1, 3. An A.P. consists of n (odd) terms and
2, 3 ...... If for some positive integers m, n is middle term is m. Then the sum of the
1 1 A.P. is
we have Tm = and Tn = then Tmn 1
n m (A) mn2 (B) mn (C) 2 mn (D) mn
equals - 2

ANCE 105
 Progression

1 1
4. If a, b, c are in A.P. then a + ,b+ , 12. In an A.P. a = 2 and the sum of first five
bc ca terms is one fourth of the sum of the next
1
c+ are in five terms. Then T 20 is
ab
(A) A.P. (B) G.P. (A) –112 (B) 112
(C) H.P. (D) None of these (C) 121 (D) –121

5. The sum to n terms of 1, 8, 27 , 64, .... 13. A sum of money kept in a bank amounts to
is Rs 1000 in 4 years and Rs 1400 in 12
n(n  1)(2n  1) n 2 (n  1) 2 years. The sum and interest carried every
(A) (B) year are
6 4
2 n(n  1) 1
n (n  1)
(C) (D) (A) 600, 133 (B) 800, 50
4 2 3
(C) 750, 150 (D) 850, 75
6. Sum of the terms, 1, 2, 3, 4, .....n is
14. The sum of ‘n’ terms of two A.P.’s are in
n(n  1) n 2 (n  1)
(A) (B) 5n  2
2 2 the ratio of . The ratio of their sixth
2
n(n  1) 11n  7
 n(n  1)  terms is
(C)   (D)
 2  2
(A) 32 : 59 (B) 1 : 1
7. The common difference of the A.P., 13, (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 2
8, 3, –2 is
15. The sum of the first 100 terms common to
(A) – 5 (B) 5 the series 17, 21, 25 .... and 16, 21, 26
(C) 0 (D) 1 ..... is
8. The first term of an A.P., is –1, and the (A) 202200 (B) 100101
C.D. is –3, the 12 th term is (C) 101010 (D) 101100
(A) 34 (B) – 34 16. The maximum sum of the A.P. series 40,
(C) 32 (D) – 32 36, 32, ....... is
9. The 10th term of the A.P., 13 8, 3, (A) Not possible to calculate
– 2 .... is (B) 20
(A) –32 (B) 32 (C) 225
(C) 54 (D) –54 (D) 232

10. If x, y, z are in A.P. then 2y = 17. If the sum of ‘n’ terms of a progression be
(A) xz (B) x + z a QUADRATIC EXPRESSION in ‘n’,
then the sequence is in
(C) x – z (D) xz
(A) G.P. (B) A.P.
11. T he 10 th t er m in t he ser ies (C) H.P. (D) A.P. and G.P
4x 5x 18. In an A.P. the 13th term is 3 and the sum to
x+   2x  ....... is
3 3 13 terms is 234, then the first term is
(A) 2x (B) 3x (A) 23 (B) 33
(C) 4x (D) 5x (C) 43 (D) 1

ANCE 106
 Progression

19. The sum of ‘n’ terms of two series in A.P. 23. The first term of an A.P. is 1 and the last
are in the ratio ( 3n – 13) : (5n + 41). The term is 58.5. If their sum is 714. The
ratio of their 12th terms is number of terms in an A.P. is:
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 1 : 3 (A) 14 (B) 18
(C) 14 : 39 (D) 1 : 2 (C) 28 (D) 24

20. Let Sn denote the sum of the first ‘n’ terms 24. The sum of first n terms of a certain A.P.
of an A.P. S2n = 3Sn. Then, the ratio S3n/Sn series is 2n2 – 3n. Then the first three
is equal to: successive terms of the series are:
(A) 4 (B) 6 (A) –3, 0, 3
(C) 8 (D) 10 (B) 4, 7, 10
21. The sum of the first n terms of an A.P. is (C) – 7, –3, 1
6n – n2 then its 25th term is: (D) –1, 3, 7
(A) 43 (B) 41
25. If the sum of p terms of an A.P. is q and
(C) 45 (D) – 43
the sum of q terms is p then sum of
22. The first term of an A.P. is 4 and last term (p + q) terms, will be:
is 44. There are 7 terms. Hence their (A) p – q
sum is: (B) – (p + q)
(A) 48 (B) 336 (C) p + q
(C) 168 (D) 280 (D) pq

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C C C B A C D D B D
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . A B B B A B A B B A
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . B C B A B D A C B D

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . D B D A B D A B A B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C A B D D B B B C B
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans . D C D D B

ANCE 107
 Geometry

Introduction construction. Of course, this construction

part may not be necessary for every
The essential stages in the structure of
theorem.
Geometry :
I. Undefined terms/Defined terms : 6. Proof : This is an important stage in
Undefined terms : Point, Line, Plane, establishing a theorem. Here we establish
Space etc. what is required to be prove as mentioned
in the conclusion part by logical steps. This
Defined terms : Line segment, Angle,
chain of steps starts with what is given in
Triangle, Circle etc.,
the hypothesis. Each step must be
II. Axioms : The Axioms are the foundation supported only by an axiom or by a
stones on which the structure of geometry definition, or by theorems previously
is structured. ( Statements which are either proved, but not by any observation or by
self evident, or assumed to be true are intuition.
called ‘Axioms’. ) Plane
Eg : “There is one and only one line containing
The basic idea of a plane is that is a flat
any two distinct points in a plane”. surface which extends indefinitely in all
III. Theorems : Theorems are statements directions.
which are accepted to be true only when
they are proved with the help of the axioms
or theorems already proved.
 The various stages in the structure of a
theorem :
1. General Enunciation : Points
Proposition of the theorem. It is a location in space, on a surface, or
in a coordinate system. A point has no
2. Figure : A figure may be drawn relavant to
dimensions and defined only by its
what is described in general enunciation position.
and it is to be named.
 Colinear Points : All points which lie on
3. Hypothesis : The given condition of the the same line are said to be Colinear
theorem are particularly mentioned with Points.
respect to the figure.
 Intersecting Lines : Two lines l and m
4. Conclusion : In this, what is required to are called intersecting lines if they have a
be proved is particularly mentioned using common poiunt P. The common point P
the names in the figure, if necessary. is called the point of intersection.
5. Construction : In some theorems, the
figure drawn as per general enunciation
may not be sufficient to proved the
theorem. Then, we may be required to add
some more details like lines, angles etc.
Such additional details drawn is called

ANCE 108
 Geometry

Line Ray Line segm ent

(i) A line AB is a represented A ray AB is represented as A line segment AB is
by represented by
A B
A B
A B
(ii) A line has no end point A ray has one end point A line segment has two end
points.
(iii) A line does not have a A ray does not have a definite A line segment has a definite
definite length. length. length.
(iv) W e can simply represent W e can simply represent a A line segment of a given length
a line i.e. a line can not be ray i.e. a ray can not be can be drawn on a paper.
drawn on a paper drawn on a paper

 Parallel lines : Two lines in a plane are 3. Obtuse angle : It is an angle which is
parallel if they do not intersect each other more than 90° but less than 180°.
however far they are produced in either 4. Straight angle : It is an angle which is
direction. m equal to 180° i.e., equal to radians.
l
5. Reflex angle : It is an angle which is
greater then 180° but less than 360°.
6. Complementary angles : Two angles
are said to be complementary if their sum
is 90°.
7. Supplementary angles : Two angles are
Concurrent Lines said to be supplementary if their sum is 180°.
Three or more lines in a plane are said to 8. Adjacent angles : These are the angles
be concurrent if they all pass through the which have one arm is common and non
same point. The point O is called the common arms are on the opposite side
point of concurrency. of the common arm.
n
m 9. Vertically opposite angles : If two
straight line AB and CD intersect at a
O l point, 1 and 3 and 2 and 4 are
vertically opposite angles.
A D
2
 Angle : It is the spatial relationship 1 3
O
between two straight lines. 4
C B
P
vertex Transversal
side
O angle The line which intersect two parallel line
side is called transversal.
R
Various Types of Angles 2 1
3 4
1. Acute angle : It is an angle which is less
than 90° i.e., less then /2 radians. 6 5
7 8
2. Right angle : It is an angle which is equal
to 90° i.e., equal to radians.

ANCE 109
 Geometry
Interior angles : In the diagram 3, Nam e of F ig u res

Number of

Number of

Number of
diagonals
p o ly g o n

vertices
4,5 and 6 are interior angles.

sides
Exterior angles : 1,2 ,7 and 8
are exterior angles. 3 T rian g le 3 0

Corresponding angles : 1 and 5;

4 and 8; 2 and 6; 3 and 7 4 Q u ad rilateral 4 2
are pairs of corresponding angles.
Pairs of corresponding angles are equal.
1 = 5; 4 = 8; 2 = 6; 5 P en tag o n 5 5
3 = 7

Alternate angles : 3 and 5; 4 and 6 H ex a g o n 6 9

6 are pairs of alternate angles.
Pairs of alternate angles are equal.
7 H ep tag o n 7 14
3 = 5; 4 = 6 (alternate
interior angles)
8 O ctag o n 8 20
1 = 7; 2 = 8 (alternate
exterior angles)
Sum of consecutive interior angles in the 9 N o n ag o n 9 27

same side of transversal is 180°

3 + 6 = 180° 10 D eca g o n 10 35
4 + 5 = 180°
(Sum of consecutive interior angles in the
same side of transversal is 180°) Number Name of the Sum of
The ratio of intersects made by three of sides Polygon interior angles
3 Triangles 180 º
parallel lines on a transversal is equal to (3 ­ 2) × 180º
ratio of corresponding intercept made by = 180º
same parallel lines to other transversal.
s t

l 4 Quadrilaterals 2 × 180º
A P
(4 – 2) × 180 º
m = 360 º
B Q
n 5 5 sided 3 × 180º
C R
Polygons (5 – 2) × 180 º
s and t are transversals intersecting three = 540 º
parallel lines, l, m and n at A, B, C and
AB PQ
P, Q, R respectively.   6 6 sided 4 × 180º
BC QR Polygons (6 – 2) × 180 º
= 720 º
Recognising and Naming Polygons A
polygon is a closed figure in a plane that
has three or more straight lines as its …..n n – gon (n ­2) × 180º
sides.

ANCE 110
 Geometry
Note : The sum of interior angles of a polygon
of n equal sides is (2n – 4) right angles.
Each interior angle of a regular polygon
of n equal sides is equal t o
[(2n – 4) × 90]  n degrees.
The sum of exterior angles of a polygon
of n sides = 4 right angles.
Each exterior angle of regular polygon
of n sides is equal to 360/n degrees.

A simple closed a figure bounded by three

line segments is called a triangle.
A

C
B

 Parts of a triangle :
A triangle has six parts or elements,
namely;

(i) Three sides : AB, BC and CA. Properties of Triangles

(ii) Three angles : BAC, ABC and
BCA , writt en for t he sake of 1. Sum of three angles of a triangle of a
convenience as A, B and C triangle is 180.
respectively denoting the interior angles 2. Sum of lengths of any two sides of a
of the triangle. triangle is greater than the third side.
3. The difference of lengths of any two sides
of a triangle is less than the third side.
4. The exterior angle of a triangle is Sum of
the opposite two interior angles.
5. The side opposite to the greater angle of
a triangle is greater.
6. The side opposite to the smaller angle of
a triangle is smaller.

Similarity of Triangles
1. An gle - An gle - An gle ( AAA)
Similarity : Two triangles are similar if
the coprresponding angles are equal.

ANCE 111
 Geometry
2. Side - Side - Side (SSS) Similarity : Properties of Quadrilateral
Two t riangles are similar if the A quadrilateral is convex, if for any side
coprresponding sides are proportional. of the quadrilateral, the lines containing it
3. Side - Angle - Side (SAS) Similarity : has the remaining vertices on the same
If one angle of a triangle is equal to one side of it.
angle of the other and the sides including The sum of the angles of a quadrilateral
is equal angle are proportional, then the is 360°.
triangles are similar. If the sides of a quadrilateral are
produced, in order, the sum of the four
Median of a Triangle
exterior angles so formed is 360°.
The line segment joining a vertex of a
triangle to the mid point of the opposite
side is called a median of the triangle.  Trapezium :
AD, BE and CF are medians A quadrilateral in which one pair of
(i) Intersecting point of the medians of a opposite sides are parallel is called
triangle is called the centroid. Point O is trapezium.
centroid. In quadrilateral (ABCD), AB||DC
(ii) Centroid divide the median in the ratio D C
2 : 1. OA : OD = 2 : 1
(iii) Median bisects the opposite side.
BD = CD
A B
Thus, ABCD is a trapezium.
 Parallelogram :
A quadrilateral is a parallelogram if and
only if a pair of its opposite sides is
parallel and of equal length.

Quadrilateral Properties of Parallelogram

A closed figure with four sides is called Opposite sides of a parallelogram are
quadrilateral. equal.
Quadrilateral ABCD has : Opposite angles of a parallelogram are
equal.
D C
Diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each
other.
Adjacent angles of a prallelogram are
A supplimentary.
D C
B
(i) Four sides : AB, BC, CD and DA.
(ii) Four vertices : A, B, C and D.
O
(iii) Four angles : A, B, C and D
(iv) Two diagonals : AC and BD. A B

ANCE 112
 Geometry
ABCD is parallelogram, then  Square :
(i) AB || DC, AD||BC A parallelogram is a square if and only if
(ii) AB = CD, AD = BC its digonals are equal and perpendicular
(iii) OA = OC, OB = OD and bisect each other.
 Rhombus :
Properties of Square
A parallelogram is a rhombus if and only
if its diagonals are perpendicular and All the ratio of sides of a square are equal
bisect each other. Each of the angles is a right angle in
Properties of Rhombus square.
All the sides of a rhombus are equal. The diagonals of a square are of equal
ABCD is rhombus length.
 AB = BC = CD = AD The diagonals of a square bisect each
other at right angle.
D C

A B
ABCD is a square
OA = OC Diagonals AC = BD
OB = OD Diagonals AC and BD bisect each other
1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 90° at 90°.
 Rectangle : Reactangle, Rhombus and Square : At a glance
A parallelogram is a rectangle if and only D C
if its diagonals have equal length. Parallelogram

A B
Properties of Rectangle
All the angles of a rectangle are right C
D C D
angles.
Rectangle Rhombus
Diagonals of a rectangle are equal and
A B A B
bisect each other. A = B = C = D = 90° AB = BC = CD = DA
ABCD is a rectangle  1 = 2 = 3
D C
= 4 = 90° AB = BC = CD = DA
Square
AB = CD and AB || DC A = B = C = D = 90°
A B
AD = BC and AD || BC
D C
4 3 A circle is a simple closed curve, all the
points of which are at the same distance
from a given fixed point. They remain
1 2
constant.
A B For example : Wheels, the sun, the moon,
Diagonals AC and BD bisect each other. one-rupee coin.

ANCE 113
 Geometry

 Segments of Circle : A chord divides

P the circle into two parts. Each part is a
segment of the circle.

Radius
(i) Smaller region is known as minor
O
segment.
A B
Diameter (ii) Larger region is known as major
Ch segment.
ord
(iii) Angle in the minor segment is Obtuse.
R
(iv) Angle in the major segment is Acute.
 Centre : The fixed point in the plane
which is equidistant from every point on  Secant of a circle : The line which
the boundary of the circle is called centre. intersects the circle at two points is
In the adjoining figure, O is the centre of known as Secant of a circle.
the circle.  Tangent of a circle : The line which
 Radius : The fixed distance between the touches the circle at one point is known
centre and any point of the circle is called as Tangent of a circle.
radius. In figure OP is radius.  Common Tangents to Two Circles : A
 Chord : A line segment joining any two line which touches two given circles is
points on a circle is called a chord of the called a common tangents to the circles.
circle. In figure, AR is a chord.  Concentric Circles : Circles with one
 Diameter : A chord that passes through common centre are known as concentric
the centre of a circle is called diameter circles.
of the circle. In figure, AB is a diameter..  Congruent Circles : Circles of same
The length of a diameter = 2 × radius. In radii are called congruent circles.
a circle, diameter is the longest chord.
 Concyclic Points : Points are said to
 Circumference : The distance around a be concylic, if these lie on one circle.
circle is called the circumference.
Circumference of a circle is the perimeter  Cyclic Quadrilateral : It is a
of that circle. quadrilateral whose all the four vertices
lie on a circle.
 Arc : A part of a circumference is called
an arc. In the above figure, the curve line  Congruent Arcs : Two arcs of a circle
AR is an arc of the circle. It is written as are congruent if and only if the angles
AR. subtended by them at the centre are equal.
Also if the arcs are congruent, then
 Sector of a circle : It is the area of the their corresponding chords are equal and
circle enclosed by two radii OA and OB vice-versa.
and by an arc AB of the circle. In the
diagram, sector is the indicated portion.  Incircle and Incentre : The circle which
touches all the sides of a triangle is called
the incircle of the triangle. Incentre is the
O
Sector
point of concurrence of three angles
A B bisectors of the triangle.

ANCE 114
 Geometry

 Circumcircle and Circumcentre : The C

circle which passes through all the M
vertices of a triangle is called the D
circumcircle of the triangle and its centre O
is called the circumcentre of the triangle. B
Circumcentre is the point of concurrence L
of right bisectors of three sides of the A
triangle.
5. Equal chords of a circle subtend equal
 Centroid : It is the point common to all angles at the centre.
the medians of a triangle and it divides a Chords of a circle which subtend equal
median in the ratio 2 : 1. Centroid is also angles at the centre are equal.
called the Centre of Gravity of the
triangle. D

 Orthocentre : It is t he point of C
concurrence of three altitudes i.e.,
O
perpendiculars from vertices to their
opposite sides of a triangle. A

Properties of a Circle B
1. One and only one circle can passes If AB = CD  AOB = COD
through three non-collinear pionts. If AOB = COD  AB = CD
2. In a circle perpendicular drawn from the 6. The angle subtended by an arc of a circle
centre to a chord bisects the chord. at the center is twice the angle subtended
by the arc at any other point on the
3. In a circle; if a line joining mid point of a remaining part of
chord to the centre is perpendicular to the circle.
the chord.
AOB = 2ACB
C
O

O
A
A M B

B
If M is the mid point of X
AB  OM  AB.
7. A quadrilateral is called cyclic if all the
If OM  AB AM = MB. four vertices lie on a circle. And the four
4. Equal chords of a circle are equidistant vertices are called the concyclic points.
from the centre. 8. Sum of opposite internal angles of a
Chords equidistant from the centre are cyclic quadrilateral is 180°.
equal in length. ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral
If AB = CD  OL = OM  A + C = 180° and
If OL = OM  AB = CD            B + D = 180°.

ANCE 115
 Geometry
D 12. The lengths of the two tangents from an
C external point to a circle are equal.
B

A
O
B A
OA = OB
If in a quadrilateral sum of opposite
angles is 180° then the quadrilateral is a Common Tangents to Circles
cyclic quadrilateral.
When two circles are drawn on the same
9. An angle in a semi-circle is a right angle. plane with radii r1 and r2, with their
AB is the diameter. centres d units apart, then we have the
C
following possibilities.
1. The two circles are concentric, then
d = 0. The points C1 and C2 coincide.
A O B
r2

r1
 ACB is angle of semicircle.
 ACB = 90°
10. Angles in the same segment of a circle
are equal.
2. The two circles are such that one lies in
Arc AB subtends ACB and ADB is
side the other, then | r1 – r2 | > d.
the same segment
r2

D C R

C1 d C2 r1

A B
X
 ACB = ADB 3. The two circles may touch each other
11. The tangent line at any point of a cirlce is internally, then d = | r1– r2 |
perpendicular to the radius through the
point of contact.
C1 C2
d r1

r2

ANCE 116
 Geometry
4. The two circles intersect at two points, in (ii), we notice that the two circles lie on
which case, | r1– r2 | < d < r1 + r2 and d. either side of PQ. Here PQ is a transverse
common tangent.
r1 r2

C1 C2
d

5. The two circles may touch each other

externally, then d = r1 + r2

r1 r2
C1 C2 1. The number of common tangents to the
circles one lying inside the other is zero.
6. The two circles do not meet each other,
then d > r1 + r2
d C1

r1 r2 C2
C1 C2
2. The number of common tangents to two
circles touching internally is one.
 Common tangent:
If the same line is tangent to two circles
drawn on the same plane, then the line is
called a common tangent to the circles. C2
The distance between the point of
contacts is called the length of the
common tangent.
In the figure, PQ is a common tangent to C1
the circle, C1 and C2 . The length of PQ
is the length of the common tangent. 3. The number of common tangents to two
In figure (i), we observe that both the intersecting circles is two, i.e., two direct
circles lie on the same side of PQ. In this common tangents.
case, PQ is a direct common tangent and
in figure
Direct common tangent
C1 C2
P Q

4. The number of common tangents to two

C1 C2 circles touching externally is three, i.e.,
two direct tangents and one transverse
figure (i) tangent.

ANCE 117
 Geometry
Case (ii)
The given two circles with centres C 1
and C2 touch each other externally at P.
C 1 PC2 is the line joining the centres of
C1 the circles and XY is the common tangent
C2
to the two circles drawn at P.
X

5. The number of common tangents to non-

intersecting circles is four, i.e.2 direct P
C1 C2
tangents and 2 transverse tangents

Y
C2  C 1 C 2 is perpendicular to XY..
C1 2. The direct common tangents to two
circles of equal radii are parallel to each
other.
P Q

r r

Properties of Common Tangents C1 C2

1. When two circles touch each other

internally or externally, then the line joining
R S
the centres is perpendicular to the tangent Let two circles of equal radii ‘r’ have
drawn at the point of contact of the two centres C 1 and C 2 and PQ and RS be
circles. the direct common tangents drawn to the
Case (i) circles. Then PQ is parallel to RS.
Two circles with centres C1 and C2 touch
each other internally at point P. C1 C2 P is
1. Match list-I with list-II and select the
the line drawn through the centres and XY
correct answer using the codes given below
is the common tangent drawn at P which
the lists :
is common tangent to both the circles.
List I List II
X
(a) Opposite sides (i) Rectangle
equal and parallel
(b) Opposite sides equal (ii) Square
P and all angle 90°
C2 C1
(c) All sides equal and (iii) Rhombus
all angle 90°
(d) All sides equal and (iv) Parallelogram
Y
diagonals at right
 C1 C2 is perpendicular to X Y angles

ANCE 118
 Geometry
(A) (a)  (iv), (b)  (i), (c)  (iii), (d)  (ii) 7. ABCD is a parallelogram of area S. E and
(B) (a)  (iv), (b)  (i), (c)  (ii), (d)  (iii) F are the middle points of the sides AD
(C) (a)  (iii), (b)  (iv), (c)  (ii), (d)  (i) and BC respectively. If G is any point on
(D) (a)  (ii), (b)  (iv), (c)  (i), (d)  (iii) the line EF, then the area of AGB is equal
to -
2. If ABCD is a parallelogram with the
diagonals intersecting at O, then the number S S
(A) (B)
of distinct pairs of congruent triangles 2 3
formed is - S 3S
(A) 7 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 4 (C) (D)
4 4
3. Consider the following quadrilaterals
8. ABCD is a rectangle. The quadrilateral
(a) Rectangle
PQRS formed by the bisectors of the angles
(b) Square of ABCD will be a -
(c) Parallelogram (A) Rectangle
(d) Rhombus (B) Square
The length of the two diagonals will be equal (C) Trapezium
in respect of -
(D) Cyclic quadrilateral
(A) (a) and (b)
(B) (b) and (c) 9. The ratio of two unequal sides of a rectangle
(C) (c) and (d) is 1 : 2. If its perimeter is 24, then the
(D) (d) and (a) length of a diagonal is -
2 4
4. If PQRS is a square and M is the mid- (A) (B)
point of PQ, then - 5 5
(A) SM = RM (C) 2 5 (D) 4 5
(B) SM = MP + PS
10. In a trapezium ABCD, AB is parallel to
(C) SM = MQ + MR
CD and the diagonals intersect each other
(D) SM  MR
at O. In this case, the ratio OA/OC is equal
5. ABCD is a parallelogram and E is the mid- to -
point of DC, F is the mid-point of AB. If OB BC
BE and DF meet AC in M and L (A) (B)
OD CD
respectively, then LM is equal to -
AD AC
AC AC (C) (D)
(A) (B) AB BD
4 3
11. If the length of a side of a rhombus is 13
AC 2AC
(C) (D) cm and one of its diagonals is of length 24
2 3 cm, then the area of the rhombus is -
6. ABCD is a square with centre O. If X is (A) 240 cm2 (B) 156 cm2
on the side CD such that DX = DO, then (C) 130 cm2 (D) 120 cm2
DOX
is - 12. If in a quadrilateral ABCD, the diagonals
XOC AC and BD bisect each other at O, then -
3 7 Assertion (A) : ABCD is necessarily a
(A) (B) 3 (C) (D) 4 square.
2 2

ANCE 119
 Geometry
Reason (R) : Triangles AOD and BOC are 18. If E, F, G and H are the mid-point of the
congruent. sides AB, BC, CD and AD of any
(A) A and R are true, R is correct quadrilateral ABCD, then which one of the
explaination of A following is not correct?
(B) A and R are true, R is not correct (A) EF and GH are parallel
explaination of A (B) The area of EFGH is half of the area
(C) A is true and R is false of the original quadrilateral
(D) A is false and R is true (C) The sum of the areas of BEF and DGH
is one-fourth of the area of the original
13. ABCD is a trapezium where AB and CD quadrilateral
are non-parallel sides. If the vertices A, B, (D) EG and FH intersect each other at right-
C and D are concyclic, then - angles
(A) AB is also parallel to CD
19. ABCD is parallelogram and E is the middle
1 point of side AD. EC meets BD at O. If
(B) AB  CD
2 the area of the parallelogram is 24 units,
1 then the area of EOD is
(C) AB  CD
2 (A) 4 units (B) 3 units
(D) AB = CD (C) 2 units (D) 1 units
14. Let ABCD be a parallelogram and ABEF 20. The adjacent sides of a parallelogram are
be a rectangle with EF lying along the line 2a and a. If the angle between them is 60°,
CD. If AB = 7 cm and BE = 6.5 cm, then then one of the diagonals of t he
the area of the parallelogram is - parallelogram is -
(A) 22.75 cm2 (B) 11.375 cm2 (A) 3a (B) 2a (C) 3 a (D) 5 a
(C) 45.5 cm2 (D) 45.0 cm2
21. The diagonals of a rectangle ABCD cut at
15. If the sum of the diagonals of a rhombus is O. OAL is an equilateral triangle drawn
12 cm and its perimeter is 8 5 cm, then so that B and L are on the same side of
the lengths of the diagonals are - AC. If ACD = 30°, then the angles of
(A) 6 cm and 6 cm ALB are -
(B) 7 cm and 5 cm (A) 60°, 60° and 60°
(C) 8 cm and 4 cm (B) 30°, 30° and 120°
(D) 9 cm and 3 cm (C) 30°, 60° and 90°
(D) not determinable from the given data
16. If the area of a parallelogram with sides x
and y is  and that of a rectangle with sides 22. In the adjoining figure, ABCD is a trapezium
x and y is , then - in which AB||DC and AB = 2 DC. Then
the ratio of the area of AOB and COD
(A)    (B)    is -
(C)    (D)   
17. ABCD is a parallelogram. If P be a point
on CD such that AP = AD, then the measure
of PAB + BCD is -
(A) 180° (B) 225° (A) 3 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 240° (D) 135° (C) 4 : 1 (D) 3 : 2

ANCE 120
 Geometry
23. ABCD is a quadrilateral, AM, CN are 29. In a triangle ABC, point D is on side AB
perpendicular to BD and AM = CN and and point E is on side AC, such that BCED
diagonals AC and BD intersect at O, then is a traezium and DE : BC = 3 : 5. Calculate
which one of the following is correct? the ratio of the area of ADE and the
(A) AO = OC (B) BO = OD trapezium BCED -
(C) AO = BO (D) CO = DO (A) 3 : 4 (B) 9 : 16
24. If ABCD is a rhombus, then - (C) 3 : 5 (D) 9 : 25
(A) AC2 + BD2 = 6 AB2 30. In ABC, P and Q are the mid-point of
(B) AC2 + BD2 = 5 AB2 AB and AC, PQ is produced to R such
(C) AC2 + BD2 = 4 AB2 that PQ = QR, then PRCB is -
(D) AC2 + BD2 = 3 AB2 (A) rectangle (B) square
25. If an angle of a parallelogram is four-fifth of (C) rhombus (D) parallelogram
its adjacent angle, what is the smaller angle 31. The diagonal BD of parallelogram
of the parallelogram? ABCD intersects the segment AE at point
(A) 100° (B) 80° (C) 65° (D) 60° F, where E is any point on BC and
(DF × EF) : (FB × FA) is -
26. A rectangle and a parallelogram have equal
areas. The base of the parallelogram is 20 (A) 1 (B) AB : DC
cm and the altitude is 6 cm. Which one of (C) DC : AB (D) AB : DE
the following cannot be the ratio of 32. In the given figure, AD||BC. Find the value
dimensions of the rectangle? (The dimensions of x
are of integral values)
(A) 7 : 5 (B) 40 : 3
(C) 15 : 2 (D) 30 : 1
27. The angles of a quadrilateral are in the ratio
1 : 2 : 3 : 4, what is the difference between (A) x = 8, 9 (B) x = 7, 8
the largest and the smallest angles? (C) x = 8, 10 (D) none of these
 2 3 4 33. In the adjoining figure, ABCD is a trapezium
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 5 5 in which AB||DC and AB = 3 DC.
Determine the ratio of the areas of AOB
28. In the given figure, ABC and BCD and COD -
are right angle triangles and AB = x cm, (A) 9 : 1 (B) 1 : 9
BC = y cm, CD = z cm and xy = z and x, (C) 3 : 1 (D) 1 : 3
y and z has minimum integral value. Find
the area of ABCD - 34. In a trapezium ABCD, AB||CD and
AD = BC. If P is point of intersection of
diagonals AC and BD, then all of the
following is wrong except -
(A) PA.PB = PC.PD
(B) PA.PC = PB.PD
(A) 36 cm2 (B) 64 cm2 (C) PA.AB = PD.DC
(C) 24 cm2 (D) 25 cm2 (D) none of these

ANCE 121
 Geometry

AO DO 1
35. In the given figure   and
OC OB 2
AD = 4 cm. Find the value of BC

(A) 4 2 (B) 5
(C) 3.5 (D) none of these
(A) 7 cm (B) 8 cm 39. In the given figure, ABCD is a parallelogram
(C) 9 cm (D) none of these in which DAB = 75° and DBC = 60°
then, BDC is equal to -
36. In the adjoining figure, ABCd is a rectangle.
The area of the isosceles right triangle
ABE = 7 cm2, EC = 3 (BE). Then the area
of ABCD (in cm2) is -

(A) 75° (B) 60°

(C) 45° (D) 55°
40. If ABCD is a quadrilateral such that its
diagonals AC and BD intersect at O to
form four triangles equal in area, then
(A) 21 (B) 28 ABCD must be a -
(C) 42 (D) 56 (A) parallelogram (B) rhombus
37. In the adjoining diagram, ABCD is a (C) square (D) rectangle
rectangle with AE = EF = FB. What is the 41. ABCD is a quadrilateral in which
ratio of the area of the triangle CEF and A = 70°, B = 90° and C = 100°.
that of the rectangle? How many points in the plane P of the
quadrilateral are there such that P is
equidistant from its vertices?
(A) None (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 3
42. If ABCD is a parallelogram and E, F are
the centroids of s ABD and BCD
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1 : 6 respectively, then EF equals -
(C) 2 : 5 (D) 2 : 3 (A) AE (B) BE
(C) CE (D) DE
38. In the given figure, EADF is a rectangle
and ABC is a triangle. Whose vertices lie 43. If an angle of a parallelogram is two-third
on the sides of EADF. AE = 22, BE = 6, of its adjacent angle, the smallest angle of
CF = 16 and BF = 2. Find the length of the parallelogram is -
the line joining the mid point of the sides (A) 108° (B) 54°
AB and BC - (C) 72° (D) 81°

ANCE 122
 Geometry

44. In the given figure, P is the mid-point of BC (A) 2 sq. units (B) 3 sq. units
and E is the mid-point of AB.AD, BC and 3
(C) sq. units (D) 1 sq. unit
EF are parallel to each other. If the area of 2
the triangle ABP is 4 sq. units, the area of 45. ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral whose
the triangle ECD is - diagonals intersect at E. If BEA = 80°,
DBC = 60° and BCD = 40°, which of
the following statements is true?
(A) BD bisects ADC
(B) AB = BC
(C) DA = DC
(D) AC bisects BCD

1. In the following figure, O is the centre of 4. In the below diagram, if the angle between
the circle. If BAC = 60°, then OBC = two chords AB and AC is 65°, then the
angle between two tangents which are
drawn at B and C is -

(A) 120° (B) 30°

(C) 40° (D) 60°
2. In the figure below (not to scale),
AB = CD and AB and CD are produced
to meet at the point P. If BAC = 70°, (A) 50° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D) 40°
then find P - 5. In the below diagram, O is the centre of the
circle and AMB = 120°, find the angle
between the two tangents AP and BP -

(A) 30° (B) 40° (C) 45° (D) 50°

3. PT and PS are the tangents to the
circle with centre O. If TPS = 65°, then
OTS = (A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 70° (D) 60°
6. If ABCD is a square inscribed in a circle
and PA is a tangent, then the angle between
the lines P1A and P1B is -

(A) 32° (B) 45°

1 1
(C) 57  (D) 32 
2 2

ANCE 123
 Geometry

(A) 30° (B) 20°

(C) 40° (D) 45°
7. In the diagram below, if l and m are two
tangents and AB is a chord making an angle
of 60° with the tangent l, then the angle
between l and m is - (A) 55° (B) 27½°
(C) 82½° (D) 45°
11. AR and BS are the tangents to the circle,
with centre O, touching at P and Q
respectively and PQ is the chord. If
OQP = 25°, then RPQ = _____

(A) 45° (B) 30°

(C) 60° (D) 90°

8. In the below figure (not to scale), PA

and PB are equal chords and ABCD is
a cyclic quadrilateral. If DCE = 80°,
DAP = 30° then find APB - (A) 100° (B) 115°
(C) 150° (D) 90°
12. In the diagram below, if
BCP1 = ABQ = 60°, then the triangle
ABC is -
(A) 40° (B) 80°
(C) 90° (D) 160°
9. In the below diagram, O is the centre of
the circle and if OAB = 30°, then the
acute angle bewteen AB and the tangent
PQ at B is -
(A) scalene (B) equilateral
(C) right angled (D) acute angled
13. In the following figure, AQ is a tangent
to the circle at A. If ACB = 60°, then
BAQ -

(A) 30° (B) 60°

(C) 45° (D) 90°
10. In the below figure, AB = OB and CT is
the tangent to the circle at O. If (A) 30° (B) 60°
COA = 125°, then OAB is - (C) 120° (D) 45°

ANCE 124
 Geometry
14. In the below diagram, two circles X and Y 18. In the given figure, AB||CD, CD||EF
with centres A and B respectively intersect and BC||DE. Find DEG given that
at C and D. The radii AC and AD of circle BCD = 60°
X are tangents to the circle Y. Radii BC
and BD of circle Y are tangents to the circle
X . Find AEC -

(A) 60° (B) 120°

(C) 90° (D) 150°
19. In the given figure, ACD = 130° and
AC = BC. Find the respectively values of
(A) 45° the angles A, B and C of the triangle -
(B) 60°
(C) 90°
(D) Cannot be determined
15. The tangent A touches a circle, with centre
O, at the point P. If the radius of the circle (A) 60°, 60°, 60°
is 5 cm, OB = 10 cm and OB = AB, then (B) 65°, 60°, 55°
find AP - (C) 80°, 50°, 50°
(A) 5 3 cm (B) 10 5 cm (D) 65°, 65°, 50°
20. In triangle ABC, medians AD and BE
 5 
(C) (10  5 3 ) cm (D) 10   cm drawn to sides BC and CA respectively
 3 meet at point G. What is the ratio of areas
16. In the given figure, lines m and n are parallel of quadrilateral GDCE and triangle ABC?
and 8 is 100° greather than 1. Find the (A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
measures of all the angles from 1 to 8. (C) 3 : 1 (D) 1 : 3
21. In a quadrilateral ABCD. CAB is equal
to DAC and BCA is equal to ACD.
Find the area of triangle ACD given
that the area of qudrilateral ABCD is
36 sq. cm.
(A) 1 = 3 = 5 = 7 = 40° (A ) 18 cm2
(B) 2 = 4 = 6 = 8 = 140° (B) 9 cm2
(C) both (A) and (B) (C) 36 cm2
(D) None of the above (D) cannot be determined
17. If an angle is eight times its complementary 22. Points D and E are taken on sides AB and
angle, then the measurement of the AC of triangle ABC such that DB = 5AD
angle is - and EC = 5 AE. If BC = 18 cm, find the
(A) 30° (B) 40° (C) 80° (D) 60° length of DE -

ANCE 125
 Geometry
(A) 9 cm (B) 18 cm 32. If D is any point on the side BC of ABC
(C) 6 cm (D) 3 cm such that ADB and ADC are equal in
area, then -
23. G is the centroid of the triangle ABC (A) AD is the median
where AB = 12 cm, BC = 5 cm and
AC = 13 cm. Find the length of BG - (B) AD is the altitude
(A) 3.25 cm (B) 4.33 cm (C) AD is an angle bisector
(D) AD is any line
(C) 6.5 cm (D) 13 cm
33. ABC is an isosceles triangle with
24. If two altitudes of a triangle are equal in
AB = AC = 5 and BC = 6. If G is the
length. Then the triangle is -
centroid of ABC, then AG is equal to -
(A) right angled (B) equilateral
(C) isosceles (D) scalene 1 2 4 8
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 3 3 3
25. The sum of the exterior angles of a
hexagon is - 34. In the given figure, AD, BF and CE are
(A) 360° (B) 540° (C) 720° (D) none medians of a triangle ABC and O is a point
of concurrence of medians. If AD = 6 cm,
26. In any triangle the centroid divides the then OD is equal to -
median in the ratio -
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 3 : 1 (D) 3 : 2
27. Find the interior angle and exterior angle of
regular pentagon -
(A) 100°, 80° (B) 120°, 60°
(C) 125°, 45° (D) 108°, 72° (A) 2 cm (B) 3 cm
28. Two tangents AB, AC are drawn to a circle 2
with centre ‘O’ and radius 3 cm from a (C) 4 cm (D) cm
3
point. A lying outside the circle. Find AO
given that the area of the triangle ABO is 35. In triangle ABC, the sum of ACD and
6 sq cm. - EAC is 240°. Find B and C
respectively -
(A) 4 cm (B) 5 cm
(C) 4 2 cm (D) 5 2 cm
29. If one angle of a triangle equals the sum of
the other two angles, the triangle must be -
(A) scalene (B) right angled
(C) obtuse angled (D) acute angled
30. Two parallel chords of equal length of 12 (A) 65°, 75° (B) 70°, 60°
cm are drawn in a circle of radius 10 cm. (C) 60°, 70° (D) 55°, 75°
Find the distance between the chords - 36. The sum of all the angles of a pentagon
(A) 16 cm (B) 8 cm are -
(C) 12 cm (D) 24 cm (A) 360° (B) 540°
31. If in triangles PQR and LMN, (C) 720° (D) none of these
P = M = 60°, PQ : ML = PR : MN 37. The angle that is three times as large as its
and N = 55°, then Q is - complement is -
(A) 50° (B) 55° (C) 65° (D) 75° (A) 135° (B) 67.5° (C) 50.5° (D) 45°

ANCE 126
 Geometry
38. If one angle of the parallelogram is 16° less (C) 135°, 45° (D) 108°, 72°
than three times the smallest angle, then the 43. In the figure, ABCD is a square with side
largest angle of the parallelogram is - 5 cm, find the area of triangle BDE given
(A) 131° (B) 136° (C) 112° (D) 108° that C is the centre of the straight line BE
39. If G is the centroid of an equilateral triangle
ABC of side 5 cm, find the length of A.G.
5
(A) cm (B) 5 3 cm
3
(C) 5 cm (D) 4 cm
40. Find the area of an equilateral triangle that
can be inscribed in a circle of radius 10 cm (A) 25 cm2 (B) 50 cm2
200 400 (C) 50 2 cm 2 (D) 40 cm2
(A) (B) (C) 200 3 (D) 400 3
3 3
41. Find the approximate value of A in 44. A rhombus and a square have the same
ABC is 8A = 9, B = 4C base. If the diagonals of the rhombus
(A) 70° (B) 74° (C) 81° (D) 85° measure 8 cm, 6 cm respectively, find the
area of the square -
42. Find the interior angle and exterior angle of
a regular octagon (A) 100 cm2 (B) 25 cm2
(A) 90°, 90° (B) 120°, 60° (C) 50 cm2 (D) 40 cm2

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . B D A A B B C D D A
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . D D D C C A A D C C
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . B C A C B A C A B D
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . A A A A B D B B C A
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45
Ans . A A C A D

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . B B D A D D C B B B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B B B C C C C B D D
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . A D B C A B D B B A
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . A A D A C B B A A B
Q.No. 41 42 43 44
Ans . B C A B

ANCE 127
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Consider two lines, one vertical and the Q(x2 .y2)

(0,y2)
other horizontal in a plane. Let the horizontal y2 – y1
line be named as x-axis and the vertical line (x1,y1) P
(0,y1)
be named as y-axis. We take the point of x2 – x1 R
intersection of the axes as origin (O). O (x1,0) (x2,0)
xy > 0 represent I and III quadrants Example - 1
xy < 0, represent II and IV quadrants The distance between two points (0, 0) and
5 (x, 3) is 5. Find x.
B(–3, 4) 4 Quadrant 1 Solution :
Quadrant 2 3 x > 0, y > 0 By using distance formula, we have the
x < 0, y > 0 A (1,2)
2 distance between (0, 0) and (x, 3) is
1
(x – 0) 2  (3 – 0) 2
O
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 1 2 3 4 5
It is given that (x – 0) 2  (3 – 0) 2 = 5 or
Quadrant 3 –2
Quadrant 4
–3
x < 0, y < 0
C(–5, –3)
x > 0, y < 0 x 2  32 = 5
–4
–5 D(3, –5) Squaring both sides, x2 + 9 = 25 or x2 = 16
or x = ±4
Any point P in the plane that is formed by Hence, x = +4 or x = –4
the x-axis and y-axis can be located by Example - 2
using an ordered pair of real numbers. If Find a if the distance between the points
(x, y) is the ordered pair representing as P(11, –2) and Q (a, 1) is 5 units.
point P, then x, the distance of the point Solution :
from y-axis is called the x-coordinate of P Given, PQ = 5
and y, the distance of the point from x-axis  (a – 1) 2  (1 – (–2)) 2 = 5
is called the y-coordinate of P. The x- Taking square on both sides, we get
coordinate of a point is also known as (a – 11)2 = 25 – 9 = 16
abscissa, while the y-coordinate is also
a – 11 = 16
known as ordinate.
a – 11 = ± 4
a = 15 or 7
The distance between two points P(x1, y1)
and Q(x2, y2) is given by
1. Collinearity of three points :
PQ  ( x 2  x1 ) 2  ( y 2  y1 ) 2
Let A, B and C be three given points. The
i.e., PQ distances AB, BC and CA can be calculated
= (Diff. of abcissas) 2  (Diff . of ordinates )2 using distance formula. If the sum of any
two of these distances is found to be equal
The distance of a point P(x1, y1) from the
to the third distance, then the points A, B
origin is given by OP = x12  y12 and C will be collinear.

ANCE 128
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Note :  The required circumcentre of ABC is

1. If AB + BC = AC, then the points A, B (11, 2).
and C are collinear.
Circumradius = SA = (11 – 1) 2  (2 – 2) 2
A B C
= 10 units.
2. IF AC + CB = AB, then the points A, C
Example - 4
and B are collinear.
Find the area of the circle whose centre is
A C B (–3, 2) and (2, 5) is a point on the circle.
3. If BA + AC = BC, then the points B, A Solution :
and C are collinear.
The centre of the circle is A (–3, 2) and the
B A C point on circumference is B (2, 5).
By Note (1), (2) and (3), we can find the Radius of the circle =
position of points in collinearity.
AB = (2  3) 2  (5 – 2) 2 = 25  9
Example - 3
The vertices of a ABC are A (1, 2), r= 34 units.
B (3, –4) and C(5, –6). Find its  The area of circle = r2.
circumcenter and circumradius.
B(2, 5)
Solution :
Let S (x, y) be the circumcentre of ABC
A(–3, 2)
 SA2 = SB2 = SC2
Consider
SA2 = SB2 = ( 34 )2 = 34 sq. units.
 (x–1)2 + (y–2)2 = (x–3)2 + (y + 4)2
x2 – 2x + 1 + y2 – 4y + 4
= x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 + 8y + 16 The coordinates of a point P which divides
– 2x – 4y + 1 + 4 the join of tw o points A (x 1, y1) and
= – 6x + 9 + 8y + 16 B (x2, y2) can be found using section
4x – 12y – 20 = 0 ...(i) formulae. The division is said to be a case
A (1,2)
of internal division if the point P lies on the
line segment AB and a case of external
division if the point P lies on the extension
of the line segment AB.
S (x,y)
The coordinates of a point P(x, y) dividing
the join of the points A(x1, y1) and
B (3,-4) C (5,-6) B (x2, y2).
SB2 = SC2  Internally in the ratio m : n is given by
 (x–3)2 + (y + 4)2 = (x–5)2 + (y + 6)2
 x2 + 9 – 6x + y2 + 16 + 8y  mx 2  nx1 my 2  ny1 
(x, y) =  , 
= x2 + 25 – 10x + y2 + 36 + 12y  mn mn 
 4x – 4y = 36  Externally in the ratio m : n is given by
 x – y = 9 ...(ii)
 mx 2  nx1 my 2  ny1 
Solving (1) and (2), we have (x, y) =  , 
x = 11 and y = 2  mn mn 

ANCE 129
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Note : Solution :
Let the other end point be A(x, y)
1. The coordinates of any point P lying on the
It is given that C (2, 3) is the mid point
line segment joining (x1, y1) and (x2, y2)
x6
which divides the line segment in the ratio  We can write, 2 = and
2
K : 1 are of form :
y5
3=
 Kx  x1 Ky 2  y1  2
P(x, y) =  2 ,  or 4 = x + 6 or 6 = y + 5
 K 1 K 1 
or x = –2 or y=1
2. In case of the point P (x, y) being the mid  A(–2, 1) be the co-ordinates of the
point of the line segment joining (x1, y1) other end point.
and (x2, y2) the value of K : 1 = 1 : 1 and
hence the coordinates of the mid point P
A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C(x3, y3) are vertices
 x1  y1 y1  y 2 
are P(x, y) =  ,  of any triangles ABC, then
 2 2 
1. Centroid
The centroid is the point of intersection of
Example : the medians (Line joining the mid point of
Find the co-ordinates of a point which sides and opposite vertices). Centroid
divides the line segment joining each of the divides the median in the ratio of 2 : 1
following points in the given ratio : Co-ordinates of centroid G
(A) (2, 3) and (7, 8) in the ratio 2 : 3  x  x 2  x 3 y1  y 2  y3 
= 1 , 
internally.  3 3 
A
Solution :
(A) Let A (2, 3) and B (7, 8) be the given E
F 2
points. G
1
Let P (x, y) divide AB in the ratio 2 : 3 B C
D
internally. 2. Incentre :
Using section formula, we have, The incentre is the point of intersection of
2  7  3 2 20 internal bisector of the angle. Also it is
x= = = 4 and centre of circle touching all the sides of a
23 5
triangle.
2  8  3 3 25 Co-ordinates of incentre I
y= = =5
23 5  ax1  bx 2  cx 3 ay1  by 2  cy3 
= , 
 a bc a bc 
Example :
The co-ordinates of the mid-point of a line
segment are (2, 3). If co-ordinates of one
of the end points of the line segment are
(6, 5), find the co-ordinates of the other
end point.

ANCE 130
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Where a, b, c are the sides of triangle (ii) Ortho centre, centroid and circumcentre are
ABC always collinear and centroid divide the
(i) Angle bisector divides the opposite line joining orthocentre and circumcentre in
sides in the ratio of remaining sides the ratio 2 : 1.
BD AB c
Ex. = =
DC AC b
(ii) Incentre divides the angle bisectors
in the ratio (b + c) : a, (c + a ) : b and
(a + b) : c
3. Excentre :
Point of intersection of one internal angle (iii) In an isosceles triangle centroid,
bisectors and other two external angle orthocentre, incentre, circumcentre
bisector is called as excentre. There are lie on the same line.
three excentres in a triangle.
Co-ordinate of each can be obtained by Example - 5
changing the sign of a, b, c respectively in Find the coordinates of (i) centroid
the formula of Incentre. (ii) in-centre of the triangle whose
vertices are (0, 6), (8, 12) and (8, 0).
4. Circumcentre :
Solution :
It is the point of intersection of perpendicular (i) We know that the coordinates of the centroid
bisectors of the sides of a triangle. of a triangle whose angular points are (x1,y1),
It is also the centre of a circle passing (x2,y2), (x3,y3) are
vertices of the triangle.  x 1  x 2  x 3 y1  y 2  y 3 
If O is the circumcentre of any triangle  , .
 3 3 
ABC, then OA2 = OB2 = OC2.
So the coordinates of the centroid of
a triangle whose vertices are (0, 6) (8, 12)
 0  8  8 6  12  0 
and (8, 0) are  ,  or
 3 3 
 16 
 ,6 .
 3 
(ii) Let A (0, 6), B (8, 12) and C (8, 0) be the
If a triangle is right angle, then its vertices of triangle ABC.
circumcent re is t he mid point of
hypotenuse.
Then c = AB = (0  8) 2  (6  12) 2 = 10,
5. Orthocentre : b = CA = (0  8) 2  (6  0) 2  10
It is the point of intersect ion of
And a = BC (8  8) 2  (12  0) 2  12,
perpendiculars drawn from vertices on
opposite sides (called altitudes) of a The coordinates of the in-centre are
triangle and can be obtained by solving  ax1  bx 2  cx 3 ay1  by 2  cy 3 
 , 
the equation of any two altitudes.  abc abc 
If a triangle is right angled triangle, then or
orthocentre is the point where right angle  12  0 10 810 8 12  6 1012 10 0
is formed.  , 
 12 10 10 12 10 10 
(i) If the triangle is equilateral, the centroid,
incentre, orthocentre, circumcentre,  160 192 
or  ,  or (5, 6).
coincide.  32 32 

ANCE 131
 Co-ordinate Geometry

The value of tan is called as the slope of

A straight line is a curve such that every the line and is denoted by m. Hence, the
point on the line segment joining any two slope of a line L joining the points
points on it lies on it . P(x 1, y1) and Q(x2, y2) is given by :
(a) Slope (Gradient) of a Line : y 2  y1 Diff. in ordinates
The trigonometrical tangent of the angle that m = tan  = x  x =
a line makes with the positive direction of 2 1 Diff. in abcissa
the x-axis in anticlockwise sense is called Lines sloping upward towards the right
the slope or gradient of the line. have positive slopes.
Note : (i) The slope of a vertical line, i.e.,
a line parallel to y-axis is , as
 = 90º
(ii) The slope of a horizontal line i.e.,
a line parallel to x-axis is 0, as
 = 0º
The angle () between two lines L1 and L2
with slopes as m1 and m2 respectively can
The slope of a line is generally denoted by
be computed using
m. Thus, m = tan  .
m 2  m1
Since a line parallel to x-axis makes an tan  = 1  m m
1 2
angle of 0o with x-axis, therefore its slope
is tan 0o = 0. A line parallel to y-axis i.e., Points A, B and C are collinear if mAB = mBC
perpendicular to x-axis makes an angle of If the lines are parallel,  = 0 i.e. m1 = m2
 If the lines are perpendicular,  = 90º i.e.,
90o with x-axis, so its slope is tan  .
2 m1m2 = –1
Also the slope of a line with the positive
direction of x-axis in anticlockwise sense (C) Condition of Parallelism of Lines :
always lies between 0o and 180o. It two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y
(B) Slope of the line in term of + c2 = 0 of slopes m1 and m2 are parallel
co-ordinates of any two points then the angle  between them is of 0o.
The angle () which a line makes with the  tan  = tan 0o = 0 
positive direction of x-axis in anticlockwise m2  m1
 0  m 2  m1
sense is called as the inclination of the 1  m1 m2
line. y Thus when two lines are parallel, their slopes
are equal.
Q(x2, y2) a1 b1 c1
  
a 2 b 2 c2
Rise=y2–y1
(D) Condition of Perpendicularity of Two
P(x1, y1)  Lines :
Run=x2–x1 It two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and
 a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 of slopes m1 and m2 are
x
O perpendicular, then the angle  between
them is of 90o.

ANCE 132
 Co-ordinate Geometry

 The slope of line is not defined .

1  m1 m 2
 cot  = 0  = 0 [line is parallel to y-axis]
m 2  m1
(iii) Here  = 120o
 m1m2 = 1
 Slope = tan  = tan 120o
Thus when two lines are perpendicular, the = tan (180o  60o) =  tan 60o =  3
product of their slopes is 1, If m is the (iv) Here  = 150o
slope of a line, then the slope of a line  Slope = tan  = tan 150o
perpendicular to it is (1/m). 1
= tan (180o  30o) =  tan 30o = 
a1 a 3
    2  1  a1a2 + b1b2 = 0.
b1 b2 Example - 8
If A (2, 1), B (2, 3) and C (2, 4) are
Example - 6 three points find the angle between BA
A line passing through the points (a, 2a) and BC.
and (2, 3) is perpendicular to the line Solution :
4x + 3y + 5 = 0, find the value of ‘a’. Let m1 and m2 be the slope of BA and BC
respectively. Then,
Solution :
31 2 1 4  3 7
Let m1 be slope of the line joining A (a, 2a) m1 =   and m = 
2  ( 2 ) 4 2 2
2  2 4
2a  3
and B (2, 3). Then m1 = . Let  be the angle between BA and BC.
a2
Then,
Let m2 be slope of the line 4x + 3y + 5 = 0.
7 1
4 m2  m1 
Then, m2 =  . tan    4 2
3
1  m1m 2 1  7  1
Since the two lines are perpendicular, then
4 2
m1.m2 = 1.
2  2
2a  3 4 18      tan 1    .
    1 8a  12  3a  6  a  3  3
a2 3 5

Example - 7 Example - 9
What is the slope of a line whose Find the slope of the line 2x – 3y + 9 = 0.
inclination with the positive direction of Solution :
X-axis is : 3y = 2x + 9
(i) 0o
2x  9
(ii) 90o y
3
(iii) 120o
(iv) 150o
2
Solution : y x 3
3
(i) Here  = 0o
Slope = tan  = tan 0o = 0. y  mx  c
[line is parallel to x-axis]
(ii) Here  = 90o 2
Where m =
Slope = tan  = tan 90o =  . 3

ANCE 133
 Co-ordinate Geometry

1. If P(1, 2), Q(4, 6), R(5, 7) and S(a, b) 10. If A(5, 3), B(11, –5) and P(12, y) are the
are the vertices of a parallelogram PQRS, vertices of a right triangle right angled at P,
then : then y =
(A) a = 2, b = 4 (B) a = 3, b = 4 (A) –2, 4 (B) –2, 4
(C) a = 2, b = 3 (D) a = 3, b = 5 (C) 2, –4 (D) 2, 4
2. The points (–5,12) (9, 10) and (6, 5) taken 11. The triangle formed by the points (2, 7)
in order form (–2, –3) (4, –1), (–2, 6) is :
(A) a square (B) a parallelogram (A) isosceles (B) equilateral
(C) a trapezium (D) a straight line (C) right angled (D) scalene
3. The mid points of the sides of a triangle are 12. The points (a, a), (–a, –a), (a 3 , a 3 )
(–1, 3), (–2, 4) and (2, –5). The vertex of
are the vertices of a triangle which is :
the triangle opposite to (–1, 3) is :
(A) right angled (B) scalene
(A) (3, –6) (B) (–5, 12)
(C) equilateral (D) isosceles
(C) (1, –4) (D) None
4. The point of intersection of X and Y axes 13. If A(x, 4), B(1, –2) and C(–3, 2) form
is called : an isosceles triangle at the vertex B, then
x is :
(A) origin (B) null point
(C) common point (D) None (A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) no such x-exists
5. The point (–3,2) belongs to Quadrant
__________ 14. The points (–1, 5), (–2, 3), (5, 7), (6, 9)
(A) Q1 (B) Q2 form -
(C) Q3 (D) Q4 (A) a rectangle (B) a parallelogram
(C) a square (D) a rhombus
6. The distance of the point (–2, –2) from the
origin is : 15. If the points (2, 4), (2, 6) and (h, 5) form
(A) 8 units (B) 2 2 units an equilateral triangle, then h is :

(C) both a & b (D) (A) 3  2 (B)  1

2 units
7. The point on X-axis equidistant from (5,4) (C) 2  3 (D)  2
and (–2,3) is ______ 16. The points (–2, 14), (–6, 8), (0, 4),
(A) (3,0) (B) (2,0) (4, 10) taken in order to form :
(C) (4,0) (D) None (A) a rhombus (B) a square
8. One end of diameter of a circle is (2,3) and (C) a rectangle (D) none
the centre is (–2, 5). The coordinates of
17. The points (0, –1), (2, 1), (0, 3) and
the other end is ______
(–2, 1) taken in order to form a :
(A) (–6,7) (B) (6, –7)
(A) square (B) rectangle
(C) (6, 7) (D) None
(C) parallelogram (D) rhombus
9. The perimeter of the triangle formed by the
points (0,0) (1,0) and (0, 1) is : 18. The number of points equidistant to three
given non-collinear points is :
(A) 1 2 (B) 2  1
(A) 1 (B) 0
(C) 3 (D) 2  2 (C) 2 (D) infinite

ANCE 134
 Co-ordinate Geometry

19. The opposite vertices of a square are 25. The points D, E, F are the mid points of
(–1, 2) and (–5, 6) ; then the other two t he sides BC, CA, AB of ABC
vertices are : respectively. If A = (–2, 3), D = (1, –4)
(A) (– 1, 6) (– 5, 2,) and E = (–5, 2) then F =
(B) (–2, –5), (–6, –1) (A) (2, 3) (B) (4,–3)
(C) (2, 5), (–6, –1) (C) (4, 4) (D) (–3, –4)
(D) None
26. The point of intersect ion of t he
20. The radius of nine point circle of the perpendicular bisectors of the sides of the
triangle whose vertices are (4, 6), triangle by the points (2, 1), (5, 2) and
(0, 4), (6, 2) is : (3, 4) is :
2  4 4  13 9 
(A) 2 (B) (A)  ,  (B)  , 
5  13 9   4 4

6 5   13 9 
(C) (D) (C)  ,  (D) None
2 2  4 4

21. A(a, b) and B(0, 0) are two fixed points. 27. The centre of the circle passing through
the points (–2, 3), (–7, 5) and (3, –5)
M1 is the mid point of AB . M2 is the mid
is :
point of AM1 , M3 is the mid point of  53 41    53  41 
(A)  ,  (B)  , 
AM 2 and so on. Then M5 is :  6 6  6 6 

 62a 62b   31a 31b    53 41 

, , (C)  ,  (D) None
(A)   (B)  
 6 6
 63 63   32 32 
 6a 6 b  28. A triangle ABC, right angled at A and
(C)  ,  (D) None
 7 7  A = (2, 3), B (0, –1) and BC = 5 units.
Then the point C is :
22. (2,5), (3, 3)and (0, 4) are the mid points (A) (2, 4) (B) (4, 2)
of the sides of the triangle ABC. Then the (C) (4, –2) (D) (0, –4)
area of triangle ABC is (in square units)
(A) 9 (B) 11 (C) 10 (D) 12 29. The equation of the locus of point
which are equidistant from the points
23. The point P equidistant from A(1, 3), (a + b, a – b) and (a – b, a + b) is :
B(–3, 5) and C(5, –1) then PA = (A) x – y = 0 (B) x + y = 0
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 2x + 3y = 0 (D) None
(C) 10 (D) 5 10
30. The distance of a point P from Y-axis is
24. The points (–a, –b), (0, 0) (a, b) and half of its distance from origin. Then the
(a2, ab) taken in this order form : locus of P is :
(A) lie on a circle (A) x2 – y2 = 0
(B) square (B) 3y2 – x2 = 0
(C) parallelogram (C) 3x2 – y2 = 0
(D) a straight line (D) x2 + y2 = 0

ANCE 135
 Co-ordinate Geometry

1. The mid-points of the line segment joining (A) –2 : 3 (B) –3 : 2

the points (–2, 4) and (6, 10) is : (C) 3 : 2 (D) 2 : 3
(A) (2, 5) (B) (2, 7)
9. The 1st and 2nd points of trisection of the
(C) (3, 7) (D) (3, 8)
join of (–2, 11), (–5, 2) are :
2. Ratio in which the line 3x + 4y = 7 divides (A) (–3, –8), (4, 5) (B) (3, –8), (4, –5)
the line segment joining the points (1,2) and (C) (3, 8), (4, 5) (D) (–3, 8), (–4, 5)
(–2, 1) is :
10. Mid points of the sides AB and AC of
(A) 3 : 5 (B) 4 : 6 ABC are (3,5) and (–3, –3) respectively,
(C) 4 : 9 (D) None of these then the length of BC =
3. The points A(1, 2), B(–3, 4), C(7, –1) are (A) 16 (B) 20
(C) 24 (D) 32
collinear. The ratio in which A divides BC
is : 11. The ratio in which the point (a2, ab) divides
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 3 : 2 the join of (a, b) and (–a, –b) is :
(C) –2 : 3 (D) –3 : 2 (A) 1 + a : 1 – a (B) 1 – a : 1 + a
(C) 1 : a (D) a : 1
4. The ratio in which the x-axis divides the
line segment joining the points (3, 6) and 12. If (x, 2) is a point on the line joining (2, 5)
(12, –3) is : and (–1, 4), then x =
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (A) 5 (B) –7
(C) –2 : 1 (D) –1 : 2 (C) 8 (D) 9
13. The point dividing the line joining (–2,4)
5. In what ratio does the line
and (2, 7) in the ratio 2 : 1 externally is :
4x + 3y – 13 = 0 divide the line segment
(A) (6, 10) (B) (1, 6)
joining the points (2, 1) and (1, 4)?
(C) (0, –1) (D) (0, 0)
(A) 3 : 2 internally (B) 2 : 3 externally
(C) 2 : 3 internally (D) 3 : 2 externally 14. One point of trisection of the line segment
joining (3, –3) and (6, 9) is :
6. In what ratio is the segment joining the points (A) (4, 1) (B) (1, 4)
(4,6) and (–7,–1) divided by X-axis ? (C) (–1, –4) (D) None
(A) 1 : 6 (B) 6 : 2
(C) 2 : 6 (D) 6 : 1 15. The coordinates of the point that is two-
thirds away from (–4, 3) to (5,7) is :
7. The point of intersection of medians of
 16   17 
triangle whose vertices are (–1,0), (5,–2) (A)   2,  (B)  , 2 
and (8,2) is :  3  3 
 17   17 
 4 (C)  2,  (D)  4, 
(A) (4, 0) (B)   8,   3  3
 3
16. P = (–5, 4) and Q = (–2, –3). If PQ is
4  4 
(C)  , 8  (D)  ,  8  produced to R such that P divides QR
3   3 
externally in the ratio 1 : 2, then R is :
8. The ratio in which (4, 5) divides the join of (A) (10, 2) (B) (10, 1)
(2, 3) and (7, 8) is : (C) (1, –10) (D) (2, 10)

ANCE 136
 Co-ordinate Geometry

17. The point dividing the join of (a, b) and 24. The vertices of a triangle are A(0, 0), B(1,
(b, a) internally in the ratio a : b is : 0) and C(0, 2). The point of trisection of
bisectors of internal angles is :
 2ab a 2  b 2 
(A)  a  b , a  b   2 1 
  (A)  , 
2 2  3 5 3 5 
 a  b 2ab 
(B)  a  b , a  b   1
,
1 
  (B)  
 3 5 3 5 
 2ab a 2  b 2 
(C)  a 2  b  , ab   1 1 
(C)  , 
   3 5 3 5 
(D) None
 2 2 
18. P(–1, 4) and Q(11, –8) divide AB (D)  , 
 3 5 3 5 
harmonically in the ratio 2 : 3 then A, B in
order are : 25. If the diagonals of a trapezium are equal,
(A) (4, 7) (–1, 2) (B) (–4, 7) (1, 2) then the ratio of the length of the non-
(C) (4, –7), (–2, 1) (D) None parallel sides is :
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
19. The points (8, 4) divides the line joining (C) 3 : 2 (D) 1 : 1
(5, –2) and (9, 6) in the ratio.
26. The orthocentre of the triangle whose
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 3
sides are given by 4x – 7y + 10 = 0,
(C) 3 : 1 (D) 1 : 3 x + y – 5 = 0 and 7x + 4y – 15 = 0 is :
20. The coordinates of the point that is two (A) (1, –1) (B) (0, 1)
thirds away from (–4, 3) to (5, 7) is : (C) (1, 0) (D) (0, 0)
3   3 27. The circumcentre of the triangle whose
(A)  , 1 (B)  2,  ver t ices ar e (1, 3) , (–3, 5) and
 17   17 
 17   17  (5, –1) is :
(C)  , 2  (D)  2,  (A) (–8, –10) (B) (10, 8)
 3   3 (C) (–8, 10) (D) (8, 10)
21. The coordinates of the points which divides
28. The equation of the sides of a triangle
the join of (1, 7) and (6, –3) in the ratio
are x + y– 5 = 0, x – y + 1 = 0 and
2 : 3 are : y –1 = 0. Then the coordinates of the
(A) (3, 3) (B) (2, 2) circumcentre are :
(C) (6, 6) (D) (4, 4) (A) (2, 1) (B) (1, 2)
22. Two vertices of a triangle are (–1,4) and (C) (–1, 2) (D) (–2, 1)
(5,2). The medians through these points 29. The incentre of the triangle formed by the
meet at (0, –3). Then the third vertex is :
lines y = 3x , y =  3x and y = 3 is :
(A) (4,–15) (B) (–4, –15)
(A) (2, 0) (B) (0, 2)
(C) (2, –5) (D) None
(C) (1, 2) (D) (2, 1)
23. The point of intersection of two medians of
30. The orthocentre of the triangle whose
the triangle with vertices (–1, 0), (5, –2) sides are 2y – x = 9, x + y = 9,
and (8, 2) is : 2x – y = 9 is :
(A) (0, 4) (B) (4, 0) (A) (4, 4) (B) (5, 5)
(C) (–4, 0) (D) (0, 0) (C) (2, 2) (D) (3, 3)

ANCE 137
 Co-ordinate Geometry

1. The incentre of the triangle formed by the 7. The circumcentre of the triangle formed
points (–1, 0), (1, 0) and (0,  3 ) is : by the points (1, 0), (3, –2), (–1, –2) is :
(A) (1, 2) (B) (1, –2)
 1   1  (C) (2, 1) (D) (2, –1)
(A)  0,  (B)  , 0
 3  3 
8. The circumcentre of the triangle formed
 1  by the points (3, 0), (0, 4) and (0, 0) is :
(C)  0,  (D) None
 3
3  1 
(A)  , 2  (B)  , 1
2. The vertices of a triangle are (6, 6), (0, 6) 2  2 
and (6, 0). The distance between its 5   5
circumcentre and centroid is : (C)  , 3  (D)  3, 
6   6
(A) 3 2 (B) 1
9. The centre of the circle passing through
(C) 2 (D) 3 the three vertices of a triangle is :
3. The sides of a triangle ABC are BC = 5, (A) incentre (B) Orthocentre
(C) Centroid (D) Circumcentre
CA = 4 and AB = 3. If A = (0, 0) and the
bisector of the internal angle A meets BC 10. If the centroid of the triangle by the points
(0, 0), (cos , sin ) and (sin – cos )
 12 12 
in D =  ,  , then the coordinates of lies on the line y = 2x, then =
7 7 (A) tan–1 2 (B) tan–1 (–2)
the incentre are :
(C) tan–1 (–3) (D) tan–1 3
(A) (2, 3) (B) (1, 3)
(C) (2, 1) (D) (1, 1) 11. The Orthocentre of the triangle formed by
the points (–1, 0), (1, 0) and (0, 3 ) is :
4. If the point ( x 1  t x 2  x 1 , y1  t y 2  y1 )
divides the join of (x1, y1), (x2, y2) internally  1 
(A) (0, 0) (B)  0, 
then :  3
(A) t =1 (B) t < 0  1   1 
(C) t > 1 (D) 0 < t < 1 (C)  , 0 (D)  , 0
 3   3 
5. The excentre of the triangle formed by the
points (0, 3), (4,0) and (0, 0) which is 12. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by
opposite to (0, 0) is : the points (0, 0), (7, 0) and (0, 8) is :
(A) (0, 0) (B) (1, 1)
(A) (4, 4) (B) (6, 6)
(C) (1, 0) (D) (0, 1)
8 8
(C) (1, 1) (D)  , 
9 9  1 7 
13. If (0, 3) and  ,  are the centroid
6. If the centroid of a triangle is (2, 3) and  2 2
two of its vertices are (5, 6) and (–1, 4) and circumcentre of a triangle, then its
then the third vertex is : orthocentre is :
(A) (2, 0) (B) (–2, 1) (A) (1, 1) (B) (2,–1)
(C) (2, –1) (D) (1, 2) (C) (1, –2) (D) (1, 2)

ANCE 138
 Co-ordinate Geometry

14. If G is the centroid of  ABC, then 18. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by
AG 2  BG 2  CG 2 the lines 7x + y – 10 = 0, x – 2y + 5 = 0
= and x + y + 2 = 0 is :
AB2  BC2  CA 2
1 1 2 4 2 4
(A) (B) (C) 1 (D) 2 (A)  ,  (B)  , 
3 2  3 3 3 3 
15. If the centroid and circumcentre of a 1 2
(C)  ,  (D) None
triangle are (3, 3) and (6, 2) then its 3 3
orthocentre is :
(A) (–3, –5) (B) (–3, 5) 19. Two sides of a triangle are y = m1x and
(C) (5, 3) (D) (3, 5) y = m2x, m1, m2 are the roots of the
equation x2 + ax –1 = 0. For all values of
16. A straight rod of length 9 unit slides with ‘a’, the orthocentre of the triangle lies at :
its ends A, B always on the X and Y axes (A) (1, 1) (B) (0, 0)
respectively. Then the locus of the centroid (C) (2, 2) (D) (3, 3)
of QAB is :
(A) x2 + y2 = 9 (B) x2 + y2 = 3 20. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by
2 2
(C) x + y = 81 (D) x2 + y2 = 1 the lines 2x + 3y +1 = 0, x + y + 2 = 0
and 3x – 2y + 4 = 0 is :
17. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by (A) (1, 1) (B) (0,0)
the points (–5, –7), (13, 2), (–5, 6) is :
(A) (1, –3) (B) (–3, 2)   14 5   5 14 
(C)  ,  (D)  , 
(C) (3, 2) (D) (–2, 3)  3 13   13 13 

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C B C A B C B B A D
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C C C D B C B A A C
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . D B C D D B B B A C

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . B C A A C D A D D B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B B A A C C A B C D
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . A B B D D D A B B B

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A C D D B C B A D C
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B A D A B A B A B C

ANCE 139
 Trigonometry

Trignometry  Degree : When the initial ray is rotated

th
Trignometry is derived from Greek word  1 
“Tri” = Three, “Gonia” = Angle, “Metry” through   of one revolution, we say
 360 
= Measure. Trigonometry means the science that an angle of one degree (1°) is formed
which deals with the measurement of Right at the initial point. A degree is divided into
triangles. 60 equal parts and each part is called one
 Angle minute (1). Further, a minute is divided
“A measure formed between two rays into 60 equal parts called seconds (’’).
having a common initial point is called an So, 1 right angle = 90°
angle. The two rays are called the arms or 1° = 60’ (minutes) and
sides of the angle and the common initial 1’ = 60’’ (seconds)
point is called the vertex of the angle. 2. Centesimal System (French System) :
B In this system, the angle is measured in
grades.
 Grade : When the initial ray is rotated
 th
O A  1 
In the above figure OA is said to be the through   of one revolution, an
 400 
initial side and the other ray OB is said to
angle of one grade is said to be formed at
be the terminal side of the angle.  is a
the initial point. It is written as 1g.
minute angle.
Further, one grade is divided into 100 equal
The angle is taken positive when measured
parts called minutes and one minute is
in anti-clockwise direction and is taken
further divided into 100 equal parts called
negative when measured in clockwise
seconds.
direction.
So, 1 right angle = 100g
B
Terminal side 1g = 100’ (minutes) and
1’ = 100’’ (seconds)
3. Circular System :

O A The angle subtended at the centre of a circle
Initial side
by an arc whose length is equal to the
Initial side A radius. In this system an angle is measured
O
(– ) in radians.
 Radian : Let AB be an arc of a circle of
Terminal side radius ‘r’ such that length of arc AB = r,
B then AOB = 1 radian.
 Systems of measurement of angle Since, the whole circle subtends an angle
We have the following systems of the of 360° (= 4 right angles) at the centre and
measurement of angle. the angles at the centre of a circle are in
the ratio of subtending arcs, therefore
1. Sexagesimal System (British System) :
In this system, the angle is measured in AOB arc AB r
= =
degrees (°). 4 right angles circumference 2 πr

ANCE 140
 Trigonometry

r D R
We have, 
 AOB = × 4 right angles 90  / 2
2πr
D /3
B So, 
90  / 2
r 2
  D= × 90 = 60º
A 3
O r c
Hence, the sexagesimal measure of is
3
60º.
2
 1 radian = right angles Example 3
π
Express in degrees :
Also we have c

 radians = 2 right angles = 180° = 200g  2 

(a)   (b) (2)c.
From here, we get  15 
180 Solution :
1 radian = degree c o o
π  2    2 180   360 
  =    24
180×7 630°
(a)
 15   15    15 
= = o
22 11  180 
 (B) (2)c =  2  
 3 3   
=  57 + = 57° + × 60’
 11  11  180  
o
6
o

' =   7  ( 2)   114 

 4 4  22   11
= 57° +  16 +  = 57° + 16’ + × 60”
 11  11 '
o 6 
= 57° 16’ 22” nearly =  114   60 
 11 
Example 1
8
'
Convert 150g into sexagesimal measure o
= 114  32 
Solution :  11 
g
Given G = 150 ''
o 8 
D G R = 114 32 '   60 
We have,    11 
90 100  / 2
D 150 = 114o 32'44''.
So, 
90 100 Example-4
3 The angles in one regular polygon is to that
 D= × 90= 135
2 in another as 3 : 2, also the number of sides
Hence sexagesimal measure of 150g is 135º. in the first is twice that in the second; how
Example 2 many sides do the polygons have ?
What is the sexagesimal measure of angle Solution
c Suppose the second regular polygon has
measuring ?
3 number of side = x.
Solution :  The first regular polygon will have
c number of side = 2x.
Given R =
3  Each angle of the first polygon

ANCE 141
 Trigonometry

4x  4 sin θ cos θ

= right angle  tan = , cot =
2x cos θ sin θ
And each angle of the second polygon  sin lies between –1 and +1
 2x  4 i.e., –1  sin   1 (or) | sinθ |  1
= right angle
x  cos lies between –1 and +1
4x  4 2 x  4
 :  3:2 i.e., –1  cos   1 (or) | cosθ |  1
2x x
or 4x  4  6x  12  tan lies between –  and + 
or 2x = 8 i.e., –  < tan  < + 
 The number of sides in the first and  cot lies between –  and +  ,
second polygons are 8 and 4 respectively. i.e., –  < cot  < + 
 Trigonometric Ratios of An acute angle  sec never lie between –1 and +1
of a right angle triangle : i.e., sec   –1 (or) sec   1 (or)
Let ABC be a right triangle with ABC
 sec    1
as 90º. Let BAC be . Note that
0º <  < 90º i.e.,  cosec never lie between –1 and +1
    is an acute angle. C i.e. cosec   –1 (or) cosec   1 (or)
 cosec    1
e
Opposite side

us
en  Quadrants :
pot
Hy Y

Q2 (SILVER) Q1 (ALL)

A Adjacent side B sin, cosec are positive All T-ratios are positive
(90° + ), (180°–) (90° –), (360° + )
opposite side BC 90° <  < 180° 0° <  < 90°
 sin = = X' X
hypotenuse AC
tan, cot are positive cos, sec are positive
adjacent side AB (180° + ), (270° –) (270° + ), (360° – )
cos = =
hypotenuse AC 180° <  < 270° 270° <  < 360°
opposite side BC
tan = = Q3 (TEA) Q4 (CUPS)
adjacent side AB
hypotenuse AC Y'
cosec = =
opposite side BC  Quadrants I II III IV
hypotenuse AC
sec = = sin, cosec + + – –
adjacent side AB
cos, sec + – – +
adjacent side AB
cot = = tan, cot + – + –
opposite side BC
 sin, cos, tan, cosec, sec and cot are  If the angles are expressed in degrees then
called circular functions. (i) In case of allied angles –, 180° – , 180°
cosec, sec and cot are reciprocals to + , 360° – , 360° +  the T-ratios remain
sin, cos and tan respectively. the same.

ANCE 142
 Trigonometry

(ii) In case of allied angles 90° – , 90° + , Example-5

270° – , 270° +  then trigonometric ratios Prove that sin 420ocos 390o + cos ( 300o)
changed as sin   cos , tan   cot, sin ( 300o) = 1.
sec   cosec. Solution :
 Trigonometric Ratios of Allied Angles : sin (360o + 60o) cos (360o + 30o)  cos
Two angles are said to allied when (270o + 30o) sin (270o + 30o)
their sum or difference is either zero or a = sin 60o cos 30o + sin 30o cos 60o
multiple of 90o. If  is any angle, then 3 3 1 1 3 1
=     
 , 90  ,180  ,270  ,360   e t c . 2 2 2 2 4 4
= 1.
are called allied angles.
Example-6
tan 225o cot 405o + tan 765o cot 675o = 0.
Solution :
tan 225o cot 405o + tan 765o cot 675o
tan (180o + 45o) cot (360o + 45o) + tan
(720o + 45o) cot (630o + 45o)
tan 45o cot 45o + tan 45o ( tan 45o)
= 1 1
= 0.
Values of Trignometric Ratios
 Trigonometric Identities :
Degree 0° 30° 45° 60° 90°
An equation involving trignometric
π π π π functions which is true for all those angles
Ratio 0
6 4 3 2 for which the functions are definded is
1 1 3 called trignometric identity.
sin 0 1
2 2 2  sin × cosec = 1
1 cos × sec = 1
3 1
cos 1 0 tan  × cot  = 1
2 2 2
 sin2 + cos2 = 1
1
tan 0 1 3  sec2 – tan2 = 1
3
cosec2 – cot 2 = 1
2 cos2 = 1 – sin2
cosec  2 2 1
3 sec2 = 1 + tan2
2 cosec2 = 1 + cot 2
sec 1 2 2 
3 sin2 = 1 – cos2
1 tan2 = sec2 –1
cot  3 1 0 cot 2 = cosec2 – 1
3

ANCE 143
 Trigonometry

 Trigonometric Functions of Sum or tan A  tan B

Difference of two angles :  tan (A – B) = 1  tan A. tan B
 sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B 2 tan A
 sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A 
 sin (A – B) = sin A cos B – cos A sin B 1  tan 2 A
 cos 2A = 2 cos2A – 1 = 1 – 2sin2 A
 cos (A + B) = cos A cos B –sin A sin B
1  tan 2 A
 cos (A – B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B = cos A – sin A 
2 2
1  tan 2 A
tan A  tan B
 tan (A + B) =  1  tan A. tan B 2 tan A
 tan 2A 
1  tan 2 A

Practice Problems
4
1. In the circle of 5 cm radius, what is the 6. If tan A = and A is acute, then sin A = ?
length of the arc which subtends an angle of 3
33°15 at the centre? (approximately)
3 4 5 5
63 63 (A) (B) (C) (D)
(A) 2 cm (B) 3 cm 5 5 3 4
72 72
8
65 65 7. If sin A = and A is acute, then cot A = ?
(C) 2 cm (D) 3 cm 17
72 72
2. The wheel of a railway carriage is 4 ft in 15 15 8 17
(A) (B) (C) (D)
diameter and makes 6 revolutions in a 8 17 15 8
second, how fast is the train going?
(A) 12 ft/sec (B) 18 ft/sec 1
8. If sin  = and  is acute, then
(C) 24 ft/sec (D) 10 ft/sec 2
3. Each interior angle of a regular pentagon in (3 cos  – 4 cos3 ) = ?
circular measure is - 1 1
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D) –1
4 2 6
(A) 3 radians (B) radians
(3 sin   2 cos )
5 5
9. If 3 tan  = 4, then =?
6 (3 sin   2 cos )
(C)  radians (D) radians
5
3 4
4. What is the angle between the minute hand (A) (B) (C) 5 (D) 3
4 3
and hour hand of a clock at 3 p.m.?
(A) 45° (B) 90°
(5 sin   3 cos )
(C) 15° (D) 60° 10. If 5 cot  = 3, then =?
(4 sin   3 cos )
5. Find in radians the angle of a regular
octogon - 11 16
C C (A) (B)
  18 29
(A) (B)
4 2
14
3C C (C) (D) None of these
(c) (D)  27
4

ANCE 144
 Trigonometry

11. In ABC, B = 90º, AB = 5 cm and BC 18. If 3 sin  + 4 cos = 5, then the value of
= 12 cm Then sin C = ? sin  is :
C
3 3
(A) (B)
4 5
4
(C) (D) None of these
5
A B
(1  tan 2 )
12 5 19. =?
(A) (B) (1  tan 2 )
13 13
(A) (sin2 – cos2) (B) (cos2 – sin2)
5 13
(C) (D) (C) (cot2 – tan2) (D) (tan2 – cot2)
12 5
12. sin  cos (90º – ) + cos  sin (90º – ) = ?  sin x sin x 
20.    =?
(A) 0 (B) 1  (1  cos x ) (1  cos x ) 
3 (A) 2 sin x (B) 2 cos x
(C) 2 (D) (C) 2 sec x (D) 2 cosec x
2
cos 37º  sin  cos  
13. =? 21.    =?
sin 53º  (1  cot ) (1  tan ) 
37 53 (A) cos  + sin  (B) tan 
(A) (B) (C) 0 (D) 1
53 37
3 22. (1 + cot – cosec ) (1 + tan + sec ) = ?
(C) (D) 1 (A) 1 (B) 2
5
(C) 4 (D) 0
14. cos 1º cos 2º cos 3º ........ cos 180º = ?
23. cot (90º – ) = ?
(A) 1 (B) –1
(C) 0 (D) None of these (A) cot  (B) – cot 
(C) tan  (D) – tan 
15. sin2 25º + sin2 65º = ?
24. sin 30º = ?
(A) 90 (B) 40
(C) 0 (D) 1 1 1
(A) (B)
2 2
16. tan 1º tan 2º tan 3º........ tan 89º = ?
(A) 1 3
(C) (D) None of these
(B) 0 2
(C) Cannot determined
25. (cos4 x – sin4 x) = ?
(D) None of these
(A) 2 sin2 x – 1 (B) 1 – 2 cos2x
2 2
tan 35º cot 78º (C) sin x – cos x (D) None of these
17.  =?
cot 55º tan 12º 26. cos (40º + ) – sin (50º – ) = ?
(A) 0 (B) 2 (A) 1 (B) 0
(C) 1 (D) None of these (C) sin 2 (D) None of these

ANCE 145
 Trigonometry

27. (cos 0º + sin 45º + sin 30º) (sin 90º – 34. Consider a cube ABCD - PQRS, if  is
cos 45º + cos 60º) = ? the angle between diagonal BS and the
3 5 plane PQRS, then the value of tan , is
(A) (B) equal to :
5 6
A B
1 5
(C) (D) D C
4 8
Q
28. 4 2 2 2 P
 cot 30º 3 sin 60º 2 cos ec 60º  
3 S R

3  (A) 1 (B) 2
tan 2 30º  = ?
4  (C) 1 / 2 (D) 3
10 35. If sin x + sin2 x = 1, then the value of
(A) (B) 3 cos12x + 3 cos10x + 3 cos8 x + cos6 x – 1
3
is :
8 9 (A) –1 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) 2
(C) (D)
3 4
36. sin2 + cosec2 is always :
29. (cosec2 72º – tan2 18º) = ? (A) greater than 1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (B) less than 1
3 (C) greater than or equal to 2
(C) (D) None of these (D) equal to 2
2
sin   cos 
30. (sec 2 10º – cot2 80º) = ? 37. If sin  + cos  = a and = b,
sin  cos 
(A) 1 (B) 0
then –
1
(C) 2 (D) 2a 2b
2 (A) b = 2 (B) a =
a 1 b2  1
31. I f sin 3 = cos (– 6º), where 3 and ( – (C) ab = b2 – 1 (D) a + b = 1
6º) are acute angles, then  = ?
(A) 36º (B) 24º 38. If tan4  + cot4  = A, then –
(C) 66º (D) None of these (A) A > 2 (B) A > 2
(C) A > 4 (D) A > 4
32. If sin  + cos  = k then |sin  – cos | 39. If tan A = 2  1 , the value of sin A is :
equals :
(A) 2 1 (B) 1 /( 2  1)
(A) 2  k2 (B) k2  2 (C) 1 / 4  2 2 (D) 1 / 4  2 2
(C) | k | (D) 2k
40. The equation (sin 1)x + (cos 1)x = 1 is
33. cos 1º . cos 2º . cos 3º ........ cos 179º is satisfied for –
equal to : (A) two values of x
(A) –1 (B) 0 (B) infinite values of x
(C) no value of x
(C) 1 (D) 1 / 2 (D) one value of x

ANCE 146
 Trigonometry

1
41. If sin4 – cos4 = where  lies in the 46. If sec  = 2 and 3 / 2 <  < 2, find
2
interval 0º to 90º then the correct 1  tan   cos ec
the value of
statement : 1  cot   cos ec
(A) 1 (B) –1
(A) tan   1 / 3 (C) 2 (D) –2
(B) sec   2 / 3 12
47. If sin = and  lies in the second
13
(C) sec   1 / 2 quadrant,find the value of sec  + tan 
1 (A) –5 (B) 5
(D) cot   cos ec 
3 (C) 1 (D) –3

 11  48. If A, B, C, D are angles of a cyclic

42. Find the value of cosec  =
 4  quadrilateral, find the value of
cos A + cos B + cos C + cos D:
(A) 2 (B) 1
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) –2 (D) 2 (C) 2 (D) – 1

sin 135º  cos120º 49. Find the value of

43. Find the value of = (cos 24º + cos 55º + cos 125º + cos 204º
sin 135º  cos120º
(A) 3 (B) 2 + cos 300º) =
(A) 1 (B) 1/2
(C) 3 + 2 2 (D) 2 (C) 3/2 (D) 2/3
44. Which among is greater cos 30 or cos 30º
50. If tan A + sec A = 2, where A is acute then
(A) cos 30 (B) cos 30º
the statement which is incorrect, is –
(C) both are same (D) None
(A) tan A < sec A
45. Which among is greater cos 90º or cos 60º (B) cosec A > cot A
(A) cos 90º (B) cos 60º (C) sec A > cosec A
(C) both are same (D) none (D) cot A > tan A

Practice Problems
Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C C A B C B A A D B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B B D C D A B B B D
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . A B C B D B C A B A
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . B A B C B C A B D D
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans . D D C B B B C A B C

ANCE 147
 Matrices

Matrix Diagonal Elements of a Matrix

A rectangular arrangement of numbers in the In a given matrix, (1, 1)th, (2, 2)th, (3, 3)th,
form of horizontal and vertical lines and (4, 4)th.......elements are called its diagonal
enclosed by brackets [ ] or parenthesis ( ), elements.
is called a matrix.
The line along which these elements lie is
The horizontal lines in a matrix are called its
called the principal diagonal of the matrix.
rows and the vertical lines in it called its
columns. Example:
The plural of matrix is matrices.
 
We denote matrices by capital letters. Let A  3 4  . Then, (1, 1)th element
5 7 
Example:
= 3, (2, 2)th element = 7.
3 2 4  Diagonal elements of A are 3 and 7.
A  is a matrix having 2 rows
1 0 5 
and 3 columns. It has 6 elements. Various types of Matrices
Order of a Matrix: A matrix having m rows 1. Information Matrix : A matrix which gives
and n columns is said to be a matrix of the information about the data is called
order m × n.
information matrix.
We read m × n as ‘m by n’.
Example :
Example: in Rs. 1kg 5kg 10kg
 2 1 Tomato 3 13 25
  5 22 40
A0 2 Brinjal
is a matrix having 3 rows  
 3 4  Cabbage  4 18 34 
  
and 2 columns.
2. Route Matrix : A matrix which gives the
 The order of matrix A is (3 × 2).
information about route is called route matrix.
Notation for The Elements of a Matrix:
An element of a matrix appearing in the Example :
i-th row and j-th column is called the
(i, j)th element of the matrix. Delhi
Thus, in a given matrix, we have Calcutta
(1, 1)th element = element in 1st row and
1st column.
(2, 3)the element = element in 2nd row and
3rd column etc. Mumbai

 7 4 1  to D C M
Example: Let A    . Then, in D 1 1 1
10 3 5
this matrix, we have: 0 2 1 
C
 
(1, 1)th element = 7; (1, 2)th element M 1 1 0
= – 4; (1, 3)th element = 1;
(2, 1)th element = 10; (2, 2)th element = 3; 1. Row Matrix: A matrix having only 1 row
(2, 3)th element = – 5. is called a row matrix or a row-vector.

ANCE 148
 Matrices
Example : 6. Unit or Identity Matrix: A square matrix
in which every diagonal element is 1 and
A  1 2 3 is a row matrix of order every non-diagonal element is 0, is called a
(1×3). unit or an identity matrix. It is denoted by I.
2. Column Matrix: A matrix having only 1 Example:
column is called a column matrix or a
column-vector. 1 0 
  is a unit matrix of order 2.
Example : 0 1

7 7. Zero or Null Matrix: A matrix in which

A    is a column matrix of order every element is 0, is called a zero or a null
2 matrix.
(2 ×1).
Example:
3. Rectangular Matrix: A matrix in which
the number of rows is not equal to the number A   0 0 is a zero matrix of order (1×2).
of columns, is called a rectangular matrix. Transpose of a Matrix: The transpose of
Example : a given matrix A is the matrix obtained by
interchanging its rows and columns and it is
2 5 4 denoted by At or A’.
A  is a matrix having 2 rows
 0 3 1  It may be noted that, if A is a matrix of
and 3 columns. order (m×n), then At is a matrix of order
In this matrix, number of rows  number of (n×m).
columns. Example:
 A is a rectangular matrix of order (2×3).
 
4. Square Matrix: A matrix in which the Let A   1 3 5  .
number of rows is the same as the number 2 0 4 
of columns, is called a square matrix. 1 2 
A square matrix having n rows and n column  
Then A t  3 0  .
is called an n-rowed square matrix or a
5 4 
square matrix of order n.  
Example:
Comparable Matrices
 3
A   2  is a square matrix of order 2. Two matrices A and B are said to be
5 7  comparable, if they are of the same order.
5. Diagonal Matrix: A square matrix in which Example:
every non-diagonal element is zero and at
 
least one diagonal element is non-zero, is The matrices A   2 3 0  and
called a diagonal matrix.  1 2 4 
Example:  5 7 2 
B  
5 0 8 0 1 
A  is a diagonal matrix of order
0 2 are comparable, since they are of the same
(2×2). order. i.e. (2 × 3).

ANCE 149
 Matrices

Equal Matrices Addition of Matrices

Two matrices A and B are said to be equal, Let A and B be two matrices of the same
written as A = B, if (i) they are of the same order. Then, their sum (A + B) is the matrix
order and (ii) their corresponding elements obtained by adding the corresponding
are equal. elements of A and B.
 Scalar Matrix : (Multiplication of a Clearly, the order of (A + B) is the same as
that of A or B.
Matrix By a Real Number)
If A and B are matrices of different orders,
Let A be a given matrix and k be a real
then (A + B) does not exist.
number. Then, the matrix obtained by
multiplying every element of A by k, is called 3 4  6  2
Example : Let A =   and B =  .
the scalar multiple of A by k, and it is 5 7  7 5 
denoted by kA. Find (A + B).
The order of kA is the same as that of A. Sol. We have
Example : 3 4  6  2
A+B=   
Let B = [3 6 – 2]. Find 5 7  7 5 
1  36 4  (2)  9 12
(i) 2B, (ii) (– 3) B, (iii) B = 
2 5  (7) 7  5   2 12
Sol. We have, B = [3 6 – 2]
 (i) 2B = [2 × 3 2 × 6 2 × (– 2)] Subtraction of Matrices
= [6 12 – 4] Let A and B be two matrices of the same
(ii) (– 3) B = [(– 3) × 3 (– 3) × 6 (– 3) × order. Then, their difference (A – B) is the
(– 2)] = [– 9 – 18 6] matrix obtained by subtracting the element
of B from the corresponding elements of A.
1 1 1 1 
(iii) B   3 6  (–2) If A and B are matrices of different orders,
2 2 2 2  then (A – B) does not exist.
3 
 3  1 5 7   3 9
2  Example : Let A =  and B = 
 .
9  3   2 2
An Important Result Find (A – B).
If p and q are real numbers and A is any Sol. We have
matrix, then 5 7   3 9
p (qA) = (pq) A A – B =  
9  3  2 2
Thus,
 53 7  9   2  2
1 1  =  
(i) ( 2A )    2 A  1A  A 9  (2)  3  2 11  5
2 2 
1 1  Negative of a Matrix
(ii) (3A)    3  A  1A  A
3 3  Let A be any given matrix. Then, the matrix
1 obtained by replacing each element of A
(iii) 5A  B  A  B with its negative, is called the negative
5
Two matrices can be added or subtracted or additive inverse of A, and it is denoted
only when they are of the same order. by (– A).

ANCE 150
 Matrices

5  3 Inverse of a Matrix
Example : If A =   , then
0 6  If a matrix is non-singular then it holds
 5 3  its inverse.
(– A) =  . Inverse of a matrix
 0  6
We defined, A – b = A + (– B). 1
=  (Transpose of co-factor
We have, A + (– A) = (– A) + A = O. det of a matrix
of a matrix)
 Properties of Addition On Matrices :
For any matrices A, B, C of the same order, a b Adj of a matrix
we have : If A = A     det of matrix
(i) A+B=B +A c d 
[Commutative Law]
1  d  b
then A 1   c a 
(ii) (A + B) + C = A + (B + C) ad  bc  
[Associative Law]
System of linear equations expressing in
(iii) A+O =O +A=A matrix method :
[Identity] a1x  b1y  c1  0
O is called the additive identity on all a 2 x  b 2 y  c2  0 are any two equation.
matrices of the same order.
then
(iv) A + (– A) = (– A) + A = O
a b1  c  x 
(– A) is called the additive inverse of A. A 1 B   1 X 
a 2 b 2  c 2   y
(v) X + A = B  X + A + (– A) = B + (– A)
 X + O = B – A  Solving system of equations by matrix
      X = B – A method :
 X +A=B  X=B –A System of equations can be solved in two
methods
1
(vi) kA = B  A = B 1. Matrix inversion method
k
2. Cramer’s method
Thus, we can treat a matrix equation in the
1. Inversion Method :
same manner as a linear equation.
From a matrix equation when any term is AX=B
transferred to the order side, then its sign  X = A–1  B
is changed. 2. Cramer’s Method :

Determinent of Matrix a b1  a c1 
A 1  B2   1
a 2 b2  a 2 c 2 
a b
If A   
c d  c b1 
B1   1
| A |  ad  bc c2 b 2 
If |A| = 0, then it is a singular matrix. | B1 | | B2 |
x y
If |A|  0, then it is called non-singular matrix. |A| |A|

ANCE 151
 Matrices

 2 6 A is a non-singular
1. If A    , show that ‘A’ is a singular
1 3  ‘A’ holds its inverse.
matrix. 1  4 3
A 1 
|A| = 2 × 3 × 6 × 1 23  5 2
=6×6
 4 / 23 3 / 23
=0  
 A is a singular matrix.   5 / 23 2 / 23
X = A–1  B
5  1
2. If A =   shows that ‘A’ is a non-  x   4 / 23 3 / 23 5
3 2   y    5 / 23 2 / 23  7
singular matrix.      
 20 21 
| A |  (5  2)  ( 1 3) 
 x   23 23 
= 10 + 3  y     25 14 
    
= 13  23 23 
 0  41 
 ‘A’ is a non-singular matrix. x
   23 
 y     11
 7 2    
3. If A    then find its inverse.  23 
  1 4 According to equality of matrices.
| A |  (7  4)  ( 2  1) 41
 x
= 28 + 2 23
= 30  11
y
0 23

3  6 4. Given that :
1. If P =   , find
0 9  2 4  1 3
1 A  , B  and
(i) 4P (ii) P (iii) – P 3 2   2 5
3
 2 5
C  , find
 0 7  3 4
2. If 7X =   , find X.
  14 28 (i) 2A + 3B
(ii) 3B – 2C
 cos  sin   (iii) 3A – 2B + 4C
3. Show that : cos    

  sin  cos  5. Find the matrix X, when
 sin   cos  1 0  4 6  3 1 
sin      X 
cos  sin   0 1   .
  3 7   5  2

ANCE 152
 Matrices
(v) B – (C + A)
6 2   1 2
6. If A    and B    5 1, find (vi) C + (B – A)
 5  4   (vii) Shows that A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
matrix X such that 2A + 3B – 5X = O.
9. Find the value of ‘x’.
2 4
7. Let A   . Compute  2 6 7 x  9 11
5 6   1 0  3 2    2 2 
     
1 1
(i) P  ( A  A t ) (ii) Q  ( A  A t ) 10. Find the value of ‘x’ and ‘y’.
2 2
 x  y  1  7 4  2 3
Hence, show that P = P and Qt = – Q.
t
 3  
 4   x  y  2 4 2

8. Find the following
 2x  3y  4  1 3 
 2  3 0  1   1 4 11.  0 
A  ,B  and C      5  6  4 y  x 

1 3  3 1   2 0 
(i) A + B (ii) B + C  9  7
 
(iii) A + (B + C) (iv) C – A  6 1 

0  1  x   5  5. If A is 3 × 4 matrix and B is a matrix such

1. If        then (x, y) =
1 0   y   4  that A B and BA are both defined then the
(A) (4, 5) (B) (5, – 4) order of B is -
(C) (4, – 5) (D) (– 5, – 4) (A) 2 × 3 (B) 3 × 5
(C) 3 × 4 (D) 3 × 3
1 2 4 3 6. If AB = A, BA = B, then A2 + B2 =
2. If A    ,B  and
2 5  0 2 (A) A – B (B) AB
2A + c = B, then C = (C) A + B (D) 2AB
 2  1  2  1
(A)   (B)    2 3
  4  8 4 8   1  2 3
7. If A    , B   4 5 , then -
 2 1   2  1  4 2 5  2 1
(C)   (D)  
  4 8   4  8
(A) AB, BA exist but not equal
3. If A is any m × n matrix such that AB and (B) AB, BA exist and equal
BA are both defined. Then B is an ........... (C) BA exist but not AB
matrix - (D) AB exist but not BA
(A) 1 × n (B) n × m
8. The order of the matrix A is 3 × 5 and
(C) m × n (D) m × 1
that of B is 2 × 3 the order of the matrix
4. I f A = I 2, B = I3 then - BA is -
(A) A  B (B) A > B (A) 2 × 3 (B) 3 × 5
(C) A < B (D) None (C) 3 × 2 (D) 2 × 5

ANCE 153
 Matrices

 2 3 5 1 2    3 2
9. The additive inverse of   is - (A)   (B)  
4 1 6  3 2  2 1
 2 3 5
(A)   3 2   3 1
4 1 6  (C)   (D)  
 2  1  2 2
  2  3  5
(B)   1
 4  1  6   x y3  1 8  x y
14. If    then   
 2 0  2 0  2 0
  2 3 5
(C)    1 1 
4  1 6  0
0 2 
(A)  (B)  21
1  1 1
 2 3  5    
(D)   2 4 2 4
4 1  6 
1 1 1 
4 0
2 2
 4 5  2 3 (C)  1  (D)  1 1
10. If A + 5B    ; A – 5B = 4 7 ,  0  
 6 1   4  2 2
then A =
3 4  4 4  2 2 0  1
(A)   (B)   15. If A    and B    then
5 4  3 5  3 2 1 0 
 4 5  5 3 (B–1A–1)–1 =
(C)   (D)     2  2 3 1
 3 4  4 4 (A)   (B)  
 2 3   2 2
x y  2 2  2 1  2  2
11. If 2   9  1 0  18 I then - (C)   (D)  
z p    2 3 2 3 
(A) x = 18, y = 0 16. If A and B are two square matrices such
(B) x = 0, y = 9 that B = – A–1 BA, then (A + B)2 =
(C) x = 18, y = – 9
(A) A 2  B2 (B) A 2  B2
(D) x = 18, y = 10
(C) A 2  2AB  B2 (D) I

1 1   1 2  4 1 
12. If A    then An =
1 1
17. If A    then A =
 3 1  7 7
(A) 2n 1  A (B) 2n 1  A   1  2 1 3
(A)   (B)  
(C) 2n  2  A (D) 2n  2  A  3 1   2 1

1  1 1 2
1 2 (C)   (D)  
13. The inverse of   is - 2 3  1 3
 2 3 

ANCE 154
 Matrices

18. If a non-singular matrix A satisfies  2 3

 3  1 0
A2 – A + 2I = 0, then A–1 = (A)   (B)   4 0
 2 0 4
IA  1 2
(A) (B) I + A   16 2
2
IA (C)  3 4 (D) None
(C) (D) I – A  
2   5 6
 25 0 
19. The square root of   is -
 0 25  3 4 1 2
24. If A    , B   , then A + 2B =
(A) ± 5I (B) – 5I 5 0 0 4
(C) 5I (D) None   5  4  5 4 
(A)   (B)  
 9 8   9  8
0 2   0 3a 
20. If A    , kA    , then the
3  4 2b 24 5 4 5  4
(C)   (D)  
values of k, a, b are respectively - 9 8  9 8 
(A) – 6, 4, 9 (B) – 6, – 4, – 9
(C) – 6, – 4, 9 (D) 6, 4, 9  2 1 3 2 0
25. If A    , B   , then AB =
1 3 1 0 4
 2  4 1 2 
21. If A + 2B    , A  B   
1 6  0  1   7 4  4 7 4 4 
then A = (A)   (B)  
 2 6 12  6 2 12
8 0   0  4
(A)   (B)  
3 4 3 8  7 6 4 7  4 8
(C)   (D)  
 4 0 0 4   2 12 4 5 3 2
(C)   (D)  
3 8  3  8
0 1
26. If A    , then A4 =
1 2 3   3 2 1 1 0
22. A   , B    , then
 3 2 1 1 2 3  1 0 1 0
 7 2  3 (A)   (B)  
   1 0 0 1
 3 2 7
1 1 1 0
(A) A – 2B (B) 2A – 3B (C)   (D)  
0 0 0 0
(C) 3B – 2A (D) 3A – 2B

 7  10 17  a b 1 0
23. I f 3A + 4B     , 2B – 3A 27. If A    and I    , then
0 6 31  c d  0 1
  1 18  A2 – (a + d) A – (bc – ad) I =
 4  6 , then B =
  (A) 3I (B) 2I
  5  7 (C) I (D) 0

ANCE 155
 Matrices

 1   1  1
28. If A    and A2 = I then x = 36. If A    then -
1 0  2  2
(A) 0 (B) 1 (A) A 2  3A  4I  0
(C) 2 (D) 3
(B) A 2  3A  4I  0
1 0 (C) A 2  2 A  6 I  0
29. If A    then 7A3 – 8A2 + 5A =
0 1 (D) A 2  3I  A  0
(A) – 2I (B) – 4I
(C) 4I (D) 2I   2 3 2
37. If A    then A =
  1 1 
30. If [1 2 3] B = [3 4], then the order of the
matrix B is - (A) A – I (B) A + I
(C) – A – I (D) None
(A) 3 × 2 (B) 2 × 3
(C) 1 × 3 (D) 3 × 1  2 5
38. Let A    . If satisfies
4 2  x 3
31. If A   , then (A – I) (A – 2I) =
3 5 A2 – 5A + I = 0, then x and A–1 are
respectively -
4 4 3 3
(A) A   (B)  6 3 5  3 5 
3 3  2 2  (A)   (B) I,  
 1  2 1 2
2 2 2 2
(C) 6   (D)    3  5
3 3  3 3  (C) I,   (D) None
 1 2 
32. If a skew symmetric matrix has 16 elements
then the no. of arbitrary elements in it is - 1 3 2
(A) 40 (B) 18 39. If A    , then the det of A – 2A is -
 2 1 
(C) 6 (D) 14
(A) 25 (B) – 25
1  1 a 1  (C) – 15 (D) 15
33. If A    , B   and (A +
 2  1 b  1 1 2
40. The matrix   has -
B)2 = A2 + B2 then a, b are -  2 1
(A) – 4, 2 (B) 4, – 1 (A) Two inverses
(C) 2, 4 (D) 1, – 4 (B) Unique inverse
(C) No inverse
5 a
34. If A    and AT = A then - (D) None
b 0
(A) a = 0, b=5 (B) a = b  2 4 n 8
41. If A    x    B    and
(C) a = 5, b=0 (D) None  3 4 1 10 
AX = B then n =
 x 1
35. If A   2
 and A is the identify matrix (A) 0 (B) 1
 1 0  (C) 2 (D) 3
then x =
(A) 3 (B) 2 0 1 2004
42. If A    then A =
(C) 1 (D) 0 1 0 

ANCE 156
 Matrices

(A) 0 (B) A (A) 3 (B) – 2

(C) A2 (D) – 1 (C) 2 (D) – 3
1 5 
43. If A – 2B    and 2A – 3B 47. 1 3
3 7  If A    then |A2 – 2A| =
 2 5  2 1
  then matrix B is equal to -
 0 7 (A) – 25 (B) 5
 0 5  0 1 (C) 15 (D) 25
(A)   (B)  
  3 6   1 7 2 3 
48. If A      8A–1 =
  4  5 4 5  2  1 
(C)   (D)  
  6  7 6 7 1 0 1 3 
(A)  (B) 
0 1 
2 2
 4 2 2
44. If A    then A – 5A = 2 3
  1 1  (C)  (D) None
1 2
(A) 0 (B) I
(C) A (D) 5I 49. If B is a non-singular matrix and A is a square
matrix then det (B–1 AB) =
3 1 2
45. If A    and A – kA – 4I2 = 0, then (A) det (A–1) (B) det A
1 4  (C) det B (D) det (B–1)
k=
(A) – 2 (B) 2 x 1   y 1  1 2
(C) – 3 (D) 3 50. If     then x
  1  y  3 x  2 1 
3  4 T T and y respectively -
46. If 5A    and A . A = A . A = I,
 4 x  (A) 0, 1 (B) 1, 0
then x = (C) – 1, 1 (D) 0, – 1

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C A B D C C A D B A
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C B C A D B C A A B
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . D C D C B B D A C A
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . C C D B D A C C A B
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans . C D C A B A D B B B

ANCE 157
 Statistics

(ii) Grouped data : To present the data in a

Extraction of meaningful information more meaningful way, we condense the
by collection of dat a, organising, data into convenient number of classes
summarising, presenting and analysing the or groups is called grouped data.
data is a branch of mathematics called
 Observation :
statistics.
Each numerical figure in a data is called
The word ‘Statistics’ is derived from the
an observation.
Latin word ‘Status’ which means
Political State.
The number of times a particular
observation occurs is called its frequency.
1. Statistics is not suited to the study of
qualitative phenomenon, as beauty,  Frequency Distribution :
honesty, poverty. The tabular arrangement of data showing
2. Statistics does not study individuals but it the frequency of each item is called a
deals with group. frequency ditribution.
3. Statistics laws are not exact. But they are
true on averages only.
4. Statistics is liable to be misused. Data (i) Inclusive Form (Discontinuous form) :
collected for certain purpose, may not be A frequency distribution in which each
suitable for another purpose. upper limit of each class is also included.
(ii) Exclusive form (Continuous form) : A
 Primary Collection : frequency distribution in which each upper
If the data is collected by the investigator limit of each class is excluded and lower
herself/himself with the specific purpose, limit is included.
then such datta is called the primary
collection.  Frequency distribution of an ungrouped
data :
 Secondary Collection : Tally method. A bar (|) called tally mark
If the data collected by someone else is put against the number when it occurs.
other than investigator are known as When occured 4 t imes, t he fift h
secondary collection. occurrence is represented by putting
diagonally a cross tally (/) on the first
four tallies. This technique facilitates the
The word data means information in the counting of the tally marks at the end.
form of numerical figures or a set of given
facts. Example :
Form a discrete frequency distribution
 Types Of Data : from the following scores.
The data is classified into two types 15, 18, 16, 20, 25, 24, 25, 20, 16, 15,
18, 18, 16, 24, 15, 20, 28, 30, 27, 16,
(i) Raw data : Data obtained from direct 24, 25, 20, 18, 28, 27, 25, 24, 24, 18,
observation is called raw data. 18, 25, 20, 16, 15, 20, 27, 28, 29, 16.

ANCE 158
 Statistics

Variate Tally marks Frequency Range

 No. of classes =
15 |||| 4
class size
16 |||| | 6
18 |||| | 6  Class Size : The difference between
20 |||| | 6 upper and lower class limit is called Class
24 |||| 5
25 |||| 5 size.
27 ||| 3
28 ||| 3  Maximum Value & Minimum Value :
29 | 1
30 | 1 The Minimum value of the variate should
be included in the first class. The
Total 40
maximum value of the variate should be
 Frequency Distributin Of Grouped included in the last class interval.
Data :
 Class Limits Or Class Boundaries :
Sometimes the data is so large that it is
inconvenient to lay every mark in the The lowest and highest marks which are
frqeuency distribution table. Then we included in a class are called lower class
group the marks into convenient classes limit and upper class limit of the class.
as groups. Here, marks obtained by all of the
students are divided into seven classes
Example :
namely, 25–35, 35–45 and so on. In class
The marks of 30 students of a class, 25–35, 25 is called Lower class limit and
obtained in a test (out of 75) are given
35 is called Upper class limit.
below :
42, 21, 50, 37, 42, 37, 38, 42, 49, 39, Here, class size is 35 – 25 = 45 – 35
56, 53, 47, 29, 59, 61, 53, 17, 39, 17, = 10.
39, 42, 44, 14, 27, 7, 19, 51, 54
Construct a frequency distribution table  Class Marks : Class mark is the mid
with a class size of 10. value of a particular class i.e., the average
Solution : of it s class limit s mark is t he
representative of its class.
Marks Tally marks Frequency
Class Mark (or Mid-Value of the class)
0 – 10 | 1
10 – 20 |||| 4
Upper class limit  lower class limit

20 – 30 ||| 3 2
30 – 40 |||| | 6
40 – 50 |||| |||| 9  Class Interval :
50 – 60 |||| | 6
60 – 70 | 1 The group in which the raw data is
condensed is called a class interval. Each
 Range : class is bounded by two figures.
Determine the difference between the
minimum and maximum marks. This is  Class Mark Or Mid-Value :
called range of the data. Class mark =
Range Upper limit + lower limit
= Maximum mark – Minimum mark 2

ANCE 159
 Statistics
 Cumulative Frequency :  Graphical Representation Of Statiscal
The cumulative frequency corresponding Data :
to a class is the sum of all the frequencies
Graphical representation of statistical data
upto and that class.
is very useful in comparison of statistical
data. The pictorial representations are
There are two types of cumulative eye-catching and leave a deeper and more
frequencies. lasting impression on the mind of the
(i) Less Than Cumulative Frequency :
observer.
For Less Than Cumulative Frequencies
we add up the frequencies from the
above.
(ii) Greater Than Cumulative Frequency :
For Greater Than Cumulative Frequencies (i) Bar Graph
we add up the frequencies from the (ii) Histogram
below.
(iii) Frequency polygon
Example : Construct less than and greater than (iv) Ogive (cumulative frequency curve)
cumulative fequency distributions from the
following data :
Marks obtained No. of students
Bars of uniform width are drawn with
0 – 20 2
20 – 40 7 equal spacing between them on x-axis
40 – 60 11 depicting the variable. The values of the
60 – 80 18 variables are shown on y-axis and the
80 – 100 12 height of the bars will be proportional to
values of the variables.
Solution :
(i) Less than cumulative frequency table Example : The expenditure of a company under
Marks No. of students (C.F.) different head (in thousands of rupees) is
obtained given below: Draw a bar chart to depict
Less than 20 2 the above data.
Less than 40 9=2+7
Less than 60 22 = 2 + 7 + 11 Expenditure
Less than 80 38 = 2 + 7 + 11 + 18 Head (in thousands
Less than 100 50 = 2 + 7 + 11 + 18 + 12 of rupee s)
(ii) More than cumulative frequency table Salary of employees 400
Marks No. of students (C.F.) Travelling Allowance (TA) 100
obtained
More than 0 50 = (12 + 18 + 11 + 7 + 2) Rent 150
More than 19 48 = ( 12+ 18 + 11 + 7)
Equipment 200
More than 39 41 = ( 12 + 18 + 11)
More than 59 30 = (12 + 18) Miscellaneous 300
More than 79 12

ANCE 160
 Statistics
y
400
36
350
Expenditure in Rupees

300
30

24

No. of workers
250

200
Salary of employees

18
150

Miscellaneous
12

Equipment
100
6
Rent

50
TA

x
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Heads of expenditure
Wages

A histogram is a graphical representation

of a frequency distribution. While drawing Frequency polygon of a frequency
a histogram, we distribution is obtained from the histogram
(i) represent the class boundaries along the of the frequency distribution by joining
x-axis. the mid-points of respective tops of the
(ii) represent the class frequencies along the rectangles in a histogram. To complete
y-axis. the polygon, the mid-points at each end
(iii) construct a rectangle with bases along the are joined to the immediately lower or
x-axis and heights along the y-axis (see higher mid-points (as the case may be) at
the following remark). zero frequency.
It is a line graph of class frequency
Example : The following table gives the wages
plotted against class mark. It can be
in rupees of the workers in factory.
obtained by two methods :
Represent the data in the form of
histogram. (i) By using Histogram
Wages (in R.s) No. of workers (ii) Without using Histogram
0 – 10 12
10 –20 23
20 – 30 35
30 – 40 20
40 – 50 10 It can be obt ained by connecting
mid-points of the top of reactangles of
Sol. We represent the class limits along x-axis histogram.
and frequencies along y-axis. Taking class
Step 1: Draw the histogram from the given data.
intervals as heights, we construct the
rectangles to obtain the histogram of the Step 2: Obtain the mid-points of the upper
given frequency distribution as shown
horizonal sides of each rectangle.
alongside.

ANCE 161
 Statistics
Step3: Join these mid-ponts of the adjacent (iv) Frequency Polygon (Without Using
rectangles by dotted lines. Histograms) :
Calculate the class marks (mid points of
Step4: Obtain the mid-point of two class intervals class intervals x1, x2, ....., xn of the given
of zero frequency, one adjacent to the class intervals.
first on its left and one adjacent to the
last, on its right. Class mark  Upper limit  Lower lim it
2
Step5: Complete the polygon by joining the Example: Construct of frequency polygon for
mid-points of first and last class intervals the following data :
to the mid-point of the imagined class Age (in years) No. of persons
intervals adjacent to them. 0–4 1
4–8 3
Example : 8 – 12 6
12 – 16 8
For the following data, draw a histogram 16 – 20 10
and a frequency polygon. 20 – 24 8
24 – 28 5
Age (in years) No. of persons 28 – 32 3
0–6 6 32 – 36 2
6 – 12 11 Sol.
12 – 18 25 Age class-marks No. of person
18 – 24 35 0–4 2 1
24 – 30 18 4–8 6 3
30 – 36 12 8 – 12 10 6
12 – 16 14 8
36 – 42 6
16 – 20 18 10
Sol. First we draw the histogram of the given 20 – 24 22 8
24 – 28 26 5
data, then we will find out the mid-points 28 – 32 30 3
of the top of rectangles. Join these mid- 32 – 36 34 2
points by dotted straight lines. Complete
y
the polygon by joining the mid-points of (18, 10)
10
first and last class intervals to the mid- 9
points of imagined class intervals adjacent 8 (14, 8) (22, 8)

to them. 7
No. of persons

6 (10, 6)
y 5 (26, 5)
4
35 3 (6, 3) (30, 3)
30
2
1 (34, 2)
(2, 1)
25 x
No. of persons

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
20
Age
15

10

5
Statistical data also can be presented in
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
x the form of pie graph. in the pie graph,
Age a circle is divided into various sectors, in

ANCE 162
 Statistics
proportion with the various component 4. To distinguish different sectors from one
parts of the total. another, different shades can be used.
Degree of any component = Office work
Component value Playing shuttle
 360
Total value
Exercise

Watching TV

Sleeping

Miscellaneous Pie diagram showing the time

spent on different activities
Example :
A person spends his time daily as shown
below.
Cumulative frequency curve or an ogive
A ctivity Number of hours
Office work
is the graphical representation of a
9
Exercis e 1 cumulative frequency distribution.
Playing s huttle 2 There are two methods of constructing
W atching TV 3 an ogive.
Sleeping 7
M is cellaneous 2
(i) Less than method
Sol. (ii) More than method.
Activity Number Angle of the
of hours sector Example : (i) Less than cumulative frequency
Office work 9 9 curve
 360  135 Class interval Frequency
24
Exercise 1 1 0–8 8
 360  15 8 – 16 12
24
Playing 2 2 16 – 24 20
shuttle  360  30 24 – 32 16
24
Watching TV 3 3 32 – 40 8
 360  45 40 – 48 10
24
Sleeping 7 7 Solution : We first prepare the cumulative
 360  105
24 frequency distribution table.
Miscellaneous 2 2 Class- Frequency Cumulative
 360  30
24 interval frequency
Total 24 360° (less than type)
 Steps : 0–8 8 8
1. Draw a circle with convenient radius. 8 – 16 12 20
2. Convert each component of the data into 16 – 24 20 40
degress. 24 – 32 16 56
3. Mark the angles at the centre of the circle 32 – 40 8 64
and draw the sectors. 40 – 48 10 74

ANCE 163
 Statistics
Mark the upper class limits along x-axis
and the cumulative frequency along y- Number of Scores Cumulative
Scores
axis. Thus we plot the points (8, 8), (16, candidates more than Frequency
20), (24, 40), (32, 56), (40, 64) and
(48, 74). Join these points by a free hand 400–450 20 400 230
curve. Complete the curve by joining the
450–500 35 450 210
first point of the curve to the point (lower
limit, 0). 500–550 40 500 175

550–600 32 550 135

600–650 24 600 103

650–700 27 650 79
cumulative frequency

700–750 18 700 61

750–800 34 750 27

Mark the lower class limits on x-axis and

cumulative frequency along y-axis. Plot
x the points (400, 230), (450, 210), (500,
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56
175), (550, 135), (600, 103), (650, 79),
Class-Intervals
(700, 61), (750, 27) and an imagined
Example : The frequency distribution of scores point (800, 0).
obtained by 230 candidates in a medical
y
entrance test is as follows :
Number of 240 (400, 230)
Socres :
candidates : 220
(450, 210)
400–450 20 200
440–500 35 180
500–550 40 (500, 175)
160
Number of candidates

550–600 32
140
600–650 24 (550, 135)
120
650–700 27
100 (600, 103)
700–750 18
750–800 34 80 (650, 79)
60 (700, 61)
Draw cumulative frequency curve by
more than method. 40
20 (750, 27)
Solution :
x
More than method. Let us first prepare 0
800
700
750
600
650
550
450
500
400

the cumulative frequency table by more

than method as given below : Scores

ANCE 164
 Statistics

 Mean Of Frequency Distribution :

The commonly used measure of central If x1, x2, x3.......,xn are n values of variable
tendency (or averages) are :
with corresponding frequencies f1, f2,
(i) Arithmetic Mean (A.M.) or Simple Mean f3,......fn respectively, then the arithmetic
(ii) Median mean of these values is defined as
(iii) Mode f1x1  f 2 x 2  ...  f n x n
Mean = f1  f 2  f3  ....f n
Arithmetic mean of a set of observations
is equal to their sum divided by the total Mean =
f x i i

number of observations. f i

Mean of raw data : If x1, x2, x3........... xn

are the n values (or observations) then, or =
f x
i i
or  fx
A.M. (Arithmetic mean) is f i f
n

x1  x 2  ........x n  xi
x =
i 1 EXAMPLE :
n n
Find the arithmetic mean of the following
n
nx = Sum of observations =  xi frequency distribution :
i1

i.e., product of mean and number of items x f

gives sum of observation. 1 5
2 9
 Mean : 3 12
Sum of all observations 4 17
Mean = Number of observations 5 14
6 10
If x1, x2, x3,......., xn are the values of n 7 6
observations, then the arithmetic mean of
these observations is given by Sol. :
x1  x 2  x 3  ...  x n X F FX
n 1 5 5
EXAMPLE : 2 9 18
Find the arithmetic mean of 20, 22, 34, 3 12 36
54, 27, 28. 4 17 68
A.M.
5 14 70

x i 
x 20  22  34  54  27  28 6 10 60
n 6 7 5 35
85 5 Total 72 292
=  30
6 6

ANCE 165
 Statistics

 Arithmetic mean of grouped data :  n 1

th

(A) Median = value of   observation.

Ex. Calculate the arithmetic mean of the marks  2 
scored by students of a class in a class test (If ‘n’ is odd)
from the following data. (B) Median
1  n  n  
Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 Total = value of    th item +  +1 th item 
2  2  2  
Number of
13 20 28 21 18 100 (If ‘n’ is even )
students

Sol. At first we will find the class-mark of each EXAMPLE :

class interval and represent it by x.
The marks secured by 15 students are 70,
frequency class  mark
Marks f .x. 55, 95, 62, 82, 65, 60, 68, 75, 58, 64,
(f ) (x)
0  10 85, 80, 90, 51. Find the median marks.
0  10 13 5 13  5  65
2 Sol. Arranging the marks is ascending order,
10  20
10  20 20  15 20  15  300
2 we have 51, 55, 58, 60, 62, 64, 65, 68,
20  30
20  30 28  25 28  25  700 70, 75, 80, 82, 85, 90, 95.
2
30  40 Here n = 15 which is odd.
30  40 21  35 21  35  735
2
40  50  n 1
40  50 18  45 18  45  810  Median = value of   th item
2  2 
Total 100 2610
 15  1 
f .x. 2610 = value of   th item
Mean     26.1  2 
f 100
= value of 8th item = 68
Hence Median = 68

Median is the middle value of the EXAMPLE :

distribution. It is the value of variable such The monthly salaries (in Rs) of 10
that the number of observations above it employees of a factory are given below :
is equal to the number of observations 1200, 8500, 9200, 7400, 11300, 12700,
below it. 7800, 11500, 10320, 8100.
Find the median salary.
 Median Or Raw Data : Sol. Arranging the given data in ascending
(i) Arrange t he data in ascending or order, we have 7400, 7800, 8100, 8500,
9200, 10320, 11300, 11500, 12000,
descending order.
12700.
(ii) Count the no. of observation (let there Here n = 10 which is even.
be ‘n’ observations)  Median

ANCE 166
 Statistics

1  n  n  
= Value of  th item  1th item
2  2  2  
Subjective Type Questions :

1  10   1. Prepare the frequency distribution table

 10 
= Value of  th item  1th item with 10 as class size for the following
2  2  2  
observations.
1
= Value of [5th item + 6th item] 2 14 27 41 50 60 67 71 74 79 92 96
2
4 20 29 42 51 64 69 72 75 93 93 97
1 8 23 30 46 52 65 70 73 78 94 94 100
= (9200 + 10320)
2
19520 2. Draw pie chart to represent the percentage
  Rs. 9760
2 of number of students in different classes.
Percentage of
Classes
number of students
Mode is the value of that variate for Pre-primary 25%
which the frequency is the maximum. The I TO IV 20%
item which occurs most frequently in a V and VI 15%
data is called mode. VII and VIII 30%
IX and X 10%
EXAMPLE :
Find out the value of the mode from the 3. Draw vertical bar chart for the following
following data: data.
50, 70, 50, 70, 80, 70, 70, 80, 70, 50. Classes V VI VII VIII IX X
Sol. : The value 70 is repeating maximum number Average
height 100 105 110 120 134 156
of times i.e. 5. Therefore mode of the
(cm)
given series is 70.
 Emperical Relationship among Mean, 4. Following are the ages (in years) of 360
Median & Mode : patients, getting medical treatment in a
Following the relation : hospital :
Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean Age (in years) Number of patients
10 – 20 90
2
Median = Mode + (Mean – Mode) 20 – 30 50
3
30 – 40 60
3
Mean = Mode + (Median – Mode) 40 – 50 80
2 50 – 60 50
Symmetric Distribution : A distribution is 60 – 70 30
said to be symmetric if
Construct the less than & greater than
Mean = Median = Mode frequency table for the above data.

ANCE 167
 Statistics
5. The following table shows the number of (a) What is the size of the class 300 – 400 ?
leterate females in the age group (10 - 57 (B) What is the lower limit of the class
years) in a village. Draw a histogram to 200 – 300 ?
represent the below data. (C) What is the upper limit of the class
400 – 500 ?
Age group (years) Number of females (D) What is the class mark of the class
10 – 17 300 100 – 200 ?
18 – 25 980 (e) What is the frequency of the class
26 – 33 740 500 – 600 ?
34 – 41 580 (f) To which class does the article belong
42 – 49 260 whose mass is 100 grams ?
50 – 57 140
Total 3000 10. Pie chart drawn in figure depicts the
number of students of classes VII to X of
6. Draw the frequency polygon representing a school. Read it and answer the following
the following frequency distribution. questions, if there are 720 students in these
four classes.
Class interval Frequency
(a) How many students are in class X ?
30 – 34 12
(B) How many students are more in class VII
35 – 39 16
than in class VIII ?
40 – 44 20
(C) Find the ratio of the students of class IX
44 – 49 8
to that of class X.
50 – 54 10
55 – 59 4
IX VIII
7. Find the mean, median and mode of the 75° 105°
following data.
60° 120°
25, 19, 17, 24, 23, 29, 31, 40, 19, 20, X
VII
22, 26, 17, 35, 21, 19, 35.
a a a a
8. If the median of , a , , and is 6,
2 3 5 4 Objective Type Questions
then find the value of a (a > 0).
1. The arithmetic mean of the observations
9. The following table represents the masses
(in grams) of some articles. Read the table from the data 3, 4, 6, 8, 14 is 5, then the
and answer the questions that follow : value of x is -
(A) 35 (B) 32
Class Intervals Frequency
(C) 36 (D) 33
0 – 100 4
100 – 200 5 2. The mean of 40 observations was 160. It
200 – 300 15 was detected on rechecking that the value
300 – 400 18 of 165 was wrongly copied as 125 for
400 – 500 2 computation of mean. Find the correct
500 – 600 3 mean.

ANCE 168
 Statistics
(A) 160 (B) 161 (A) 22.78
(C) 163 (D) 162 (B) 30.78
(C) 20.78
3. The mean of 10 numbers is 20. If 5 is
subtracted from every number, what will (D) 21.78
be the new mean? 10. Find the mean of the following numbers :
(A) 10 (B) 12 12, 14, 17, 25, 10, 11, 20, 8, 15 and
(C) 15 (D) 11 18 -
4. The mean of 16 numbers is 8. If 2 is (A) 12 (B) 15
added to every number, what will be the (C) 17 (D) 13
new mean ?
11. The mean of 5, 7, p, 11, 15, 17 and 20
(A) 12 (B) 11
is 12, find p.
(C) 14 (D) 10
(A) 7 (B) 8
5. If x and y are two distinct positive integers, (C) 9 (D) 6
then mean of x and y is always greater
than __. 12. If the mean of 5 observations is 15 and
that of another 10 observations is 20, find
(A) xy (B) 2 xy the mean of all 15 observations
(C) 2 xy (D) xy (A) 11.30
(B) 16.33
6. Neeta and her four friends secured 65, (C) 17.33
78, 82, 94 and 71 marks in a test of
mathematics. Find the average (arithmetic (D) 18.33
mean) of their marks. 13. Find t he mean o f t he fo llowing
(A) 50 (B) 78 distribution :
(C) 68 (D) 70
x : 4 6 9 10 15
7. The marks obtained by 10 students in f : 5 10 10 7 8
physics out of 40 are 24, 27, 29, 34, 32, (A) 7 (B) 9
19, 26, 35, 18, 21 compute the mean of (C) 8 (D) 6
the marks.
(A) 20.50 (B) 25.50 14. Find t he mean o f t he fo llowing
(C) 26.50 (D) 24.50 distribution :
8. The mean of 20 observations was found x : 10 30 50 70 89
to be 47. But later it was discovered that f: 7 8 10 15 10
one observation 66 was wrongly taken (A) 55 (B) 30
as 86. Find the correct mean. (C) 40 (D) 50
(A) 45 (B) 44
(C) 54 (D) 46 15. Find the value of p, if the mean of
following distribution is 7.5.
9. A car owner buys petrol at Rs. 20.00, x : 3 5 7 9 11 13
Rs. 24.00 and Rs. 25.00 per litre for
three successive years. Compute the y : 6 8 15 p 8 4
average cost per litre of petrol when he (A) 1 (B) 3
spends Rs. 12000 on petrol each year. (C) 2 (D) 4

ANCE 169
 Statistics

16. If the mean of the following data be 9.2, Class Interval Frequency
find the value of p. 0 – 10 3
11 – 20 4
21 – 30 2
31 – 40 5
(A) 2 (B) 1 41 – 50 6
(C) 15 (D) 6.4 (A) 21.9 (B) 20.9
(C) 28.9 (D) 27.9
17. The marks of 30 students are given
below, find the mean marks. 20. For the follow ing distribution, calculate
Marks Number of Students mean using all the suitable methods.
10 4
Size of Item 1–4 4 –9 9–16 16–27
11 3
Freque ncy 6 12 26 20
12 8
13 6 (A) 13.25 (B) 10.25
14 7 (C) 11.25 (D) 12.25
15 2 21. The mid value of a class interval is 42. If
(A) 12.5 (B) 10.5 the class size is 10, then the upper and
(C) 14.5 (D) 11.5 lower limits of the class are :
(A) 47 & 37
18. A survey was conducted by a group of (B) 37 & 47
students as a part of their environment (C) 37.5 & 47.5
awareness programme, in which they
(D) 47.5 & 37.5
collected the following data regarding the
number of plants in 20 houses in locality. 22. The arithmetic mean of 5 numbers is 27.
Find the mean number of plants per If one of the numbers be excluded, their
house. mean is 25. The excluded number is :
(A) 28 (B) 26
Number of plants No. of houses
(C) 25 (D) 35
0–2 1
2–4 2 23. The median of 0, 2, 2, 2, –3, 5, –1, 5,
4–6 1 5, –3, 6, 6, 5, 6 is :
6–8 5 (A) 0 (B) –1.5
8 – 10 6 (C) 2 (D) 3.5
10 – 12 2
12 – 14 3 24. The average value of the median of 2, 8,
3, 7, 4, 6, 7 and the mode of 2, 9, 3, 4,
Which method did you use for finding the
9, 6, 9 is :
mean and why ?
(A) 9 (B) 8
(A) 4.1 (B) 8.1 (C) 7.5 (D) 6
(C) 6.1 (D) 7.1
25. If the mean of first x natural numbers is
19. Find the mean of the following distribution 26, then find the sum of the first x natural
by direct method. numbers

ANCE 170
 Statistics
(A) 1320 (B) 1362 (C) 2x + 3y = 13
(C) 1632 (D) 1326 (D) x2 + y2 = 15
26. If the mode of the observation 4, 2, 3, 3,
33. The number of times a particular item
3, 2, 2, 4, 2, 4, x, 3, 4, 4, 2, 3, 4 is 4 then
occurs in a class interval is called its
x cannot be -
(A) mean
(A) 2
(B) 4 (B) frequency
(C)  (C) cumulative frequency
(D) Both (A) & (C) (D) none of these

27. If the mean of 2, x and y is 8, then the 34. If the mean of x and 1/x is M, then the
mean of x, y and 8 is _________ . mean of x2 and 1/x2 is
(A) 8 (B) 9 (A) M2
(C) 12 (D) 10 (B) M2/4
28. If the ratio of mode and median is 9 : 7, (C) 2M2 –1
then find the ratio of mean and mode. (D) 2M2 + 1
(A) 2 : 3
(B) 4 : 5 35. In a class test in English, 10 students
scored 75 marks, 12 scored 60 marks, 8
(C) 5 : 9
scored 40 marks and 3 scroed 30 marks.
(D) 8 : 9 The mode for their scores is
29. If the mode of a data is 18 and the mean (A) 75 (B) 30
is 24, then median is - (C) 60 (D) 25
(A) 18 (B) 24
36. The average age of a group of eight
(C) 22 (D) 21
members is the same as it was 3 years
30. A group of 10 items has mean 6. If the ago, when a young member is substitued
mean of 4 of these items is 7.5, then the for an old member. The incoming member
mean of the remaining items is - is younger to the outgoing member by
(A) 6.5 (B) 5.5 (A) 11 years
(C) 4.5 (D) 5.0 (B) 24 years
(C) 28 years
31. If in a data, 10 numbers arranged in
increasing order. If the 7th entry is (D) 16 years
increased by 4, then the median increases
37. Following are the percentages of marks
by
of 10 students of a class :
(A) zero (B) 4
50, 60, 70, 72, 74, 75, 80, 88, 75, 100
(C) 6 (D) 5
Frequency of students in the class (60–
32. The mean of 6, y, 7x and 14 is 8. Then 68) will be :
(A) x + y = 13 (A) 5 (B) 1
(B) x – y = 13 (C) 6 (D) 3

ANCE 171
 Statistics
38. The mode of the following data is - (A) 21 (B) 22
Size 1 3 5 7 9 (C) 20 (D) 24
Frequency 6 9 12 3 15
(A) 4 (B) 5.66 42. The following data have been arranged
(C) 6.25 (D) 9 in descending orders of magnitude 75,
70, 68, x + 2, x –2, 50, 45, 40 If
39. Mean of ages of 20 students is 10 years.
the median of the data is 60, find the
5 students with mean age of 12 years
leave the class. Mean of ages of the value of x.
remaining studetns will be - (A) 50 (B) 60
(A) 4 (B) 5.66 (C) 40 (D) 30
(C) 6.25 (D) 9.33
43. Mean of n observations is x. If each of
40. Find the mean of 50 observations. It is
these observations is increased by 1, 2, 3,
given that the mean of 32 of them is 28
and the mean of the remaining 18 4, ........ n respectively, then what will be
observations is 30. their mean?
(A) 30.24 (A) x
(B) 28.72 ( n  1)
(B) x 
(C) 24.82 2
(D) 30.32
n ( n  1)
(C) x 
41. The median of the observations 11, 12, 2
14, 18, x + 2, x + 4, 30, 32, 35, 41
arranged in ascending order is 24. Find ( n  1)
(D) x 
2n
the value of x.

Q . N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . A B C D D B C D A B
Q . N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . C D B A B D A B C A
Q . N. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . A D D C D D D A C D
Q . N. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . A A B C C B B B D B
Q . N. 41 42 43
Ans . A B B

ANCE 172
 Probability

 Combination :  Event :
If n objects are given and we have to choose Any subset of the sample space is called
r (r  n) out of them and order is not event of the experiment. It is denoted by
important such a choice is called as the letter A, B, C, D, .................
combination of n objects taken r at a time.  Probability of Event :
 Permutation : The ratio of number of events and number
If n objects are given and we have to of sample points is called as probability of
arrange r (r  n ) out of them and order is event.
important such an arrangement is called as  Fundamental Principle of Counting :
permutation of n objects taken r at a time. Suppose one thing A can be done in m
 Factorial Notation : different ways and another thing B can be
The product of one to n is called as factorial done in n different ways. Then, the total
of n and denoted as n! number of different ways in which
 Random Experiment : (i) A and B can be done is (m . n).
An action which gives one or more results (ii) A or B can be done is (m + n)
is called as random experiment.  Coin Tossing :
 Union of Events : One coin is tossed n times or n coins are
A and B are two events of sample space S, tossed once.
then A  B is the event either A or B or n (S) = 2n
both take place. A coin is tossed,
 Intersection of events : S {H,T}, n (S) = 2
Two events A and B of the sample space S, Two coins are tosed,
then A  B is the event both A and B take S {HH, HT, TH, TT}, n (S) = 4
place. A and A’ are mutually exclusive events Three coins are tossed,
as well as exhaustive events as a A’ = { } S = {HHH, HHT, HTT; THH, THT, HTH,
and A  A’ = S. TTT}, n (S) = 8
 Mutually Exclusive Events :  Dice thrown :
Two events are said to be mutually exclusive, A dice is thrown n times or n dice are thrown
if two events do not have common elements. once, then n (S) = 6n
 Exhaustive Events : Dice is thrown n (S) = 6
Two events are said to be exhaustive events, S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
if (A  B) = S i.e., (A  B)’ =  Sample space S if two dices are thrown =
 Complementary event : {(1,1) (1,2) (1,3) (1,4) (1,5) (1,6),
Complementary event of A is denoted by (2,1) (2,2) (2,3) (2,4) (2,5) (2,6),
A’. (3,1) (3,2) (3,3) (3,4) (3,5) (3,6)
 Sample Space : (4,1) (4,2) (4,3) (4,4) (4,5) (4,6)
The set of total number of possible outcomes (5,1) (5,2) (5,3) (5,4) (5,5) (5,6)
is called as sample space. (6,1) (6,2) (6,3) (6,4) (6,5) (6,6)

ANCE 173
 Probability

For a finite sample space with equally likely

outcomes, the probability of an event E,
denoted by P(E), is given by
P(E) =
Number of outcomes favourable to the event E
Total number of possible outcomes

n(E)
i.e., P(E) 
n(S)
The cards jack, queen, king are called face
cards. There are 12 face cards. Card bearing A summary of the basic properties of
a number is called ace card. probability is given below.
Permutation and combination:
1. 0  P(E)  1 for any event E.
n n! n!
Pr  ; n Cr  2. P (certain event) = 1, P (sample space) = 1.
(n  r)! r!(n  r)! 3. P (impossible event) = 0.
n! = (n –1) (n –2) ....... 1
4. P(E) = 1 – P(E)
n! = n (n –1)!
n(n  1) In this chapter, we will learn how to solve
n
C2  more complicated probability problems. In
2!
n
Cr = nCn–r order to help us visualize the sample space
n and the events in such problems, we usually
Pn = n!
n draw a diagram called a possibility diagram
P1= n
n
or a tree diagram.
P2 = n (n – 1)
n
C1 = n A. Possibility Diagram :
When a random experiment involves
Probability of simple combined Events two stages, we can use a rectangular grid,
called a possibility diagram, to represent
sample space S the sample space.
× × event E
× × × Ex. An unbiased coin is tossed and a letter is
× × outcome x selected at random from the word
×
×
“SMART”. Find the probability of getting a
A random experiment is a process involving head on the tossed coin and letter “M” from
chance that generates a result called an the word.
outcome. In general, there are two or more Sol. Here, the tossing of a coin is a stage; and
possible outcomes in a random experiment. the selection of a letter is another stage. This
The probability that an outcome will occur experiment involves two stages. The
is a measure of the chance of the occurence outcomes can be represented by the crosses
of the outcome. in the diagram below. This diagram is called
The set of the possible outcomes is called a possibility diagram.
the sample space, usually denoted by S.
A set of some of the possible outcomes is T × × × × ×
Coin
called an event, usually denoted by E. H × × × × ×
In other words, an event E is a subset of the
sample space S. S M A R T
Letter

ANCE 174
 Probability

The sample space S = {HS, HM, HA, HR, The 8 outcomes are equally likely.
HT, TS, TM, TA, TR, TT}, where the first  P (3 heads) = P (HHH)
letter stands for the result of tossing the coin 1
(H for Head and T for Tail), and the second =
8
letter stands for the letter selected for the (b) Let E = {outcomes showing 2 heads and
word “SMART”. 1 tail}
The favourable outcome of getting a head = {HHT, HTH, THH}
and the letter “M” is HM. 3
 P (getting a head and the letter “M”)  P (2 heads and 1 tail) =
8
1 Mutually Exclusive Events
= .
10 For any two events, A and B, we denote
B. Tree Diagram : probability that both events A and B will
occur as P(A and B);
If a random experiment consists of two or
more stages, we can use a tree diagram to probability that either event A or event B
will occur, or both will occur as P (A or B).
represent the process. Let us study some
In a sample space, two events as mutually
examples.
exclusive if they cannot occur at the same
Ex. Three unbiased coins are tossed. Find the time.
probability of getting For example, in rolling a dice,
(a) 3 heads, event A = {1, 3, 5} and event B = {2, 4}
(b) 2 heads and 1 tail. are mutually exlusive. This is because when
Sol. (a) Here, the tossing of each coin is a stage. the die shows 1, 3 or 5, it definitely cannot
1st Coin 2nd Coin 3rd Coin Outcome show 2 or 4. Note that A  B = .
H HHH
That means, two events, A and B, are
H mutually exclusive if A  B = .
T HHT S A B
H
H HTH
T
T HTT
H THH Let us investigate the relationships between
H P(A), P(B), P(A and B) and P(A or B) for
T T THT two mutually exclusive events, A and B.
H TTH If A and B are two mutually exclusive events,
T
then the probability of A or B occuring is
T TTT
S A B
The above diagram is a tree diagram
showing the outcomes of tossing three coins.
In a tree diagram, the result of each stage is
shown at the end of a branch for that stage.
By reading along the branches, we get the Independent Events
outcomes of the experiment. Let us study another type of combination of
In this case the outcome HHH means the events. Intuitively, two events are said to be
first coin shows a head, the second coin independent events if the occurrence or non-
shows a head and the third coin shows a occurrence of one event does not affect the
head (as indicated by the branches), probability of occurrence of the other event.

ANCE 175
 Probability

For example, in tossing a fair coin twice, the

event A that the first toss shows a head and
the event B that the second toss shows a
head are independent. That is, event A does
not affect how likely event B will occur, and
vice versa.
If A and B are independent events, the
probability of both events A and B occuring
is the product of their individual probabilities.
i.e., P (A and B) = P(A) × P(B)
Further Probabilities
Consider drawing two balls at random from R = red ball
a bag containing 3 red balls and 5 green G = green bal
balls. Suppose the balls are drawn one by
one without replacement. Here P the first ball drawn is red and the
second ball drawn is green
Let A be the event that the first ball drawn
= P (GR)
is red,
B be the event that the second ball drawn 3 5
 
is green. 8 7
At first, there are 8 balls in the bag. After In general, when the occurrence of the
drawing the first ball, there will be 7 balls second event depends on the occurrence of
the first event, we may use a tree diagram
left in the bag.
to help us compute the probabilities.
1. If event A happens (i.e., the first ball drawn
is red), the remaining balls are 2 red ones Algebra of Events
and 5 green ones. Some standard methods of constructing new
events in terms of some given events
5
Hence, P(B)  . associated with a random experiment.
7 Verbal Description of event Equivalent set
2. If event A does not happen (i.e., that first theoretic notation
ball drawn is not red), the remaining balls Not A A
are 3 red ones and 4 green ones. A or B AB
4 A and B AB
Hence P(B)  . A but not B AB
7
That means, the probability of event B Neither A nor B A  B  ( A  B)
depends on whether event A will occur or At least one of A, B or C (A  B)  C
not. Exactly one of A and B ( A  B )  ( A  B)
Thus, A and B are NOT independent events. All three of A, B and C ABC
How do we calculate the probability of both Exactly two of A, B and C (A  B C) (A  B  C)
events A and B occuring if they are not  ( A  B  C)
independent? Addition theorems on Probability
We can also use a tree diagram to do this. i. Addition theorem for two events
In the tree diagram, the probabilities If A and B are two events associated with
indicating the second stage branches will a random experiment, then
depend on the results of the first stage. P (A  B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A  B)

ANCE 176
 Probability

Note : Therefore, the probability in favour of

4
If A and B are mutually exclusive events, obtaining a king is .
then P (A  B) = 0. 52
4 1
 P (A  B) = P(A) + P(B) P(K)   .
52 13
ii. Addition theorem for three events Ex.3 Find the probability of obtaining 7 on a single
If A, B, C are three events associated with toss of one dice.
a random experiment, then Sol.3 There are six different possible outcomes
P (A  B  C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(C) – and none of these out comes would produce
a 7. That is, zero of these outcomes would
P(A  B) – P(B  C) – P(A  C) +
be successful. The probability in favour of
P(A  B  C)
obtaining a 7 on a single toss of one dice is
Note : 0
, or 0 :
If A, B, C are mutually exclusive events, 6
then 0
P(7)   0.
P(A  B) = P(B  C) = P(A  C) 6
When an event cannot possibly succeed, we
= P(A  B  C) = 0 say it is an impossible event. The probability
 P (A  B C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(C) of an impossible event is zero.
iii. P (A  B)  P(B)  P(A  B) 0
P (impossible event)   0 (T  0)
iv. If B A, then T
(a) P (A  B)  P(A)  P(B) Ex.4 One card is drawn at random from a shuffled
standard of 52 cards. Find the probability
(b) P( B)  P( A ) that the card selected is not a king.
Sol.4 There are 52 different possible outcomes.
There are 4 kings in a deck, so the other 48
Ex.1 Find the probability of obtaining a number cards are not kings, and these are the
greater than 4 on a single toss of a dice. successful outcomes. Hence, the probability
48
Sol.1 There are six different possible outcomes that the card selected is not a king is .
52
and two of these outcomes, {5, 6}, are
48 12
successful. P (Not K)   .
52 13
Hence, the probability in favour of obtaining The sum of the probability that an event will
2 occur and the probability that it will not occur
a number greater than 4 is .
6 is 1. Therefore, we can solve this in another
2 1 way.
P (number greater than 4)   .
6 3 Be sure to remember that if
Ex.2 Find the probability of drawing a king (one S S
pick) from a shuffled standard deck of 52 P(A)  then P (not A)  1  (T  0)
T T
cards. (A standard deck of cards is the most Alternate Solution : The probability of
common type of deck used in most card 4 1
games containing 52 cards). selecting a king is or . Therefor, the
52 13
Sol.2 There are 52 different possible outcomes. probability that the card selected is not a
Four of these outcomes are successful : king king is
of spades, king of hearts, king of clubs, king 1 13 1 12
P (not K)  1     .
of diamonds. 13 13 13 13

ANCE 177
 Probability

Ex.5 Use the sample space for the total number Ex.7 In a certain group of 75 students, it has
of possible outcomes when a pair of dice is been determined that 16 students are taking
tossed to find the probability of obtaining a statistics, chemistry, and psychology; 24
sum of 7 on a single toss of a pair of dice. students are taking statistics and chemistry;
Sol.5 There are 36 total possible outcomes and 30 students are taking statistics and
six of these outcomes are successful, psychology; 22 students are taking chemistry
and psychology; 6 students are taking only
because there are six ways of obtaining a
statistics; 9 students are taking only chemistry;
sum of 7. Hence, the probability of obtaining
and 5 students are taking only psychology.
6 1
a 7 is or ; S C
36 6
I III
6 1 II
P(7) =  8
36 6 6 9
V
Note that a 7 is the most likely outcome IV 16 VI
11 14 6
when a pair of dice is tossed. It is believed 5
that this is one of the reasons why many VII
VIII P
people consider 7 as their lucky number. It
keeps coming up for them more often than (a) What is the probability that a student is
other numbers. not taking any of the three subjects?
(b) What is the probability that a student is
Ex.6 At a recent college registration, 100 students taking chemistry?
were interviewed. Eighty of the students Sol.7 We first complete the necessary Venn
stated that they had registered for a diagram (See above figure). After completing
mathematics course, 14 of the students stated the diagram, we can answer the questions.
that they had registered for a history course, (a) The probability that a student is not taking
and 5 of the students stated that they had 11
registered for a mathematics course and a any of the three subject is .
75
history course. What is the probability that (b) The probability that a student is taking
a student in this survey registered only for 39
history. chemistry is .
75
M H The answer to question (b) is obtained by
Sol.6 adding the number of students in each
75 5 9
partition of the chemistry circle. Hence, there
I II III are 39 students taking chemistry.
11 IV Ex.8 Mr. Examination is preparing a quickie quiz
A Venn diagram using the given information for his mathematics class to see if the students
is shown in above figure. With it, we can did their assignment. The quiz is to consist
summarize the information that 11 of the of three true-false questions. How many
students did not register for either a different arrangements of the answer are
possible? What are the possible outcomes?
mathematics course or a history course, 9
Sol.8 We have three questions and each questions
students registered only for history, and 75
has two possible outcomes (true or false).
students registered only for mathematics.
Using the counting principle, we compute
This information can also be used to solve 2 × 2 × 2= 8 total possible outcomes.
the probability problem. We note that the We can determine the various outcomes by
total number of students is 100. Whereas 9 means of a tree diagram. Remember that
of them are registered only for history. the quickie quiz consists of three questions
9 and the answer to each question is either
Hence, the answer is .
100 true or false.

ANCE 178
 Probability

Possible outcomes
First Second Third First Second Third
question question question question question question

Start

The sample space is listed beside the tree diagram.

Ex.9 What are the odds is favour of obtaining a 6

sum of 7 when a pair of dice is tossed once? 6 6 6 1
7 = 36     .
Sol.9 Using our definition, we first find probability 30 36 30 36 5
of obtaining a sum of 7 when a pair of dice 36
1
6 The odds in favour of obtaining a 7 are .
is tossed. It is . Next, we find the 5
36 But remember that the odds may also be
probability of not getting a 7. Recall that if stated as 1 to 5 or 1 : 5.
S Ex.10 What are the odds against obtaining an 11
P(A) = S/T, then P(not A) = 1 .
T when a pair of dice is tossed once?
Hence, we have Sol.10 Using the definition, we still find the
probability in favour of getting an 11 and the
6
P(7)  and probability against getting an 11 when a pair
36
of dice is tossed. The probability of getting
6 36 6 30 2
P(not 7)  1     . an 11 is , and the probability of not getting
36 36 36 36 36
Alternatively, if there are 6 ways in 36 that an 11 is
me may obtain a 7, then the remaining 30 2 2 2 34
ways in 36 is the probability of not obtaining 1   
36 36 36 36
a 7. Now we construct our ratio occording to
Now we construct our ratio according to the definition :
the definition : Odds against an
Odds in favour of 34
Probabilit y that A will occur 34 36 34 17
A 11  36    
Probabilit y that A will not occur 2 36 2 2 1
Odds in favour of 36

ANCE 179
 Probability

17 (iii) There are no even sums.

The odds against otaining an 11 are ,
1 0
which we would usually write as 17 to 1, or  P (the sum is even)   0.
12
17 : 1. Therefore, from the odds (17 : 1), Ex.12 A club holds an election for the post of
we can see that we probably are not going chairperson. The probabilities that the
to get an 11 when we roll the dice. Over the candidates Anjani and Laxmi will be elected
long run, we should get an 11 once out of are 0.36 and 0.47 respectively. Find the
every 18 tries. This is not a very good probability that
percentage of successful outcomes. (a) either Anjani or Laxmi will be elected
Ex.11 Bag A contains 4 chips numbered 1, 3, 5 (b) neither Anjani nor Laxmi will be elected.
and 7 respectively. Bag B contains 3 chips Sol.12 (a) Let A be the event that Anjani will be
numbered 2, 4 and 6 respectively. A chip is elected,
drawn at random from each bag. B be the event the Laxmi will be elected.
(a) Draw a tree diagram to show all the Since there is only 1 chairperson, the events,
possible outcomes. A and B, are mutually exclusive.
(b) Find the probability that the sum of the P (either Anjani or Laxmi will be elected)
two chips drawn is = P (A or B).
(i) 7, (ii) odd, (iii) even. = P(A) + P(B)
Sol.11 (addition of probabilities of mutually exclusive
(a) events)
Bag A Bag B Outcome = 0.36 + 0.47
2 (1, 2)
= 0.83
1 4 (1, 4)
6 (1, 6) (b) P (neither Anjani nor Laxmi will be elected)
2 (3, 2) =1 – P (either Monica or Roland will be
3 4 (3, 4) elected)
6 (3, 6)
2 (5, 2) = 1 – 0.83
5 4 (5, 4) = 0.17
6 (5, 6)
Ex.13 A card is drawn at random from a pack of
2 (7, 2)
7 4 (7, 4) 52 playing cards. Find the probability that
6 (7, 6) the card drawn is
The above diagram is the required tree (a) an ace or a 3,
diagram. There are 12 equally likely (b) an ace or a red card.
outcomes in the sample space. Sol.13 Let A be event that the card drawn is an
(b) (i) The favourable outcomes for a sum of 7 ace,
are : (1, 6), (3, 4) and (5, 2). B be event that the card drawn is a 3,
3 1 C be event that the card drawn is red,
 P (the sum is 7)   . 4 4
12 4 Then, P(A)  , P(B) = and
(ii) Since all the sums of the outcomes are 52 52
26
odd, P(C) = .
52
12 We cannot draw a card which is both an
P (the sum is odd)   1
12 ace and a 3.

ANCE 180
 Probability

 events A and B are mutually exclusive 7 18 5 12

   
events. 12 30 12 30
P (an ace or 3) = P (A or B) 31

= P(A) + P(B) 60
4 4 Ex.15 The probability that Guru will hit a target is
  4
52 52 . The probability that Srinu will hit the
8 2 5
  3
52 13 same target is . If each of them fires once,
4
(b) As there are 2 red aces, the diamond ace find the probability that the target will be
and the heart ace, events A and C are not hit by
mutually exclusive events. Therefore, we (a) both of them,
cannot apply the addition of probabilities (b) only one of them.
of mutually exclusive events to evaluate Sol.15 (a) P (Guru will miss) = 1 – P (Guru will hit)
P(A or C). We have to find P(A or C) here 4
by counting.  1
5
A part from the two red aces, there are 24 1

red cards. 5
P (an ace or a red card) = P (A or C) 3
Similarly, P (Srinu will miss)  1
4  24 28 7 4
   1
52 52 13 
Ex.14 Meena has 7 Indian stamps 5 Singapore 4
stamps. Seema has 12 Indian stamps and Hence, we have a tree diagram as shown
18 Singapore stamps. Each of them selects below.
a stamp at random from her own collection. Guru Srinu Outcome
3 H - Hit
Find the probability that the two stamps 4 H HH
M - Miss
selected from one Indian stamp and one 4 H
5
Singapore stamp. 1 M HM
4
Sol.14
Meena Seema Outcome 3
12 4 H MH
I II I - Indian 1
30 5 M
7 I stamp
12 S - Singapore 1 M MM
18 S IS 4
30 stamp
P (the target will be hit by both) = P (HH)
12 4 3 3
30 I SI   
5 5 4 5
12 S (b) P (the target will be hit by only one of them)
18 S SS
30
= P (Guru will hit and Srinu will miss)
P (one Indian stamp and one Singapore + P (Guru will miss and Srinu will hit)
stamp) = P (HM) + P (MH)
= P (IS or SI) 4 1 1 3 4 3 
      
= P (IS) + P (SI) 5 4 5 4 20 20 20

ANCE 181
 Probability

Ex.16 The probability that a worker with (b) P (at least one of them contracted a lung
occupational exposure to dust contracts a disease)
lung disease is 0.2. Three such workers are = 1 – P (none of them contracted a lung
checked at random. Find the probability that disesase) = 1 – 0.512 = 0.488
(a) none of the three workers contracted a Ex.17 In a library, shelf A has 10 Mathematics
lung disease, books and 6 Science books, while shelf B
(b) at least one of them contracted a lung has 8 Mathematics books and 12 Science
disease. Books. Ravi goes to one of these shelves
Sol.16 (a) P (a worker does not contract a lung and picks up a book at random. Find the
disease) probability that the book picked is a
= 1 – P (a worker contracts a lung disease) Mathematics book.
= 1 – 0.2 = 0.8 Sol.17
Shelf Book Outcome
Hence, we have a tree diagram as shown 10
below, 16 M AM
1st 2nd 3rd Outcome 1 A
worker worker worker 2 6 S AS
16
8
20 M BM
1
2 B
0.2
12 S BS
20
M - Mathematics
S - Science
0.8
P (picking a Mathematics book)
= P ({shelf A and Mathematics book} or
{Shelf B and Mathematics book})
= P (AM) + P (BM)
(addition of probabilities)
1 10 1 8
P (none of them contracted a lung disease)    
2 16 2 20
= P (NNN) = 0.8 × 0.8 × 0.8 (multiplication 41
of probability) = 0.512  .
80

1. The probability of raining on day 1 is 0.2 2. A bag contains 5 red balls and 8 yellow
and on day 2 is 0.3. What is the probability balls. It also contains 4 green and 7 black
of raining on both the days? balls. If a ball is drawn at random, then find
(A) 0.2 (B) 0.1 the probability that is is not green.
(C) 0.06 (D) 0.25 (A) 5/6 (B) 1/4 (C) 1/6 (D) 7/4

ANCE 182
 Probability
n
3. A bag contains 2 red, 3 green and 2 blue n 3
(A) 5 (B)  
balls. 2 balls are to be drawn randomly. 4
n
What is the probability that the balls drawn 3
(C)   (D) 2n
contain no blue ball? 5
5 10 8. If events A and B are independent and
(A) (B)
7 21 P(A ) = 0.15, P(A  B) = 0.45, then
2 11 P(B) = ________
(C) (D)
7 21 6 6
(A) (B)
4. If the probability that A will live 15 years is 13 17
7 9 6 6
and that B will live 15 years is , then (C) (D)
8 10 19 23
what is the probability that both will live 9. One hundered identical coins each with
15 years? probability p of showing up heads are tossed.
1 63 If 0 < p < 1 and the probability of heads
(A) (B)
20 80 showing on 50 coins is equal to that of heads
1 on 51 coins; then the value of p is -
(C) (D) None
5 1 49
5. Suppose six coins are flipped. Then the (A) (B)
2 101
probability of getting at least one tail is - 50 51
71 53 (C) (D)
(A) (B) 101 101
72 54
10. The probability that Kumar will hit a target
63 1
(C) (D) is given as 1/5. Then, his probability of atleast
64 12
one hit in 10 shots is -
6. The probability that a student is not a 10
swimmer is 1/5. Then the probability that 1 4
(A) (B) 1   
out of the five students, four are swimmers, 610 5
is - 1 1
(C) 1 (D) 1 19
2 510 5
5  4 1
(A) C2     11. Two dice are tossed. The probability that
5 5
4 the total score is a prime number is -
4 1
(B)     1 5
 5 5 (A) (B)
4
6 12
 1  4  1 7
(C) 5C1     (C) (D)
 5  5  2 9
(D) None of these 12. If the probability that A will live 15 years is
7. A set A is containing n elements. A subset P 7 9
and that B will live 15 years is , then
of A is chosen at random. The set is 8 10
reconstructed by replacing the elements of what is the probability that both will live
P. A subset of A is again chosen at random. after 15 years?
The probability that P and Q have no 1 63 1
common element is - (A) (B) (C) (D) None
20 80 5

ANCE 183
 Probability

13. Four different objects 1, 2, 3, 4 are (A) 37/256 (B) 25/57

distributed at random in four places marked (C) 1/13 (D) None
1, 2, 3, 4. What is the probability that 20. In a bag containing three balls, a white ball
none of the objects occupy the place was placed, and then one ball was taken
corresponding to its number? out at random. What is the probability that
(A) 17/24 (B) 3/8 the extracted ball would turn out to be white,
(C) 1/2 (D) 5/8 if all possible hypothesis concerning the
14. Three students try to solve a problem colour of the balls that were initially in the
independently with a probability of solving it bag were equally possible?
as 1/3, 2/5, 5/12 respectively. What is the (A ) 5/8 (B) 3/4
probability that the problem is solved? (C) 1/2 (D) 3/8
(A) 1/18 (B) 12/30 21. From a box containing 60 standard and 40
(C) 23/30 (D) 1/2 substandard articles, two articles are chosen
15. If the probability of rain on any given day in at random. What is the probability that one
Pune city is 50%, then what is the of t hem i s st andar d and t he ot her
probability that it rains on exactly 3 days in substandard?
a 5-day period? 60 40
(A ) 
(A) 8/125 (B) 5/16 100 100
(C) 8/25 (D) 2/25 60 39
(B) 
16. The probability that an even A happens in 100 100
one trial of an experiment is 0.4. Three 16
(C)
independent trials of the experiment are 33
(D) 24%
formed. The probability that the even A
happens at least once is - 22. From a normal pack of cards, a card is
(A) 0.934 (B) 0.784 drawn at random. The probability of getting
(C) 0.548 (D) 0.343 a jack or a king is -
17. A number is chosen at random among the 2 1
(A) (B)
first 120 natural numbers. The probability of 52 52
the number chosen being a multiple of 5 or 2
(C) (D) none
15 is - 13
(A) 1/5 (B) 1/6 23. Two numbers are chosen from 1 to 5. The
(C) 1/7 (D) 1/9 probability for the two numbers to be
18. From a pack of 52 playing cards, two cards consecutive is -
are drawn together at random. Calculate the 1 2
(A) (B)
probability of both the cards being kings - 5 5
(A) 1/15 (B) 25/57 1 2
(C) (D)
(C) 35/256 (D) None 10 10
19. What is the possibility of getting at least 24. Two dice are thrown at a time. The
6 heads if eight coins are tossed probability that the difference of the
simultaneously? numbers shown on the dice is 1 is -

ANCE 184
 Probability

5 1 2
(A) (B) (A)
18 36 25
1 23
(C) (D) none (B)
6 25
25. A bag contains 3 white and 5 red balls. If 10
(C)
a ball is drawn at random, the probability 25
that the drawn ball to be red is - 9
(D)
3 5 25
(A) (B)
8 8 29.29. In a single throw of two dice, the probability
3 5 of getting a sum of 10 is -
(C) (D)
15 15 1
(A)
26. The probability of getting an even number 12
when a dice is rolled is - 1
(B)
1 1 36
(A) (B) 1
6 36 (C)
1 6
(C) (D) none (D) none
2
A card is drawn from a packet of 100 cards 30. Three letters, to each of which corresponds
27.
an addressed envelope are placed in the
numbered 1 to 100. The probability of
envelopes at random. The probability that
drawing a number which is a square is -
all letters are placed in the right envelopes
1 9 in -
(A) (B)
10 100 1
1 2 (A)
(C) (D) 3
100 100 (B) 1
28. The probability for a randomly selected 1
number out of 1, 2, 3, 4, ..........., 25 to be (C)
6
a prime number is - (D) 0

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . C A B B C B A B D B
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B B C C B B A D A A
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans . C C B A B C A D A C

ANCE 185